Manual Operator Components and Networking

Introduction

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl Operator Components and Networking Manual

Applicable to controller SINUMERIC 840D sl/840DE sl SINUMERIC 840Di sl/840DiE sl

01/2008

6FC5397-1AP10-2BA0

The correct order no. is: 6FC5397-1AP10-3BA0

Connection conditions

1

Operator panel front: OP 08T

2

Operator panel front: OP 010

3

Operator panel front: OP 010S

4

Operator panel front: OP 010C

5


6

Operator panel front: OP 012T

7


8

Operator panel front: OP 015A

9

Operator panel front: TP 015A

10

Operator panel front: OP 015AT

11

Operator panel front: TP 015AT

12

Direct control key module

13

PCU 50.3

14

PCU 321

15

Thin Client Unit (TCU)

16

Handheld Terminal HT 2

17


18

Mini-handheld unit

19

Handheld unit / distributor box

20

Machine control panel: MCP 483C IE

21

Machine control panel: MCP 483 IE

22

Machine control panel: MCP 483

23

Machine control panel: MCP 310C IE

24

Machine control panel: MCP 310 IE

25

Machine control panel: MCP 310

26

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 IE

27

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483

28

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 310 IE H

29

Electronic handwheels

30

Handwheel connection module

31

Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C

32

Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C

33

Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US

34

Standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US

35

Keyboard tray

36

CompactFlash card

37

3.5" floppy disk drive with USB interface

38

Card reader with USB interface

39

Heat dissipation

40

Networking

41

ESD guidelines

A

Licenses

B

List of abbreviations

C

Appendix

D

Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage Note the following: WARNING This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 48 48 90327 NÜRNBERG GERMANY

Ordernumber: 6FC5397-1AP10-2BA0 Ⓟ 03/2008

Copyright © Siemens AG 2008. Technical data subject to change

Introduction Layout of manual SINUMERIK® Documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts: ● General documentation ● User documentation ● Manufacturer/service documentation A list of documents, updated on a monthly basis and indicating the available languages, is available on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol Select "Support" → "Technical Documentation" → "Overview of Documents". The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at: http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can be found at the following website: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu item "Support".

Target group This documentation is intended for: ● Project engineers, electricians and installers ● Service and operating personnel

Standard version This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version. Any additions or modifications implemented by the machine manufacturer will be documented by the machine manufacturer. Other functions not described in this documentation may be executable in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing. For the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation, or maintenance.

Operator Components and Networking Manual, 01/2008, 6FC5397-1AP10-2BA0

3

Introduction

Technical Support If you have any technical questions, please contact our hotline: Europe / Africa Phone

+49 180 5050 222

Fax

+49 180 5050 223

Internet

http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request America

Phone

+1 423 262 2522

Fax

+1 423 262 2200

E-Mail

[email protected] Asia/Pacific

Phone

+86 1064 719 990

Fax

+86 1064 747 474

E-Mail

[email protected]

Note Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided at the following Internet address: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Questions about the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please fax or e-mail us: Fax

+49 9131 98 63315

E-Mail

[email protected]

A fax form is available in the appendix of this document.

SINUMERIK Internet address http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

EU Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found/obtained from: the internet: http://support.automation.siemens.com under the Product/Order No. 15257461 or at the relevant branch office of the A&D MC division of Siemens AG.

4


Introduction

Notes Danger notices The following notices are intended to ensure both your personal safety and to prevent damage occurring to the products described or any connected devices and machines. WARNING Operating electrical equipment has parts and components that are at hazardous voltage levels. Actions by an unqualified device/system operator or failure to observe the warning notices may result in serious physical injury or material damage. Only suitably qualified personnel, trained in assembling, installing, commissioning or operating the product should work on this device/system. Should it be necessary to test or take measurements on live equipment, then the specifications and procedures defined in Accident Prevention Regulation VBG 4.0 must be adhered to, in particular § 8 "Permissible deviations when working on live components". Suitable electric tools should be used. WARNING Repairs to devices that have been supplied by our company must only be carried out by SIEMENS Customer Service or by repair centers authorized by SIEMENS. When replacing parts or components, only use those parts that are included in the spare parts list. Before opening the device, always disconnect the power supply. EMERGENCY STOP devices complying with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must remain effective in all automation equipment modes. Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP device must not cause an uncontrolled or undefined restart. Additional external measures must be taken, or devices must be created that enforce a safe operational state even when there is a fault (e.g. using independent limit value switches, mechanical locks, etc.) at any location in the automation equipment where faults might cause major material damage or even physical injury, in other words, where faults could be dangerous. CAUTION Connecting cables and signal lines should be installed so that inductive and capacitive interference do not in any way impair the automation functions.


5

Introduction

General Information Note Denotes an important item of information about the product, handling of the product or a section of the documentation which requires particular attention.

Machine manufacturer This pictorial symbol always appears in this document to indicate that the machine manufacturer can affect or modify the function described. Observe the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

6


Table of contents Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 3 1

2

3

Connection conditions ............................................................................................................................. 25 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7

Secondary electrical conditions ...................................................................................................25 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................25 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)...........................................................................................26 Power supply................................................................................................................................27 Protective separation as per EN 61800-5-1.................................................................................28 Grounding concept.......................................................................................................................30 RI suppression measures ............................................................................................................32 Pin assignment of the interfaces..................................................................................................33

1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3

Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions ...............................................................................44 Relevant standards ......................................................................................................................44 Transport and storage conditions ................................................................................................44 Operating conditions ....................................................................................................................46

1.3

MPI/OPI networking rules ............................................................................................................47

1.4

Handling membrane connectors ..................................................................................................49

Operator panel front: OP 08T .................................................................................................................. 51 2.1

Description ...................................................................................................................................51

2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3

Control and display elements.......................................................................................................53 View .............................................................................................................................................53 Keyboard and display ..................................................................................................................54 Screen brightness control ............................................................................................................55

2.3

Interfaces .....................................................................................................................................57

2.4

Installation ....................................................................................................................................58

2.5

Technical data..............................................................................................................................60

2.6

Spare parts...................................................................................................................................61

2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2

Accessories..................................................................................................................................62 Overview ......................................................................................................................................62 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels .......................................................................62

Operator panel front: OP 010................................................................................................................... 67 3.1

Description ...................................................................................................................................67

3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3

Operating and display elements ..................................................................................................68 View .............................................................................................................................................68 Keyboard and display ..................................................................................................................69 Screen saver ................................................................................................................................70

3.3

Interfaces .....................................................................................................................................71

3.4 3.4.1

Mounting ......................................................................................................................................73 Preparation for mounting .............................................................................................................73


7

Table of contents

4

5

6

8

3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4

Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU............................................................................................. 74 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................... 74 Softkey labeling........................................................................................................................... 74

3.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................. 76

3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................. 78 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 78 Replacement ............................................................................................................................... 79

Operator panel front: OP 010S ................................................................................................................ 83 4.1

Description .................................................................................................................................. 83

4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3

Operating and display elements ................................................................................................. 84 View............................................................................................................................................. 84 Keyboard and display.................................................................................................................. 85 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................... 85

4.3

Interfaces..................................................................................................................................... 86

4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3

Mounting...................................................................................................................................... 88 Preparation for mounting............................................................................................................. 88 Assembling an OP 010S and a PCU .......................................................................................... 89 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................... 91

4.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................. 92

4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................. 94 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 94 Replacement ............................................................................................................................... 95

Operator panel front: OP 010C ................................................................................................................ 97 5.1

Description .................................................................................................................................. 97

5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3

Operating and display elements ................................................................................................. 98 View............................................................................................................................................. 98 Keyboard and display.................................................................................................................. 99 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 100

5.3

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 101

5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3

Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 103 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................... 103 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU ........................................................................................ 103 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................. 104

5.5

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 106

5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2

Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 108 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 108 Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 109

Operator panel front: OP 012................................................................................................................. 111 6.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 111

6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3

Operating and display elements ............................................................................................... 112 View........................................................................................................................................... 112 Keyboard and display................................................................................................................ 113 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 114

6.3

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 115


Table of contents

7

8

9

6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................117 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................117 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU ...........................................................................................118 Mounting on the mounting wall ..................................................................................................121 Softkey labeling..........................................................................................................................121

6.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................123

6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................125 Overview ....................................................................................................................................125 Replacement ..............................................................................................................................126

Operator panel front: OP 012T .............................................................................................................. 129 7.1

Description .................................................................................................................................129

7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3

Operating and display elements ................................................................................................131 View ...........................................................................................................................................131 Keyboard and display ................................................................................................................132 Screen saver ..............................................................................................................................133

7.3

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................134

7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................135 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................135 Mounting on the mounting wall ..................................................................................................136 Direct control key module connection........................................................................................138

7.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................139

7.6

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................140

7.7

Accessories................................................................................................................................141

Operator panel front: OP 015................................................................................................................. 143 8.1

Description .................................................................................................................................143

8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3


8.3

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................146

8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................148 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................148 Assembling an OP 015 and a PCU ...........................................................................................149 Mounting on the mounting wall ..................................................................................................149

8.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................151

8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2


Operator panel front: OP 015A .............................................................................................................. 157 9.1

Description .................................................................................................................................157

9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3



9

Table of contents

10

11

9.3

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 161

9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4

Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 163 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................... 163 Assembling an OP 015A and a PCU ........................................................................................ 164 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................. 166 Softkey labeling......................................................................................................................... 167

9.5

Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 169

9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2


Operator panel front: TP 015A............................................................................................................... 181 10.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 181

10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4

Operating and display elements ............................................................................................... 182 View........................................................................................................................................... 182 Operation................................................................................................................................... 183 Keyboard and display................................................................................................................ 183 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 185

10.3

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 186

10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.4.4 10.4.5

Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 188 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................... 188 Assembling TP 015A and PCU................................................................................................. 189 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................. 191 Calibration of the touch screen ................................................................................................. 192 Softkey labeling......................................................................................................................... 192

10.5

Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 194

10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2


Operator panel front: OP 015AT ............................................................................................................ 207 11.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 207

11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3

Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 209 View........................................................................................................................................... 209 Keyboard and display................................................................................................................ 210 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 211

11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 212 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 212 Description ................................................................................................................................ 213

11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2

Installation ................................................................................................................................. 215 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 215 Softkey labeling......................................................................................................................... 216

11.5

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 217

11.6 11.6.1 11.6.2

Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 218 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 218 Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 219

12

Operator panel front: TP 015AT............................................................................................................. 227

10


Table of contents

13

14

12.1

Description .................................................................................................................................227

12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.2.3 12.2.4

Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................229 View ...........................................................................................................................................229 Operation ...................................................................................................................................230 Keyboard and display ................................................................................................................230 Screen saver ..............................................................................................................................232

12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................233 Overview ....................................................................................................................................233 Description .................................................................................................................................234

12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3

Installation ..................................................................................................................................236 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................236 Touchscreen calibration.............................................................................................................237 Softkey labeling..........................................................................................................................237

12.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................239

12.6 12.6.1 12.6.2

Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................240 Overview ....................................................................................................................................240 Replacement ..............................................................................................................................241

Direct control key module ...................................................................................................................... 251 13.1

Description .................................................................................................................................251

13.2

Operating and display elements ................................................................................................252

13.3

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................253

13.4 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 13.4.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................255 Overview ....................................................................................................................................255 Combination with OP 012 ..........................................................................................................256 Combination with OP 015A........................................................................................................259 Combination with TP 015A ........................................................................................................262

13.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................265

PCU 50.3 ............................................................................................................................................... 267 14.1

Description .................................................................................................................................267

14.2


14.3 14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.2.1 14.3.2.2

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................271 External interfaces .....................................................................................................................271 Internal interfaces ......................................................................................................................273 Connector assignment of motherboard .....................................................................................273 Connector assignment of bus board..........................................................................................278

14.4 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 14.4.4 14.4.5 14.4.6 14.4.7

Installation ..................................................................................................................................282 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................282 Assembly of PCU and operator panel front (standard mounting)..............................................286 Flat mounting .............................................................................................................................287 Upright mounting........................................................................................................................289 Notes on installation...................................................................................................................290 Mounting the Ethernet tension relief ..........................................................................................292 Installing the anchor tie ..............................................................................................................294

14.5 14.5.1 14.5.2

Connections ...............................................................................................................................295 Ground terminal .........................................................................................................................295 I/O devices .................................................................................................................................295


11

Table of contents

15

12

14.5.3 14.5.4

DC power supply (24V) ............................................................................................................. 296 Equipotential ............................................................................................................................. 297

14.6 14.6.1 14.6.2 14.6.2.1 14.6.2.2 14.6.2.3 14.6.3 14.6.4 14.6.5 14.6.6 14.6.7

Start up...................................................................................................................................... 298 Locking / unlocking hard disk.................................................................................................... 298 BIOS.......................................................................................................................................... 299 BIOS powering up ..................................................................................................................... 299 Changing the BIOS settings...................................................................................................... 301 Status display............................................................................................................................ 302 System start .............................................................................................................................. 303 Switching off / reset................................................................................................................... 303 Calibration of the touch screen ................................................................................................. 304 Operation with an S7-CPU (without NCU) ................................................................................ 306 Configuring the 'fb9_proxy.ini' file ............................................................................................. 308

14.7 14.7.1 14.7.2

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 312 PCU 50.3................................................................................................................................... 312 DC power supply module of 24 V (integrated) .......................................................................... 313

14.8 14.8.1 14.8.2 14.8.2.1 14.8.2.2 14.8.2.3 14.8.2.4 14.8.2.5

Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 315 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 315 Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 315 Hard disk drive .......................................................................................................................... 315 Power supply............................................................................................................................. 316 Power supply module fan.......................................................................................................... 318 Device fan ................................................................................................................................. 319 Battery ....................................................................................................................................... 320

14.9 14.9.1 14.9.2 14.9.2.1 14.9.2.2 14.9.2.3

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 323 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 323 Installing and removing expansion modules ............................................................................. 324 Memory expansion.................................................................................................................... 324 PCI cards................................................................................................................................... 326 CompactFlash card ................................................................................................................... 329

PCU 321 ................................................................................................................................................ 331 15.1 15.1.1 15.1.2 15.1.3

Description ................................................................................................................................ 331 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 331 System structure ....................................................................................................................... 332 Networking ................................................................................................................................ 333

15.2

Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 335

15.3 15.3.1 15.3.2


15.4 15.4.1 15.4.2 15.4.3 15.4.4

Installation ................................................................................................................................. 343 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 343 Preparation of the sectional rail for mounting ........................................................................... 343 Mounting the sectional rail on the surface ................................................................................ 345 Mounting modules on the mounting rail .................................................................................... 346

15.5 15.5.1 15.5.2

Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 347 Operation with an S7-CPU (without NCU) ................................................................................ 347 Configuring the 'fb9_proxy.ini' file ............................................................................................. 349

15.6

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 353

15.7

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 354


Table of contents

16

17

Thin Client Unit (TCU) ........................................................................................................................... 355 16.1 16.1.1 16.1.2

Description .................................................................................................................................355 Overview ....................................................................................................................................355 Configurations ............................................................................................................................356

16.2

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................359

16.3

Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front ..........................................................................361

16.4

Technical data............................................................................................................................364

16.5

Accessories................................................................................................................................365

Handheld Terminal HT 2........................................................................................................................ 367 17.1

Description .................................................................................................................................367

17.2 17.2.1 17.2.2

Operator control and display elements ......................................................................................369 Overview ....................................................................................................................................369 Description .................................................................................................................................370

17.3 17.3.1 17.3.2 17.3.2.1 17.3.2.2 17.3.2.3 17.3.2.4 17.3.3 17.3.3.1 17.3.3.2 17.3.3.3 17.3.3.4 17.3.4 17.3.5 17.3.6 17.3.7

I/Os.............................................................................................................................................374 Overview ....................................................................................................................................374 Terminal Box PN ........................................................................................................................375 Features .....................................................................................................................................375 Terminal box Plus PN ................................................................................................................377 Terminal box Basic PN ..............................................................................................................378 Interface assignments................................................................................................................379 Connection module Basic PN ....................................................................................................379 Features .....................................................................................................................................379 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................381 interfaces....................................................................................................................................382 Installing the terminating connector ...........................................................................................385 Connection examples for the agreement button........................................................................386 Connecting cable .......................................................................................................................389 MPP 483 HTC ............................................................................................................................392 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................392

17.4

Unplugging/plugging during operation .......................................................................................393

17.5 17.5.1 17.5.1.1 17.5.1.2 17.5.1.3 17.5.2

Commissioning...........................................................................................................................397 BIOS...........................................................................................................................................397 BIOS powering up......................................................................................................................397 Settings in the BIOS menu.........................................................................................................397 Error handling.............................................................................................................................399 Interface signals.........................................................................................................................401

17.6

Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................408

17.7

Maintenance and Service ..........................................................................................................409

17.8 17.8.1 17.8.2

Technical data............................................................................................................................410 Handheld Terminal HT 2............................................................................................................410 Connection module Basic PN ....................................................................................................412

17.9

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................413

17.10 17.10.1 17.10.2 17.10.3 17.10.4

Accessories................................................................................................................................414 Overview ....................................................................................................................................414 Mount .........................................................................................................................................415 Retaining magnet.......................................................................................................................416 Slide-in label...............................................................................................................................418


13

Table of contents

17.10.4.1 Labeling the slide-in labels........................................................................................................ 418 17.10.4.2 Replacing the slide-in labels ..................................................................................................... 422 18

19

14

Handheld Terminal HT 8........................................................................................................................ 423 18.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 423

18.2 18.2.1 18.2.2 18.2.3

Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 425 View........................................................................................................................................... 425 Description ................................................................................................................................ 427 Screen brightness control ......................................................................................................... 429

18.3 18.3.1 18.3.2


18.4 18.4.1 18.4.2 18.4.2.1 18.4.2.2 18.4.2.3 18.4.2.4 18.4.3 18.4.3.1 18.4.3.2 18.4.3.3 18.4.3.4 18.4.4 18.4.5 18.4.6

Ports .......................................................................................................................................... 433 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 433 Terminal Box PN ....................................................................................................................... 434 Features .................................................................................................................................... 434 Terminal box Plus PN ............................................................................................................... 436 Terminal box Basic PN.............................................................................................................. 437 Interface assignments ............................................................................................................... 438 Connecting module Basic PN ................................................................................................... 438 Features .................................................................................................................................... 438 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 440 interfaces................................................................................................................................... 441 Installing the terminating connector .......................................................................................... 444 MPP 483HTC ............................................................................................................................ 445 Connecting cables..................................................................................................................... 445 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................ 449

18.5 18.5.1 18.5.1.1 18.5.1.2 18.5.2 18.5.2.1 18.5.2.2

Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 450 HMI sl ........................................................................................................................................ 450 Configuring the traversing keys of the HT 8.............................................................................. 450 Activating/deactivating the virtual keyboard.............................................................................. 452 HMI Advanced........................................................................................................................... 452 Configuring the traversing keys of the HT 8.............................................................................. 452 Configuring user-specific key labeling ...................................................................................... 454

18.6

Unplugging/plugging during operation ...................................................................................... 457

18.7 18.7.1 18.7.2

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 461 Handheld Terminal HT 8 ........................................................................................................... 461 Connection module Basic PN ................................................................................................... 463

18.8

Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 464

18.9 18.9.1 18.9.2

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 465 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 465 Wall holder ................................................................................................................................ 465

Mini-handheld unit ................................................................................................................................. 467 19.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 467

19.2 19.2.1 19.2.2

Operating and display elements ............................................................................................... 468 View........................................................................................................................................... 468 Description ................................................................................................................................ 469

19.3

Connections .............................................................................................................................. 470


Table of contents

20

21

22

19.4

Configuring.................................................................................................................................474

19.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................476

19.6

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................477

19.7

Accessories................................................................................................................................479

Handheld unit / distributor box ............................................................................................................... 481 20.1

Description .................................................................................................................................481

20.2 20.2.1 20.2.2

Operating and display elements ................................................................................................482 View ...........................................................................................................................................482 Description .................................................................................................................................484

20.3 20.3.1 20.3.2

Connections ...............................................................................................................................486 Connecting a device ..................................................................................................................486 Connecting several devices .......................................................................................................487

20.4

Unplugging/plugging during operation .......................................................................................488

20.5 20.5.1 20.5.2 20.5.3

Start up.......................................................................................................................................491 Settings in handheld unit............................................................................................................491 Configuring.................................................................................................................................493 Interface signals.........................................................................................................................494

20.6 20.6.1 20.6.2 20.6.3 20.6.4

Distributor box for handheld unit ................................................................................................501 Overview ....................................................................................................................................501 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................502 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................505 Connections ...............................................................................................................................505

20.7

Technical data............................................................................................................................507

20.8

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................508

20.9

Accessories................................................................................................................................509

Machine control panel: MCP 483C IE .................................................................................................... 511 21.1

Description .................................................................................................................................511

21.2 21.2.1 21.2.2

Operating and display elements ................................................................................................513 Front side ...................................................................................................................................513 Rear side....................................................................................................................................516

21.3 21.3.1 21.3.2 21.3.3

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................517 Overview ....................................................................................................................................517 Description .................................................................................................................................517 Input / output images .................................................................................................................524

21.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................528

21.5

Connection via Ethernet.............................................................................................................530

21.6

Technical data............................................................................................................................531

21.7 21.7.1 21.7.2

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................532 Overview ....................................................................................................................................532 Replacing the rotary switch........................................................................................................532

21.8

Accessories................................................................................................................................535

Machine control panel: MCP 483 IE....................................................................................................... 537 22.1

Description .................................................................................................................................537


15

Table of contents

23

24

16

22.2 22.2.1 22.2.2

Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 539 Front side .................................................................................................................................. 539 Rear side ................................................................................................................................... 541

22.3 22.3.1 22.3.2 22.3.3

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 543 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 543 Description ................................................................................................................................ 544 Input / output images................................................................................................................. 552

22.4

Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 556

22.5

Connection via Ethernet............................................................................................................ 558

22.6

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 559

22.7 22.7.1 22.7.2

Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 560 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 560 Replacing the rotary switch ....................................................................................................... 560

22.8 22.8.1 22.8.2

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 563 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 563 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels .................................................................... 564

Machine control panel: MCP 483 ........................................................................................................... 569 23.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 569

23.2 23.2.1 23.2.2

Operating and display elements ............................................................................................... 571 Front side .................................................................................................................................. 571 Rear side ................................................................................................................................... 573

23.3

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 575

23.4

Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 580

23.5

Settings via DIP switch S3 ........................................................................................................ 582

23.6 23.6.1 23.6.2 23.6.3 23.6.4 23.6.5 23.6.6

Connection via PROFIBUS DP................................................................................................. 583 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 583 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 583 Functions of the machine control panel .................................................................................... 584 Configuring the DP slave MCP ................................................................................................. 585 Linking the DP slave MCP ........................................................................................................ 590 Input/output image of DP slave MCP........................................................................................ 593

23.7

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 596

23.8 23.8.1 23.8.2

Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 597 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 597 Replacing the rotary switch ....................................................................................................... 597

23.9 23.9.1 23.9.2

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 600 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 600 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels .................................................................... 600

Machine control panel: MCP 310C IE .................................................................................................... 607 24.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 607

24.2 24.2.1 24.2.2

Operator control and display elements ..................................................................................... 609 Front .......................................................................................................................................... 609 Rear side ................................................................................................................................... 611

24.3 24.3.1

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 612 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 612


Table of contents

25

26

24.3.2 24.3.3

Description .................................................................................................................................613 Input / output images .................................................................................................................620

24.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................624

24.5


24.6

Technical data............................................................................................................................627

24.7 24.7.1 24.7.2


24.8

Accessories................................................................................................................................629

Machine control panel: MCP 310 IE....................................................................................................... 631 25.1

Description .................................................................................................................................631

25.2 25.2.1 25.2.2

Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................633 Front side ...................................................................................................................................633 Rear side....................................................................................................................................635

25.3 25.3.1 25.3.2 25.3.3

interfaces....................................................................................................................................637 Overview ....................................................................................................................................637 Description .................................................................................................................................638 Input / output images .................................................................................................................646

25.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................650

25.5


25.6

Technical data............................................................................................................................653

25.7 25.7.1 25.7.2

Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................654 Overview ....................................................................................................................................654 Replacement ..............................................................................................................................654

25.8 25.8.1 25.8.2 25.8.3

Accessories................................................................................................................................655 Overview ....................................................................................................................................655 Labeling the slide-in labels.........................................................................................................656 Inserting the slide-in label "Part1" ..............................................................................................662

Machine control panel: MCP 310........................................................................................................... 665 26.1

Description .................................................................................................................................665

26.2 26.2.1 26.2.2

Operating and display elements ................................................................................................667 Front side ...................................................................................................................................667 Rear side....................................................................................................................................669

26.3

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................670

26.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................671

26.5

Settings via DIP switch S3 .........................................................................................................673

26.6 26.6.1 26.6.2 26.6.3 26.6.4 26.6.5 26.6.6

Connection via PROFIBUS DP..................................................................................................674 Overview ....................................................................................................................................674 Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................674 Functions of the machine control panel .....................................................................................675 Configuring the DP slave MCP ..................................................................................................676 Linking the DP slave MCP .........................................................................................................681 Input/output image of DP slave MCP.........................................................................................684

26.7

Technical data............................................................................................................................687


17

Table of contents

27

28

26.8 26.8.1 26.8.2


26.9 26.9.1 26.9.2 26.9.3

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 689 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 689 Labeling the slide-in labels........................................................................................................ 689 Inserting the slide-in label "Part1" ............................................................................................. 695

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 IE ............................................................................................... 699 27.1 27.1.1 27.1.2 27.1.3

Description ................................................................................................................................ 699 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 699 System features ........................................................................................................................ 700 Mechanical design .................................................................................................................... 702

27.2 27.2.1 27.2.2 27.2.3 27.2.4 27.2.4.1 27.2.4.2

Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 703 Standard versions ..................................................................................................................... 703 Special versions ........................................................................................................................ 706 Examples of assignment of free slots ....................................................................................... 709 Description ................................................................................................................................ 711 Device front ............................................................................................................................... 711 Device rear side ........................................................................................................................ 713

27.3 27.3.1 27.3.2 27.3.2.1 27.3.2.2 27.3.2.3 27.3.2.4 27.3.3 27.3.4

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 715 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 715 Description ................................................................................................................................ 717 Control panel............................................................................................................................. 717 COM board................................................................................................................................ 719 User keys .................................................................................................................................. 724 Handheld unit connection HT 8................................................................................................. 727 Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection.............. 731 Input / output images................................................................................................................. 732

27.4

Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 735

27.5 27.5.1 27.5.2 27.5.3

Ports .......................................................................................................................................... 738 MPP 483 IE ............................................................................................................................... 738 Customer keys .......................................................................................................................... 740 Handheld unit connection HT 8................................................................................................. 740

27.6

Circuits and wiring..................................................................................................................... 743

27.7

Initialization ............................................................................................................................... 748

27.8 27.8.1 27.8.2

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 750 MPP 483 IE ............................................................................................................................... 750 Input/output interface of individual wiring.................................................................................. 751

27.9

Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 754

27.10 27.10.1 27.10.2 27.10.3 27.10.4

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 755 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 755 Labeling the slide-in labels........................................................................................................ 755 Handwheel connection.............................................................................................................. 759 Retrofit control elements ........................................................................................................... 759

27.11

Service information ................................................................................................................... 761

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 ................................................................................................... 763 28.1

18

Description ................................................................................................................................ 763


Table of contents

29

28.1.1 28.1.2 28.1.3

Overview ....................................................................................................................................763 System features .........................................................................................................................765 Mechanical design .....................................................................................................................768

28.2 28.2.1 28.2.2 28.2.3 28.2.4 28.2.4.1 28.2.4.2

Operating and display elements ................................................................................................769 Standard versions ......................................................................................................................769 Special versions.........................................................................................................................772 Examples of assignment of free slots ........................................................................................775 Description .................................................................................................................................777 Device front ................................................................................................................................777 Device rear side .........................................................................................................................779

28.3 28.3.1 28.3.2 28.3.2.1 28.3.2.2 28.3.2.3 28.3.2.4 28.3.2.5 28.3.3 28.3.4

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................781 Overview ....................................................................................................................................781 Description .................................................................................................................................783 Control panel..............................................................................................................................783 COM board.................................................................................................................................785 User keys ...................................................................................................................................788 Handheld unit connection HT 6..................................................................................................791 Handheld unit connection HT 8..................................................................................................793 Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection...............797 Input / output images .................................................................................................................798

28.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................803

28.5 28.5.1 28.5.2 28.5.3 28.5.4 28.5.5

Connections ...............................................................................................................................806 Handheld unit connection HT 8..................................................................................................806 MPP 483 ....................................................................................................................................808 COM board.................................................................................................................................812 Customer keys ...........................................................................................................................813 Handheld unit connection HT 6..................................................................................................813

28.6

Circuits and wiring......................................................................................................................817

28.7

Initialization ................................................................................................................................822

28.8 28.8.1 28.8.2 28.8.3

PROFIBUS communication .......................................................................................................824 Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................824 Configuring the DP slave MPP 483 ...........................................................................................825 PLC user program......................................................................................................................828

28.9 28.9.1 28.9.2

Technical data............................................................................................................................830 MPP 483 ....................................................................................................................................830 Input/output interface of individual wiring...................................................................................831

28.10

Spare parts.................................................................................................................................834

28.11 28.11.1 28.11.2 28.11.3 28.11.4

Accessories................................................................................................................................835 Overview ....................................................................................................................................835 Labeling the slide-in labels.........................................................................................................835 Handwheel connection...............................................................................................................839 Retrofit control elements ............................................................................................................840

28.12

Service information ....................................................................................................................842

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 310 IE H ........................................................................................... 845 29.1 29.1.1 29.1.2 29.1.3

Description .................................................................................................................................845 Overview ....................................................................................................................................845 System features .........................................................................................................................846 Mechanical design .....................................................................................................................848


19

Table of contents

30

31

20

29.2 29.2.1 29.2.2 29.2.2.1 29.2.2.2

Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 849 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 849 Description ................................................................................................................................ 851 Device front ............................................................................................................................... 851 Device rear side ........................................................................................................................ 852

29.3 29.3.1 29.3.2 29.3.2.1 29.3.2.2 29.3.2.3 29.3.2.4 29.3.3 29.3.4

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 854 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 854 Description ................................................................................................................................ 856 Control panel............................................................................................................................. 856 COM board................................................................................................................................ 857 User keys .................................................................................................................................. 862 Handheld unit connection HT 8................................................................................................. 864 Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection.............. 867 Input / output images................................................................................................................. 868

29.4

Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 871

29.5 29.5.1 29.5.2 29.5.3

Connections .............................................................................................................................. 874 MPP 310 IE H ........................................................................................................................... 874 Customer keys .......................................................................................................................... 876 Handheld unit connection HT 8................................................................................................. 876

29.6

Circuits and wiring..................................................................................................................... 879

29.7

Initialization ............................................................................................................................... 883

29.8 29.8.1 29.8.2

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 885 MPP 310 IE H ........................................................................................................................... 885 Input/output interface of individual wiring.................................................................................. 886

29.9

Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 889

29.10 29.10.1 29.10.2 29.10.3 29.10.4

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 890 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 890 Labeling the slide-in labels........................................................................................................ 890 Handwheel connection.............................................................................................................. 894 Retrofit control elements ........................................................................................................... 895

29.11

Service information ................................................................................................................... 897

Electronic handwheels........................................................................................................................... 899 30.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 899

30.2 30.2.1 30.2.2 30.2.3 30.2.4 30.2.5

Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 901 Encoder with 120 mm x 120 mm front panel, setting wheel (...-5DB01) .................................. 901 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DC01) ............................... 903 Encoder without front panel, without setting wheel, mounting (...-5DF01) ............................... 905 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DH01) ............................... 907 Encoder without front panel, setting wheel, small (...-5DM00) ................................................. 908

30.3

Connections .............................................................................................................................. 910

30.4

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 911

30.5

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 912

Handwheel connection module.............................................................................................................. 913 31.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 913

31.2 31.2.1

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 914 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 914


Table of contents

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

31.2.2 31.2.3

Description .................................................................................................................................915 Input / output images .................................................................................................................920

31.3

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................922

31.4

Technical data............................................................................................................................924

31.5

Accessories................................................................................................................................925

Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C ................................................................................................................ 927 32.1

Description .................................................................................................................................927

32.2


32.3

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................931

32.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................932

32.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................935

32.6

Accessories................................................................................................................................936

Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C ................................................................................................................ 937 33.1

Description .................................................................................................................................937

33.2


33.3

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................939

33.4

Mounting ....................................................................................................................................940

33.5

Technical data............................................................................................................................943

33.6

Accessories................................................................................................................................944

Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US.................................................................................................... 945 34.1

Description .................................................................................................................................945

34.2

Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................946

34.3

Technical data............................................................................................................................947

Standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US.................................................................................................. 949 35.1

Description .................................................................................................................................949

35.2


35.3

Technical data............................................................................................................................951

Keyboard tray ........................................................................................................................................ 953 36.1

Description .................................................................................................................................953

36.2

Technical data............................................................................................................................954

CompactFlash card................................................................................................................................ 955 37.1

Description .................................................................................................................................955

37.2

Technical data............................................................................................................................956

3.5" floppy disk drive with USB interface................................................................................................ 957 38.1

Description .................................................................................................................................957

38.2 38.2.1

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................959 Hardware....................................................................................................................................959


21

Table of contents

39

40

41

38.2.2

Software .................................................................................................................................... 959

38.3

Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 960

38.4 38.4.1 38.4.2

Notes about operation............................................................................................................... 962 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 962 Floppy disk drive ....................................................................................................................... 962

38.5

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 964

Card reader with USB interface ............................................................................................................. 965 39.1

Description ................................................................................................................................ 965

39.2

Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 966

39.3

Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 967

39.4

Installation ................................................................................................................................. 968

39.5

Memory cards ........................................................................................................................... 969

39.6

Technical data........................................................................................................................... 970

39.7

Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 971

Heat dissipation ..................................................................................................................................... 973 40.1

Methods..................................................................................................................................... 973

40.2

Sample calculation of thermal power loss................................................................................. 975

Networking............................................................................................................................................. 977 41.1 41.1.1 41.1.1.1 41.1.1.2 41.1.1.3 41.1.1.4 41.1.2 41.1.2.1 41.1.2.2 41.1.2.3 41.1.2.4 41.1.2.5 41.1.2.6 41.1.2.7 41.1.2.8 41.1.3 41.1.3.1 41.1.3.2 41.1.3.3 41.1.3.4 41.1.3.5 41.1.3.6 41.1.3.7 41.1.4 41.1.4.1 41.1.4.2 41.1.4.3 41.1.4.4 41.1.4.5

22

Commissioning a system network ............................................................................................ 977 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 977 Settings for SINUMERIK solution line....................................................................................... 977 System boot with system network............................................................................................. 978 System configuration workflow.................................................................................................. 979 Factory default settings ............................................................................................................. 980 Comissioning NCU.................................................................................................................... 982 Synchronize DHCP server ........................................................................................................ 982 How to determine the IP address of the NCU........................................................................... 983 Settings in the "basesys.ini" file ................................................................................................ 984 Section [ExternalInterface] ........................................................................................................ 985 Section [InternalInterface] ......................................................................................................... 987 Section [IBNInterface] ............................................................................................................... 989 Section [LinuxBase] .................................................................................................................. 990 Example: Configuration file 'basesys.ini'................................................................................... 991 Commissioning TCU ................................................................................................................. 994 Thin Client Unit (TCU)............................................................................................................... 994 How to register a TCU on the system network ......................................................................... 995 Settings in the "config.ini" file .................................................................................................... 997 Settings in the "TCU.ini" file ...................................................................................................... 999 Displacement mechanism for TCUs ....................................................................................... 1002 Disable switchover between TCUs via PLC............................................................................ 1003 Example: How to select the behavior of the TCUs during boot up ......................................... 1006 System Network Center (SNC) ............................................................................................... 1006 Overview of System Network Center (SNC) functions ........................................................... 1006 How to select the network connection .................................................................................... 1008 How to configure a TCU.......................................................................................................... 1009 How to configure a VNC connection ....................................................................................... 1011 Procedure for configuring the TCU Support services ............................................................. 1013


Table of contents

41.1.4.6 Procedure for setting the TCU Support modes........................................................................1014 41.1.4.7 How to set the DHCP parameters............................................................................................1016 41.2 41.2.1 41.2.2 41.2.2.1 41.2.2.2 41.2.3 41.2.3.1 41.2.3.2 41.2.3.3 41.2.3.4 41.2.4

Network configuration ..............................................................................................................1018 Permissible network topologies ...............................................................................................1018 Networks without connection to the company network............................................................1019 Configuration 1: NCU and TCU ...............................................................................................1019 Configuration 2: NCU and PCU 50.3 with a direct OP ............................................................1020 Networks with NCU connection to the company network........................................................1021 Configuration 3: NCU and TCU ...............................................................................................1021 Configuration 4: NCU and PCU 50.3 with a direct OP ............................................................1022 Configuration 5: PCU with TCU on NCU .................................................................................1023 Connecting the programming device (PG) to the NCU............................................................1024 Application example.................................................................................................................1024

41.3 41.3.1 41.3.1.1 41.3.1.2 41.3.2 41.3.3

Service and diagnostics ...........................................................................................................1027 Booting of the TCU ..................................................................................................................1027 Messages during booting.........................................................................................................1027 Diagnostics options during booting..........................................................................................1027 How to calibrate a touch panel.................................................................................................1031 How to search for VNC servers ...............................................................................................1033

A

ESD guidelines .................................................................................................................................... 1035

B

Licenses .............................................................................................................................................. 1037 B.1

Licensing provisions.................................................................................................................1037

B.2

GNU (General Public License).................................................................................................1039

B.3

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE .........................................................................1044

B.4

BSD license text.......................................................................................................................1051

B.5

Winpcap.dll license text ...........................................................................................................1051

B.6

zlib license text.........................................................................................................................1052

C

List of abbreviations............................................................................................................................. 1053

D

Appendix.............................................................................................................................................. 1057 D.1

Key symbols OP 08T ...............................................................................................................1057

D.2

Feedback on the documentation..............................................................................................1060

D.3

Document tree sl ......................................................................................................................1061

Index.................................................................................................................................................... 1063


23

Table of contents

24


Connection conditions 1.1

Secondary electrical conditions

1.1.1

Prerequisites

1

Compliance with the connection conditions The controller is tested for compliance with the ambient conditions specified below. Troublefree operation is only ensured if: ● these ambient conditions are maintained when storing, transporting and operating the equipment. ● Original components and spare parts are used. This applies in particular to the use of specified cables and plug connectors. ● the equipment is correctly installed and commissioned.

DANGER The equipment may not be commissioned until it has been clearly identified that the machine in which the controller is installed, is in full conformance with the specifications in EC Directive 98/37/EC.

Additional Information Literature: /EMC/, EMC Configuration Guideline

Assistance and support The connection conditions must be carefully maintained while setting up the complete system. Please contact your local Siemens office or representative for any assistance. Note Please refer to the documentation for the respective operator components for information on deviations to the standard connection conditions.


25

Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions

1.1.2

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

RI suppression Applicable standards: EN 61000-6-3 and -4 Table 1-1

Limit values for radio interference suppression in industrial environments Limit class according to EN 55011

Conducted radio interference

A (industry)

Interference radiation

A (industry)

Note The user must consider interference radiation for the whole plant/system. Particular attention should be paid to cabling. Please contact your sales representative for assistance and support. If compliance with limit class B (residential areas) is required, please contact your local Siemens office or sales representative.

Interference immunity and low-frequency phenomena Applicable standard: EN 61000-6-2

26

Tested phenomena

Applicable standards

Static discharge

EN 61000-4-2

High-frequency radiation

EN 61000-4-3

Noise immunity (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Surge voltages

EN 61000-4-5

Cables subject to HF radiation

EN 61000-4-6

Magnetic fields with electrical power frequencies

EN 61000-4-8

Voltage dips and interruptions

EN 61000-4-11 and EN 61000-6-2

Commutation dips

EN 60146-1-1

Harmonic currents

EN 61000-3-2

Voltage fluctuations and flickers

EN 61000-3-3



1.1.3

Power supply

Requirements of AC power supply The AC power supply is only required for external devices and accessories and is not included in the standard delivery kit. Table 1-2

Requirements of AC power supply

Rated voltage

acc. to EN 61000-2-4 Frequency Powering up time when switched on

AC 230 V ∓ 30% 50/60 Hz ∓ 10% any

Harmonic content

According to EN 61000-2-4

≤ 10%

Transient voltage interruptions

Downtime Recovery time Events per hour

≤ 3 ms ≥ 10 s ≤ 10

Requirements of DC power supply DANGER The DC power supply is always referenced to ground and may not be generated by an autotransformer. User interfaces are powered via a DC power supply with protective separation according to EN 61800-5-1. In the case of supply lines > 10 m, protectors must be installed at the device input in order to protect against lightning (surge). The DC power supply must be connected to the ground/shield of the NC for EMC and/or functional reasons. For EMC reasons, this connection should only be made at one point. As a rule, the connection is provided as standard in the S7-300 I/Os. In exceptional circumstances when this is not the case, the ground connection should be made on the grounding rail of the NC cabinet (also refer to /EMC/EMC Installation Guide.)

Table 1-3

Requirements of the DC power supply

Rated voltage

Non-periodic overvoltages

Transient voltage interruptions


According to EN 61131-2 Voltage range (mean value) Voltage ripple, peak/peak Powering up time when switched on

24 V DC 20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC 5% (unsmoothed 6-pulse alignment) any

Period of overvoltage Recover time Events per hour

≤ 35 V ≤ 500 ms ≥ 50 s ≤ 10

Downtime Recovery time Events per hour

≤ 3 ms ≥ 10 s ≤ 10

27


1.1.4

Protective separation as per EN 61800-5-1 The complete system includes end user interfaces (EUI) and interfaces for servicing, startup and maintenance.

User Interfaces (UI) UIs are all the interfaces that are freely accessible to the machine operator without the need for tools or aids. These user interfaces are designed with protective separation as per EN 61800-5-1.

Interfaces for servicing, startup and maintenance DANGER The interfaces for servicing/installation and start-up/maintenance purposes are provided without protective separation. If necessary, these interfaces can be isolated safely using a supplementary adapter (insulation voltage 230 V AC). These adapters are not included in the Siemens delivery kit. You can buy these parts from your local dealer who will help you to make the proper choice. DANGER Protective separation can only be ensured if the system configuration specified below is strictly adhered to. When mounting additional components (e.g. S7-300 FM, IP) with an end user interface, please make sure that the end user interface has a basic insulation for at least 230 V AC.

28



The following picture shows the galvanic separation of the 840D sl/SINAMICS S120/S7-300 system. [9$& 1 3( +RXVLQJVKLHOG

0&3

3&87&8

9

0*1'

+7 'LVWULEXWRUER[

'VO 6,1$0,&66

6,2V

0DFKLQH

0 3HUVRQ %DVLFLQVXODWLRQ

Figure 1-1

3URWHFWLYHVHSDUDWLRQ

Safe isolation to EN 61800-5-1

1. Floating power supply of the SINAMICS electronics unit with 230 V AC basic insulation. 2. Floating transistor triggers for the three-phase rectifier bridge with 230 V AC basic insulation. 3. Floating transistor triggers for each axis of the three-phase inverter bridge with 230 V AC basic insulation. 4. Floating signal connection from the NC to the PCU/TCU or HT with 230 V AC basic insulation. 5. Non-floating signal line between NC and I/O devices. 6. Non-floating end user interface with protective separation for 230 VAC through interfaces 1 to 4 and 7. 7. Protectively separated 5 V DC power supply, fed from a protectively separated 24 V DC supply. 8. 24 V DC power supply unit for external devices and for the machine adaptation control according to applicable standards in the form of a PELV circuit (Protective Extra Low Voltage), provided with protective separation. 9. Floating interfaces to the machine (not accessible to the end user) 10.Floating signal interfaces directly accessible to the end user (e.g., V.24). For these interfaces, you must always make sure that there is either safe isolation with respect to the line supply voltage or that there are two basic insulation levels, for 230 V AC each. 11.5 V DC power supply with basic insulation, fed from a safely-isolated 24 V DC supply.


29


1.1.5

Grounding concept

Components The 840D solutionline system consists of a number of individual components, each of which must comply with EMC and the appropriate safety standards. The individual system components are: ● Numerical Control Unit (NCU): ● Machine control panel (MCP), pushbutton panel (MPP) ● Keyboard ● Operator panels (operator panel front + TCU/PCU) ● Distributor box and handheld unit ● S7-300 I/O with IM 153 interface module

Grounding measures The individual modules are attached to a metal cabinet panel by means of screws. Make sure that near the screws a low-impedance contact of the control unit with the cabinet panel can be made. Insulating paints at the contact point must be removed. The electronics unit grounds of the modules are connected to each other via DRIVE-CLiQ. It is permissible to cluster the operator control components regarding connection/potential bonding. Example: Operator station for a swiveling arm. Here, it is sufficient to connect the ground connections - PCU, TCU, operator panel front with one another using a cable and to route a common grounding cable to the central grounding connection in the control cabinet. Minimum cable cross section 10 mm2.

30



&DELQHW

'LVWULEXWRU ER[

2SHUDWRUSDQHO

1&8 3&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHO 7&8 IURQW 6/

3RZHU HOHFWURQLFV

0DFKLQHFRQWURO SDQHO

*URXQGIUDPH

,0

&RQWURO HOHFWURQLFV

6/

6/LQWKHPRWRUFDEOH

0%

0%

6,2V

* 0 *1'

3$ 3$

3$ 0DFKLQHEHG *URXQGLQJEDU &HQWUDOJURXQGLQJZLUHJURXQGLQJOHDG

Figure 1-2

Grounding concept

MB

Shielded signal cable with reference ground

M

Motor

G

Sensors

PA

Equipotential bonding conductor

SL

Protective conductor

The following rules apply for external cable cross sections: ● Minimum cross section ≥ 10 mm2 ● The cable cross section of the central protective conductor is calculated from the cable cross section of the line connection as follows: Line connection S (mm2)

Protective conductor SL min. (mm2)

S ≤ 16

S

16 ≤ S ≤ 35

16

S ≥ 35

S/2

Additional references /EMC/EMC Installation Guide


31


1.1.6

RI suppression measures In addition to the protective grounding of system components, special precautions must be taken to guarantee safe, trouble-free operation of the system. These measures include shielded signal cables, special equipotential bonding, separating, and shielding measures.

Shielded signal cables To ensure safe, interference-free system operation, it is essential to use the cables specified in the individual diagrams. For digital signal transmission, the shield must have a conductive connection at both sides of the housing. Exception: ● Standard shielded cables grounded on only one side can be used for devices from other manufacturers (printers, programming devices, etc.). These external devices may not be connected to the control during normal operation. However, if the system cannot be operated without them, then the cable shields must be connected at both ends. Furthermore, the external device must be connected to the control via an equipotential bonding cable.

Cable definition Definition: ● Signal cables (example) – Data cables (Ethernet, PROFIBUS, sensor cables, etc.) – Binary inputs and outputs – EMERGENCY OFF lines ● Load cables (example) – Low-voltage supply lines (230 V AC, +24 V DC, etc.) – Supply cables to contactors (primary and secondary circuit)

Rules for routing cables In order to achieve the best-possible noise immunity for the complete system (control, power section, machine) the following EMC measures must be observed: ● Signal cables and load cables must be routed at the greatest possible distance from one another. ● If necessary, signal and load cables may cross one another (if possible, at an angle of 90°), but must never be laid close or parallel to one another. ● Only cables provided by the NC manufacturer should be used as signal cables from and to the control unit. ● Signal cables may not be routed close to strong external magnetic fields (e.g. motors and transformers). ● Pulse-carrying HC/HV cables must always be laid completely separately from all other cables.

32


Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions ● If signal lines cannot be routed a sufficient distance away from other cables, they must be installed in grounded cable ducts (metal). ● The clearance (interference injection area) between the following lines must be kept to a minimum: – Signal cable and signal cable (twisted) – Signal line and associated equipotential bonding conductor – Equipotential bonding conductor and PE conductor (routed together) Note More information on RI suppression measures and connecting shielded cables can be found in the References: /EMC/EMC Installation Guide

1.1.7

Pin assignment of the interfaces The pins of the component interfaces are generally assigned as specified in the tables below. Any deviations are indicated at the relevant point. Signal type: I

Input

O

Output

B

Bi-directional (inputs/outputs)

V

Power supply

-

Ground (reference potential) or N.C. (not connected)

Parallel interface LPT1 Parallel interface on the PCU 50 / 70 for connecting a printer, for example Table 1-4

Assignment of the parallel interface LPT1

Connector

Pin 1 2-9

Strobe (CLK) Data bits 0, ..., 7

Type

Remark Open collector

O

TTL level

I

4.7 kΩ Pull Up

10

ACK (ACKNOWLEDGE)

11

BUSY

12

PE (PAPER END)

13

SELECT

14

AUTO FEED

O

Open collector

15

ERROR

I

4.7 kΩ Pull Up

16

INT

17

SELECT IN

O

Open Collector

GND

-

Ground (reference potential)

18-25


Name

33


Serial interface COM1 Serial interface on PCU 20 / 50 / 70 / HT 6 Table 1-5

Assignment of the serial interface COM1 (AG/V.24/modem)

Connector

Pin

Remark

-

Shielding

2

TxD (D1)

O

Serial transmit data

3

RxD (D2)

I

Serial receive data

4

RTS (S2)

O

Request To Send

5

CTS (M2)

6

DSR (M1)

I

7

GND (E2)

-


8

DCD (M5)

I

Receive signal level (carrier)

N.C.

-

Not connected

DTR (S1)

O

Data terminal ready

21

N.C.

-

Not connected

22

RI (M3)

|

Incoming call

N.C.

-

Not connected

20

Type

-

9-19

Name

1

23-25

Clear To Send Data Set Ready

Serial interface COM2 Serial interface on PCU 20 / 50 / 70 / HT 6 Table 1-6

Assignment of the serial interface COM2 (V.24/mouse)

Connector

34

Pin

Name

Type

Remark

1

DCD (M5)

2

RxD (D2)

3

TxD (D1)

4

DTR (S1)

O

Data terminal ready

5

GND (E2)

-


I

Receive signal level (carrier) Serial receive data Serial transmit data

6

DSR (M1)

I

Data Set Ready

7

RTS (S2)

O

Request To Send

8

CTS (M2)

9

RI (M3)

I

Clear To Send Incoming call



PS/2 interfaces Table 1-7

Assignment of the PS/2 interfaces (keyboard/mouse interface)

Connector (view of socket)

Pin

Name

Type

1

Keyboard_data

2

Mouse_data

3

GND

4

P5V_fused

5

Keyboard_CLK

6

Mouse_CLK

I V B

Remark Keyboard data cable Mouse data cable Ground (reference potential) + 5 V (fused) Keyboard clock line Mouse clock line

USB-A interface Table 1-8

Assignment of the USB-A interface

Connector (view of socket)

Pin

Name

Type

Remark

1

USB-P5V_fused

2

USB_D0M

V

+ 5 V (fused)

3

USB_D0P

B

Data+, USB channel 0

4

USB_GND

V


Data-, USB channel 0

MPI/DP interface Table 1-9

Assignment of the MPI/DP interface

Connector

Pin

Name

Type

1,2

N.C.

-

Not connected

3

LTG_B

B

Signal line B of MPI module

4

RTS_AS

I

Control signal for receive data current. Signal 1 active if directly connected interface module is sending.

5

M5EXT

VO

Return line (GND) of 5 V supply. Current load from a load of 90 mA max. connected between P5EXT and M5EXT.

6

P5EXT

VO

7

N.C.

-

Not connected

8

LTG_A

B

Signal line A of MPI module


Remark

5 V supply (current load see M5EXT)

35

Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions Connector

Pin

Name

9

RTS_PG

Type

Remark

O

RTS signal of MPI module; signal is "1", when PG is sending

-

On connector housing

Shielding

Ethernet RJ45 interface Table 1-10

Assignment of the Ethernet RJ45 interface

Connector

/('

/('

Pin

Name

Type

Remark

1

TxD+

2

TxD-

O

Send data

3

RxD+

I

Receive data

4/5

GND

-

- (terminated internally with 75 Ω; not required for data transmission)

6

RD-

I

Receive data

7/8

GND

-

- (terminated internally with 75 Ω; not required for data transmission) On connector housing

Shieldin g *) green LED (on right)

Off: 10 Mbps Lit: 100 Mbit/s

*) LED yellow (on left)

Lit: Active connection (e.g. to a hub) Flashing: Activity

*) if present

VGA Port Table 1-11

Assignment of VGA interface

Connector

36

Pin

Name

1

R

2

G

3

B

4

N.C.

5-8

GND

Type

Remark Red

O

Green Blue

-

Not connected System ground (reference potential)

9

5V

VO

+ 5 V (fused)

10

GND

VO

System ground (reference potential)

11

N.C.

-

Not connected

12

DDC_DAT

B

DDC data line

13

EXT_H

14

EXT_V

O

Horizontal synchronization Vertical synchronization



Pin

Name

15

DDC_CLK

Type B

Remark DDC clock line

DVI-I interface Table 1-12

Assignment of DVI-I interface

Connector

&

& &

& &


Pin

Name

Type

Remark

S

GND

-

Ground

S1

GND

-

Ground

C1

R

C2

G

C3

B

C4

HSYNC

Red O

Green Blue

O

Horizontal synchronizing pulse

C5

GND

-

Ground

CSA

GND

-

Ground

1

TX2N

2

TX2P

O

TDMS data 2+

TDMS data 2-

3

GND

-

Ground

4

N.C.

-

Not connected

5

N.C.

-

Not connected

6

DDC CLK

7

DDC CLK

B

DDC data

8

VSYNC

O

Vertical synchronizing pulse

DDC clock

9

TX1N

10

TX1P

O

TDMS data 1+

TDMS data 1-

11

GND

-

Ground

12

N.C.

-

Not connected

13

N.C.

-

Not connected

14

+5V

VO

+5V

15

GND

VO

Ground

16

MONDET

I

Hot plug detect

17

TX0N

18

TXoP

O

TDMS data 0+

19

GND

-

Ground

20

N.C.

-

Not connected

21

N.C.

-

Not connected

22

GND

-

Ground

23

TXCP

24

TXCN

O

TDMS data 0-

TDMS clock + TDMS clock -

37


C-MOS display interface D-STN and TFT displays with 5V CMOS interface and VGA resolution (640 x 480 pixels) can be connected to this interface. Maximum cable length: 50 cm. Table 1-13

38

Assignment of the display interface (C-MOS)

Pin

DSTN name

DSTN meaning

TFT name

TFT meaning

1/2

P5V_D-fused

+ 5 V (fused) Display VCC

P5V_D_fused

+ 5 V (fused) Display VCC

3

GND

-

GGND

-

4

CLK

Shift clock

CLK

Shift clock

5

GND

-

GND

-

6

LP

Horiz. Sync

Hsync

Horiz.

7

FP

Vert. Sync

Vsync

Vert.

Sync

Signal

Red bit 1

8

-

-

R0

9

-

-

R1

10

UD6

Upper data bit 6

R2

11

GND

-

GND

12

UD7

Upper data bit 7

R3

13

UD2

Upper data bit 2

R4

14

UD3

Upper data bit 3

R5

15

GND

-

GND

16

UD1

Upper data bit 1

G0

17

UD0

Upper data bit 0

G1

18

LD3

Lower data bit 6

G2

19

GND

-

GND

20

LD2

Lower data bit 2

G3

21

LD1

Lower data bit 1

G4

22

LD0

Lower data bit 0

G5

23

GND

-

GND

24

UD5

Lower data bit 5

B0

25

UD4

Lower data bit 4

B1

26

LD7

Lower data bit 7

B2

27

GND

-

GND

28

LD6

Lower data bit 6

B3

29

LD5

Lower data bit 5

B4

30

LD4

Lower data bit 4

B5

Red bit 0 (LSB) Red bit 2 Red bit 3 Signal

Red bit 4 Red bit 5 (MSB)

Green bit 0 (LSB) Signal

Green bit 1 Green bit 2

Green bit 3 Signal

Green bit 4 Green bit 5 (MSB)

Blue bit 0 (LSB) Signal

Blue bit 1 Blue bit 2

Blue bit 3 Signal

Blue bit 4 Blue bit 5 (MSB)

31

VCON

Contrast voltage

-

-

32

M

Data enable

ENAB

Data enable

33

DispOn

Display ON

DsipOn

Display ON

34

Res.

Reserved

Res.

Reserved



I/O USB interface All signals required for connecting operator panel fronts, with the exception of the display interface, are assigned to this interface. Associated interface cable:

K1

Connector type:

2 x 13-pin socket connector

Table 1-14

Allocation of the I/O USB interface

Connector

Pin 1

GND

2

P12C

VO

Ground +power supply for backlight inverter

BL_ON P5V_fused

VO

+ 5 V VCC (fused in A&D PC)

5

GND

VO

Ground

P3V3_fused

VO

N.C.

11

P5V_fused

12

USB_D1M

13

USB_D1P

14

GND

15

LCD_SEL0

16

LCD_SEL1

O

Meaning

4 6

Type

3

7 - 10

Name

VO B VO

Backlight On

+3.3 V VCC (fused in A&D PC) Not connected + 5 V VCC (fused in A&D PC) USB data- Channel 1 USB data+ Channel 1 Ground 1

I

Display type select signal

2

17

LCD_SEL2

18

LCD_SEL3

3

19

RESET_N

20

reserved

-

Reserved

21

HD_LED *)

O

HD LED, anode with 1 kΩ in series on the motherboard

22

DP_LED *)

O

MPI/DP LED, anode via 1 KΩ in series on the motherboard

23

Ethernet_LED *)

O

Ethernet LED, anode with 1 kΩ in series on the motherboard

24

TEMP_ERR

O

LED temperature sensor; anode with 1 kΩ in series on the board

25

RUN_R *)

O

Watchdog error LED, anode with 1 kΩ in series on the motherboard

26

RUN_G *)

O

Watchdog OK LED, anode with 1 kΩ in series on the motherboard

4 Reset signal (low active)

*) Signal only applies for PCU 50.3, otherwise it is N.C.


39


LVDS display interface channel 1 Used to connect operator panel fronts with TFT displays with 640 x 480 pixels (VGA), 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) or 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA). Associated interface cable:

K2, max. length: 0.5 m

Connector type:


Table 1-15

Allocation of the LVDS display interface

Connector

Pin

Name

1/2

P5V_D_fused

3

RXIN0-

4

RXIN0+

5/6

7

RXIN1-

8 9/10

40

P3V3_D_fused

Type VO

I VO

Meaning +5V display power supply (fused in A&D PC) LVDS input signal

Bit 0 (-) Bit 0 (+)

+3.3V display power supply (fused in A&D PC) Bit 1 (-)

RXIN1+

I

LVDS input signal

GND

-

System ground (reference potential) LVDS input signal

Bit 1 (+)

11

RXIN2-

12

RXIN2+

I

GND

-


O

LVDS cycle clock signal

13/14 15

RXCLKIN-

16

RXCLKIN+

17/18

GND

19/20

N.C.

-

Bit 2 (-) Bit 2 (+) (-) (+)

System ground (reference potential) Not connected



LVDS display interface channel 2 Used for expanding the LVDS display interface channel 1 to control TFT displays with 1280 x 1024 pixels (SXGA). Associated interface cable:

K3

Connector type:


Table 1-16

Allocation of the LVDS display interface

Connector

Pin

Name

Type

1/2

GND

-

3

RXIN10-

4

RXIN10+

I

GND

-

5/6

7

RXIN1-

8

RXIN1+

I

GND

-

9/10 11

RXIN2-

12

13/14 15



Bit 1 (+) LVDS input signal

RXIN2+

V

Ground LVDS cycle clock signal Ground

16

RXCLKIN+

17

GND

V

P12VF

VO

Bit 1 (-)


GND

O

Bit 0 (-) Bit 0 (+)

I

RXCLKIN-

18-20

Meaning

Bit 2 (-) Bit 2 (+) (-) (+)

+12 V fused

Compact Flash interface Table 1-17

Assignment of the Compact Flash interface

Connector


Pin

Name

Type

Meaning

1

GND

VO

Ground

2

IDE_D3

3

IDE_D4

4

IDE_D5

5

IDE_D6

6

IDE_D7

7

IDE_XCS0

8

IDE_A10 (GND)

9

XOE / ATA/ XSEL (GND)

10

IDE_A9 (GND)

11

IDE_A8 (GND)

data bit 3 data bit 4 I/O

data bit 5 data bit 6 data bit 7

O

chip select 0

VO

Address bit 10 to ground

O

Enables True IDE mode Address bit 9 to ground

VO


41


42

Pin

Name

Type

Meaning

12

IDE_A7 (GND)

13

P3V3


14

IDE_A6 (GND)

15

IDE_A5 (GND)

16

IDE_A4 (GND)


17

IDE_A3 (GND)


18

IDE_A2

Address bit 2

VO

+ 3.3V power Address bit 6 to ground

VO

O


19

IDE_A1

20

IDE_A0

Address bit 0

21

IDE_D0

data bit 0 I/O

Address bit 1

22

IDE_D1

23

IDE_D2

data bit 1

24

IDE_XIOCS16

I

I/O chip select 16

25

IDE_XCD2 (N.C.)

-

Not connected

26

IDE_XCD1

I

card detect

27

IDE_D11

data bit 11

28

IDE_D12

data bit 12

29

IDE_D13

data bit 2

I/O

data bit 13

30

IDE_D14

data bit 14

31

IDE_D15

data bit 15

32

IDE_XCS1

O

chip select 1

33

XVS1 (N.C.)

-

Voltage sense (unassigned)

34

IDE_XIOR

I/O read

35

IDE_XIOW

O

36

DIE_XWE

O

Write enable

I

Interrupt request

37

IDE_XIRQ

38

P3V3

39

I/O write

VO

+ 3.3V power

XCSEL

O

Cable select

40

XVS2 (N.C.)

-

Voltage sense (unassigned)

41

IDE_XRST

O

reset

42

IDE_XIORDY

I

I/O ready

43

DMARQ

I

DMA request

44

XDMACK

O

DMA acknowledge

45

XDASP (N.C.)

-

drive active/slave present (unassigned)

46

IDE_XPDIAG

I/O

47

IDE_D8

48

IDE_D9

49

IDE_D10

50

GND

Passed diagnostic data bit 8

I/O

data bit 9

VO

Ground

data bit 10



Power supply interface Table 1-18

Assignment of the power supply interface Pin 1


Name SHIELD

2

M24

3

P24

Type VI

Meaning Shield potential Ground 24V 24 V DC potential

43

Connection conditions 1.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions

1.2

Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions

1.2.1

Relevant standards

Test standards Vibratory load:

EN 60068–2–6

Shock load:

EN 60068–2–27

Climate:

EN 60068–2–1/EN 60068–2–2/EN 60068–2–14 EN 60068–2–30/EN 60068–2–31/EN 60068–2–32/ EN 60068–2–33/EN 60068–2–34

Requirements standards Long-term storage:

EN 60721–3–1

Transport:

EN 60721–3–2

Stationary operation:

EN 60721–3–3

Table 1-19

Mechanical ambient conditions Requirement criteria

Values

Frequency range Vibratory load

see technical data of the relevant component

Constant deflection Acceleration amplitude Acceleration

Shock stressing

Duration of nominal shock Number of nominal shocks

1.2.2

Transport and storage conditions

Components in original packaging The following specifications apply to components in transport packaging: Table 1-20

Climatic conditions for storage and transport

Temperature range Relative air humidity

44

See technical data of the relevant component Annual average

10 ... 75 %

Up to 30 days annually

≤ 95 %

Temperature change

Within one hour

< 18 K

Atmospheric pressure

The specified values apply to a transportation altitude of up to 3000 m above sea level

70 to 106 kPa



Shipping backup batteries Backup batteries may only be shipped in the original packaging. No special authorization is required to ship backup batteries. The lithium content is approximately 300 mg. Note The backup battery is classified as a hazardous substance, Class 9 in accordance with the relevant air-freight transportation regulations. DANGER Incorrect handling of backup batteries can lead to a risk of ignition, explosion and combustion. The stipulations of DIN EN 60086-4, in particular regarding avoidance of mechanical or electrical tampering of any kind, must be complied with.

Rules for handling backup batteries The following regulations according to DIN EN 60086 must be adhered to: Backup batteries ● May not be charged ● may not be heated or thrown into fires ● may not be pierced or crushed ● must not be tampered with mechanically or electrically in any way!

Rules for handling hard disks The PCU hard disk unit is provided with shock absorbers. However, the following rules must be observed when handling this unit. Hard disk unit ● should always be transported in its original packaging ● should not be thrown or dropped ● should not be dismantled from the mechanical components with which it was supplied ● should not be handled by its springs


45


1.2.3

Operating conditions

Climatic environmental conditions If the specified values cannot be maintained, a heat exchanger or an air conditioning unit must be provided. Table 1-21

Climatic ambient conditions

Temperature range

See technical data of the relevant component

Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5

Within one minute

Condensation, spraying water and icing

Not permissible

Temperature change

Within one hour

Max. 10 K

Atmospheric pressure

When operated at an altitude of 2000 m above sea level. For higher altitudes, the upper limit temperature must be reduced by 3.5 °C/500 m

82 kPa to 106 kPa

max. 0.1 %

Function-impairing gases Degree of severity 3C2 according to EN60721-3-3

Function-impairing dust When working in areas where there is an unacceptably high dust hazard, the control must be operated in a cabinet with a heat exchanger or in a cabinet with a suitable air intake. Maximum permissible dust contents in the air circulating in the cabinet: ● Proportion in suspension 0.2 mg/m3 ● Precipitation 1.5 mg/m2/h Note The dust precipitation must be removed at appropriate time intervals.

46


Connection conditions 1.3 MPI/OPI networking rules

1.3

MPI/OPI networking rules

Application The following devices can be interconnected across the MPI bus: ● NCU ● B-MPI The MPI interconnecting cables are available in different lengths.

Network installation Please take the following basic rules into account when undertaking network installations: 1. The MPI connection can be routed from one user to the next by plugging the MPI connector of the outgoing cable onto the MPI connector of the incoming cable. 2. The bus line must be terminated at both ends. Activate the terminating resistor in the MPI connector of the first and last for this purpose and deactivate the other terminal resistors (see figure below). Note: - Only two inserted terminators are permitted. - With B-MPI, bus terminating resistors are fitted permanently in the unit. 3. At least one terminator must be supplied with 5 V. The MPI connector with inserted terminating resistor must be connected to an activated unit for this purpose. NOTICE Connection to the control unit is suitable for this purpose. 4. Branch lines (supply cable from bus segment to user) should be as short as possible. Note: - Unused branch lines should be removed. 5. Each MPI node must first be connected and then enabled. When disconnecting an MPI node, first deactivate the connection, then remove the connector. 6. A maximum of two of the B-MPI components can be connected per bus segment provided that they have different user addresses. Setting the addresses: (also see corresponding components section): – via DIP switch or – the display (see section: "Handheld unit and distributor box") 7. At the distributor boxes of a B-MPI, no bus terminals may be inserted (see item 2.). 8. If more than one B-MPI is connected to a bus segment, this can be done with an intermediate repeater. 9. The following cable lengths for MPI or OPI for standard use without repeater may not be exceeded:


47

Connection conditions 1.3 MPI/OPI networking rules

MPI (187.5 kbaud):

Max. cable length 1000 m in total

OPI (1.5 MBaud):

Max. cable length 200 m in total

2II

2Q

2 1

2 1

7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU Figure 1-3

MPI connector

Literature: Catalog IK Pl - industrial communication for automation and drives

48


Connection conditions 1.4 Handling membrane connectors

1.4

Handling membrane connectors When replacing parts it can sometimes be necessary to disconnect membrane connectors from the boards and reconnect them again. This should be done as follows:

Figure 1-4

(1)

Removing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector

Clamping frame of socket

Unplugging the membrane connector 1. Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pushing it up with your fingernails until it engages in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. left). 2. Carefully pull off the membrane connector upward.

Plugging in the membrane connector 1. With the clamping frame in the upper position, carefully plug the membrane connector into the socket. 2. Lock it in place by pushing down the clamping frame (Figure right).


49

Connection conditions 1.4 Handling membrane connectors

50


Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.1

2

Description The extremely compact SINUMERIK OP 08T operator panel front enables a distributed configuration of the operator panel front and controller. The OP 08T operator panel front has a membrane keyboard with 79 keys (layout similar to SINUMERIK CNC editing keyboard KB 310C) as well as 2x8 horizontal and 2x8 vertical soft keys. The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance of two network nodes / access points. The operator panel front OP 08T is connected to the PCU / NCU via the Ethernet as thin client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU / NCU). The mixed operation with an operator panel front is possible directly at the PCU. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 08T operator panel front Order number: 6FC5203-0AF04-1BA0.

Features ● Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s ● 2x USB 1.1 for connecting the mouse, keyboard and USB flash drive (1x front / 1x rear) ● 7.5" TFT flat screen with VGA resolution 640x480 pixels ● Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor and control keypad ● Softkeys / direct keys – 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function – 2x8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key function *) ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) ● Slight mounting depth ● Panel cutout (W x H): 285 x 304 mm ● IP65 protection ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear *) Direct control key function in case of SINUMERIK 840D sl /840Di sl


51

Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.1 Description The SINUMERIK OP 08T operator panel front can be used for: ● SINUMERIK 810D/840D – SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 ● SINUMERIK 840D sl – NCU 7xx – SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 ● SINUMERIK 840Di sl

52


Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.2 Control and display elements

2.2

Control and display elements

2.2.1

View

Figure 2-1

(1)

View of OP 08T operator panel front

Etc. key

(2)

Area switchover

(3)

Numeric key group

(4)

Cursor key group

(5)

Control key group

(6)

Interface USB 1.1

(7)

Alphabetic key group

(8)

Machine area

(9)

Recall

(10)

Softkeys and direct keys (vertical slide-in labels)

(11)

Softkeys


53

Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.2 Control and display elements

2.2.2

Keyboard and display

Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: ● The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. ● The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the - character and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. ● The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. ● The control key group includes special functions. ● The area switchover shows the main menu. ● The ETC key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. ● The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. ● The machine area key switches directly to the "Machine" operating area. ● The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed.

Switching between upper and lower case Upper case is always activated as standard. To switch to lower case, keep the SHIFT key pressed.

Overview of key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key

54

Function corresponds to PC key function

Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space

(only intended for internal keyboard changeover)

Home

Ctrl key

Page up

Alt key

Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert


Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.2 Control and display elements Key


Key


Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10

5 (in numeric key group)

A, ..., Z

F9

A, ..., Z F10

Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II.

2.2.3

Screen brightness control The screen darkening control of the OP 08T has two functions: ● Enhancing the life span of the backlight by reducing the brightness ● Protecting the TFT display against the so-called "burn-in effect", which arises when a picture with a high contrast is displayed on the screen for one hour without any change. The screen brightness control is designed in three stages. Stage 1: The brightness of the backlight is reduced / dimmed. Note Select the shortest possible response time for this stage.

Stage 2: The backlight remains dim. A black screen (screen brightness control) is shown on the screen. Note Activate the screen brightness control, in order to protect the TFT display against the socalled "burn-in effect".


55

Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.2 Control and display elements Stage 3: The backlight is switched off. A black screen (screensaver display) is shown on the screen. Note Set the response time for this stage in such a way that the backlight remains off for at least 15 minutes. Futher information under: /IM2/: Commissioning HMI Embedded /IM4/: Commissioning HMI Advanced

56


Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.3 Interfaces

2.3

Interfaces

Front ● USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard, mouse and USB FlashDrive (see section: "Control and display elements" → "View")

Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended.

Rear face ● Ethernet ● USB 1.1 ● Power Supply

Figure 2-2

Rear view of OP 08T operator panel front

Description

I/O

(1)

Strain relief for the connecting cable

(2)

Ethernet interface

X3

A

(3)

Interface USB 1.1

X20

A

(4)

Earthing connection

(5)

Power supply 24 VDC

(6)

Cable clamp


Type 8-pole RJ45 socket USB-A M5 screw

X81

I

3-pin terminal block

57

Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.4 Installation

2.4

Installation The OP 08T operator panel front is fixed in a rectangular section with clamps. For this reason, bore holes or screw holes are not needed. The tightening torque of the clamp set screws must not exceed 0.5 Nm. Table 2-1

Dimensions of the mounting opening OP 08T Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

285

304

41 *)

*) Plus 10 mm cable connector and ventilation clearance

Figure 2-3

58

Panel cutout OP 08T


Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.4 Installation

Dimension drawings

Figure 2-4

Dimension drawing OP 08T

5]

PPPP

;

0RXQWLQJIUDPH

$VSHU',1,62/

6HDO

;;

;

Figure 2-5

Dimensions of OP 08T clamps


59

Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.5 Technical data

2.5

Technical data Safety Degree of protection as per EN 60529

Front side IP65

Rear side IP10

Electrical data Power supply

24 VDC

Power consumption

maximum approx. 15 W

Mechanical data Dimensions (mm)

Width: 310

Height: 330

Depth: 41

Panel cutout (mm)

Width: 285

Height: 304

Depth: 51 *)

Weight

approx. 2.9 kg (without tension jack)

Tightening torques, max.

Tension jacks: 0.4 - 0.5 Nm

Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU)

Operation

Transport (in transport packaging)

Vibratory load as per EN 60068-2-6

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 1g

5 – 9 Hz: 6.2 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 2g

Shock load as per EN 60068-2-27

Acceleration: 5g shock duration: 30ms, load: 3x either direction (18x)

Acceleration: 30g shock duration: 6ms, load: 3x either direction (18x)

Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation

By natural convection

Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air

Not permissible Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation

Climate class Temperature limits Limit values for rel. humidity to DIN IEC 68-23, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN 68-2-56

Storage/shipping (in transport packaging)

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

0 ... 45 ºC (at front) 0 ... 55 ºC (at rear)

-20 ... 60 ºC

5 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C

Temperature change max. 10 K/h. Non-condensing

Display Size / resolution

7.5" TFT / 640x480 pixel (VGA)

*) due to cable connector and ventilation clearance

60


Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.6 Spare parts

2.6

Spare parts The following components are available as spare parts for the OP 08T operator panel front: Spare parts

Order No.:

Remarks

Tension jack (for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile strength, length: 20 mm)

6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Set of 9

Sealing caps for USB connection

6FC5248-0AF05-0BA0

Set of 5


61

Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.7 Accessories

2.7

Accessories

2.7.1

Overview The following accessories are available for the OP 08T operator panel front:

2.7.2

Component

Description

Slide-in labels

Slide-in labels (3 films DIN A4)

Amount

Order no.:

1

6FC5248-0AF04-1BA0.

Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels The OP 08T operator panel front is delivered ex-factory with two vertical slide-in labels (unprinted / background color: grayed-out).

Figure 2-6

(1)

Part 1

(2)

Part 2

Position of the vertical OP 08T slide-in labels

Upon request, a spare part packet with three blank films can be ordered, in order to print the slide-in labels with the key symbols (see section: "Spare parts" → "Overview").

62



Files for printing the blank film

Teil 2

M 06/1142 skpeth40000062 23.05.06 CR

Teil 1 Teil 2

1. Medium basic 701 HD

Teil 1

SINUMERIK Panel Slide-in strips, inscribable (3 membrane sheets A4) for OP08T A5E00801829 6FC5248-0AF04-1BA0 Beschriftungsplan/template: A5E00801907B siehe/as: DOCONCD Figure 2-7

Blank film OP 08T [printing direction (1)]

The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: ● Template_OP08T_13.doc ● Symbols_OP08T_13.doc The file "Template_OP08T_13.doc" is a template for the exact positioning of the symbols on the printable film.


63


Figure 2-8

(1)

Template_OP08T_13.doc (blank template for film)

Cutting edges

The file "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" contains a broad range of key symbols. An overview of these is given in the appendix.

Preparing slide-in labels Inserting symbols 1. Open the files "Template_OP08T_13.doc" and "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" in MS Word. 2. Select a key symbol from the file "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" by left-clicking. 3. Copy the desired symbol to the clipboard via "Edit" → "Copy" or "Ctrl + C" 4. Return to the template file "Template_OP08T_13.doc" 5. Position the cursor before the insertion point in the desired table cell (in Fig.: "Template_OP08T_13.doc the insertion point is displayed by "+"). 6. Insert the key symbol via "Edit" → "Paste" or "Ctrl + V". 7. Repeat steps two to six until you have inserted all the key symbols.

64



Inserting characters/text 1. Open the "Template_OP08T_13.doc" files in the MS Word text processing program. 2. Set the "Arial" font to format characters. (This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.) 3. Position the cursor in the desired table cell and enter characters/text.

Printing the slide-in labels 1. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see Fig.: "Blankfolie OP 08T"). 2. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 3. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note For labeling the labeling strips, HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 4. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (see Fig.: "Template_OP08T_13.doc"). 5. Round off the corners of the labeling strips approx. 3 mm to facilitate insertion.


65


Dimension drawings

)LOP',1$

3DUW

3DUW

3DUW

3DUW

&HQWHURIWKHNH\

5

Figure 2-9

Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels

Creating your own symbols ● Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): – Draw a 13 x 13 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. – Place the symbol in the center of this square. – Group the square and symbol together and add this group in the MS Word document Template_OP08T_13.doc. ● Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint) – Draw a square 13x13 mm (37x37 pixel), filled with the color white. – Draw the symbol in the center of this square. – Copy the symbol and the square together and add the group in the MS Word document Template_OP08T_13.doc.

66


Operator panel front: OP 010 3.1

3

Description The SINUMERIK OP 010 operator panel front has a 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) and features a 62-key membrane keypad (with 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys) that has been optimized for programming parts programs. Mounting is from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 010 operator panel front (order number 6FC 5203–0AF00–0AA1)

Features ● 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) ● Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm ● Small mounting depth ● 10.4” flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels using TFT technology ● Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, control and hotkey key groups ● Softkeys: 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since it is uppercase only) ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● Front USB interface ● Degree of protection IP65 ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear ● Can be combined with PCU, TCU


67

Operator panel front: OP 010 3.2 Operating and display elements

3.2

Operating and display elements

3.2.1

View

(5)

(5)

Figure 3-1

68

View of OP 010 operator panel front

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)

Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear)

(3)

Alpha key group

(4)

Numerical key group

(5)

Softkeys

(6)

Control key group

(7)

Hotkey group

(8)

Cursor key group

(9)

Front USB interface

(10)

Area switchover

(11)

etc. key

(12)

Machine area

(13)

Recall



3.2.2


Keyboard Several keys and key pads are arranged on the OP 010 operator panel front: ● The alphabetic key group contains the letters A, ..., Z on two levels, arranged in accordance with programming requirements for entering text. ● The numeric key group contains the digits 0 ... 9, the -, /,=, + characters and the decimal point for entering numerical characters and operators. ● The control key group includes special functions. ● The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas. ● The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. ● The area switchover shows the main menu. ● The ETC key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. ● The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. ● The machine area key switches directly to the "Machine" operating area. ● The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed.

Switching between upper and lower case To toggle between upper and a lower case letters, press the key combination CTRL + SHIFT Upper case is always activated as standard.




Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space


Home

Ctrl key

Page up

Alt key

69

Operator panel front: OP 010 3.2 Operating and display elements Key


Key


Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10

5 (in numeric key group) F9

A, ..., Z

A, ..., Z F10


3.2.3

Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated.

70


Operator panel front: OP 010 3.3 Interfaces

3.3

Interfaces This operator panel front has the following interfaces:

Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "View of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note You will notice that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended.

Rear side ● Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): – I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are responsible for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) – Display cable K2 ● Direct control key interface X11 (under cover plate) ● Interface X12 - reserved (under cover plate)

Figure 3-2

Connections on rear side of housing Connections to PCU

(1)

I/O USB cable K1

(2)

PCU main board

(3)

Cable clamp for the direct key module connection

(4)

Keyboard controller

(5)

Direct control key interface X11

(6)

Interface X12 (reserved)

(7)

Connection X14 for backlight

(8)

Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1

(9)

Display cable K2


71


Pin assignment More details in section: "Connection Conditions," section: "Secondary electrical conditions."

72


Operator panel front: OP 010 3.4 Mounting

3.4

Mounting

3.4.1

Preparation for mounting Table 3-1

Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below)

Used PCU type

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting panel surface

450

290

108.2 + 10

PCU 50.3

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is installed).

7HQVLRQMDFNV

6HWVFUHZV

PLQWRPD[

'LPHQVLRQVIRUWHQVLRQMDFNSUHVVXUHSRLQWV

Figure 3-3

0RXQWLQJSDQHO

6HDOLQJDUHD

Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010 operator panel front


73


3.4.2

Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU When combining an OP 010 and PCU and/or video link receiver, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installing them in the assembly panel.

Procedure To do this, proceed as described in section: “OP 012”, section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU". Then undo the shipping lock for the hard-drive, otherwise the system will not boot.

3.4.3

Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Figure: "Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front", section “OP 012,” section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU"). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation". NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5º from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by attached components (PCU, video link receiver, ...).

Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front," section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm).

3.4.4

Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the labels, DIN-A4 film is available (Order No., see Section: "Spare parts"). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.

74



Proceed as follows 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Remove the PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front. 4. Insert the strips into the slots provided on the rear side of the operator front panel. 5. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. If the operator panel front and PCU are dismantled, omit steps 3 and 5.


75

Operator panel front: OP 010 3.5 Technical data

3.5

Technical data Safety Protective class

III; PELV acc. to EN 50178

Degree of protection as per EN 60529

Front side IP65

Rear side IP 00

Approvals

CE / cULus

Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable)

Display

Backlight inverter

Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.)

5 V +/- 5% 280 / 380

Logic / USB (with / without load)

Power consumption

12 V +/-10% 750 / 1000

Typical, approx. 10 W

5.2 V +/-2% 350 / 1000

Maximum approx. 16 W

Mechanical data Dimensions

Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm

Mounting depth: 20 mm incl. PCU 50.3: 108.2 mm *)

Weight

approx. 5 kg


Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm


M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation

Transport

Vibratory load

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing

50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3

300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2

(in packaging)




Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity

76



EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C max. 0.1% /min


Operator panel front: OP 010 3.5 Technical data Display Size / resolution

10.4" / 640 x 480 pixels

MTBF backlight

typ. 50,000 h at 25 ºC (dependent on the temperature)

*) Plus 10 mm clearance


77

Operator panel front: OP 010 3.6 Spare parts

3.6

Spare parts

3.6.1

Overview The following diagram shows the OP 010 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts.

Figure 3-4

Individual parts for the OP 010 operator panel front

(1)

LCD unit

(2)

Backlight with backlight inverter

(3)

Display support

(4)

Keyboard controller

(5)

Cap for the USB port

6FC5248–0AF05–0AA0 Set of 10

(6)

Operator panel front without LCD unit

6FC5248–0AF00–0AA0

Spare parts

Order number

Remarks

Tension jacks

6FC5248–0AF06–0AA0 Set of 6

DIN A4 film

6FC5248–0AF07–0AA0 for slide-in labels for softkey labeling*) Set of 3

*) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram.

78



6OLGHLQODEHOV

3DUW

3.6.2

3DUW

&HQWHURIWKHNH\

Figure 3-5

5

3DUW

3DUW

3DUW

3DUW

Dimensions for DIN A4 film

Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)!

USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory.

Film labels The procedure for replacement is as described in section: “OP 012”, section: "Softkey labels."


79


Operator panel front When replacing the operator panel front, the previous LCD unit and keyboard controller can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.

Procedure

:LGWK WRS

&RYHUSODWHIRU &RQQHFWLRQV .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU

&DEOH FODPS 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH.

0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV 6OLWIRUVRIWNH\ODEHOLQJVWULSV

Figure 3-6

+HLJKW

'LVSOD\ VXSSRUWSODWH

&DVLQJVFUHZV

&DEOHVKRZQIROGHGWRJHWKHU

OP 010 rear side

1. Put the OP 010 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 casing screws (see figure above). 2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate. 3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see following Fig.): Backlight (socket X14) and I/O USB cable K1. 4. Lift off the display support with the display. In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USB interface become visible. 5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface.

80


Operator panel front: OP 010 3.6 Spare parts 6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure). 7. Remove the retaining screws from the keyboard controller. 8. Lift USB interface and keyboard controller off the front plate. The interconnections may remain plugged. 9. Install the components into the new operator front panel in reverse order (procedure: see Note). Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in section: "Connection Conditions," section: "Handling membrane connectors." When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical data").

Figure 3-7

(1)

Changing the operator panel front

USB port

(2)


(3)

Direct control key connection X11

(4)

Membrane connector for connecting the keyboard of the operator panel front

(5)

Keyboard controller

(6)

Connection X12 (reserved)

(7)


(8)

Connection X4 for mouse


81


82


Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.1

4

Description The slender SINUMERIK OP 010S operator panel front and 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features 8 +4 horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys. You can use the OP 032S or KB 310C full CNC keyboard for entering data. Mounting is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 010S operator panel front (order number 6FC5203–0AF04–0AA0)

Features The operator panel front OP 010S (successor to OP 032S) described in the following is characterized by: ● Mounting dimensions 310 x 330 mm ● Panel cutout (W x H): 285 x 304 mm ● Slight mounting depth ● 10.4" TFT flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels ● Mechanical keys: – 8 horizontal softkeys – 8 vertical softkeys – Four control keys ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● Front USB interface ● Degree of protection: IP54 ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear ● Can be combined with the PCU, TCU and full CNC keyboard KB 310C and/or OP 032S


83

Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.2 Operating and display elements

4.2


4.2.1

View

Figure 4-1

84

View of OP 010S operator panel front

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)

Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear.)

(3)

Softkeys

(4)

Etc. key

(5)

Area switchover

(6)

Softkeys

(7)

Front USB interface

(8)

Machine area

(9)

Recall


Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.2 Operating and display elements

4.2.2


Keyboard Several keys are arranged on the operator panel front: ● The eight vertical and horizontal softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. ● The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. ● The area switchover shows the main menu. ● The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. ● The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key


Key


F9

F9

F10

F10


4.2.3



85

Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.3 Interfaces

4.3


Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "Front view of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended.

Rear side ● Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): – I/O–USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) – Display cable K2

Figure 4-2

86

Connections on rear side of housing Connections to the PCU

(1)

Display cable K2

(2)

Back of operator panel

(3)

I/O USB cable K1


Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.3 Interfaces



87

Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.4 Mounting

4.4

Mounting

4.4.1



Used PCU type PCU 50.3

Width (mm)

Height (mm)


285

304

123.2 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010S, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted).

,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD

PLQPD[

5]

7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 6HDODUHD

Figure 4-3

88

3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV

Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front



Assembling an OP 010S and a PCU

&DVLQJ FRYHUSODWH

WRS

&RYHUSODWHIRU FRQQHFWLRQV NH\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU

4.4.2

,286% FDEOH. 'LVSOD\ FDEOH.

&DVLQJVFUHZV0 &DVLQJVFUHZV0IRU3&8PRXQWLQJRQWKHVLGH

Figure 4-4

Rear side of operator panel front with arrangement of interfaces and mounting screws

Procedure 1. Position the PCU almost at right-angles to the OP (see figure in section: "Interfaces"). 2. Insert cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP into the corresponding counterpieces behind the opening in the PCU casing. Ensure that the connectors snap in and that the locks are closed. 3. Fold the PCU onto the OP. 4. Using the four M3 and four M4 screws supplied, attach the PCU to the side of the OP (tightening torques: M3 – 0.8 Nm; M4 – 1.8 Nm). The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see following Figure). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and the section: "Heat dissipation."


89

'LPHQVLRQVLQPP

Figure 4-5

3&8 236

$GGLWLRQDOFOHDUDQFHIRU FRQQHFWLQJFDEOHIRU'L

&OHDUDQFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ

3&8

236


Mounting the PCU to the OP 010S operator panel front with clearances

NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5º from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, TCU, video link receiver, ...).

90



4.4.3

Mounting on the mounting wall When you are using a combination of OP 010S and PCU, it is advisable to install the OP 010S in the assembly panel first and then mount the PCU on the OP 010S.

Procedure 1. Insert the OP 010S in the panel cutout from the front. 2. Use 6 tension jacks to secure it in the panel cutout from the rear (see figure: "Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front," section: "Preparation for mounting"). 3. Tighten the setscrews (tightening torque 0.4 – 0.5 Nm).


91

Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.5 Technical data

4.5

Technical data Safety Protective class Degree of protection as per EN 60529

III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54

Rear side IP 00

Approvals

CE / cULus

Electrical data (without PCU) Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable)

Display


Voltage Current (typ. / max. mA; approx.) Power consumption

Backlight inverter

5 V +/- 5%

12 V +/- 10%

5.2 V +/-2%

420 / 600

900 / 1050

350 / 1000






Weight Tightening torques, max.

approx. 5.5 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm

Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibratory load

Shock stressing

M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation

Transport (in packaging)

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm

58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2

9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2

3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3


50

m/s2,

300 m/s2, 6ms

30ms,

18 shocks

18 shocks







Storage/transport (in shipping packaging)

Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits

EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

0 ... 45 ºC (at front)

-20 ... 60ºC

0 ... 55 ºC (at rear) Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity

92

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C max. 0.1% in 1 min


Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.5 Technical data Display Size / resolution

10.4 " TFT / 640 x 480 pixels

MTBF backlight




93

Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.6 Spare parts

4.6

Spare parts

4.6.1

Overview The diagram shows the OP 010S operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts.

Figure 4-6

Individual parts for the OP 010S operator panel front

Spare parts (1)

Operator panel front

Remarks

6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0

Without LCD unit, without USB port, without keyboard controller

(2)

Backlight with backlight inverter

(3)

Display holder with keyboard controller (rear side)

(4)

LCD unit

(5)


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0

Set of 10

Tension jacks

6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0

Set of 6

Spare parts

94

Order number

Order number

Remarks


Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.6 Spare parts

4.6.2



Operator panel front When changing the front plate, the existing USB interface and the display holder with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller can be reused.

Procedure

Figure 4-7

Keyboard controller

(1)

Membrane line from the operator panel front keyboard

(2)

Membrane line from the operator panel front keyboard

(3)


(4)

Connection X14 for display and backlight

(5)


(6)

USB membrane line

(7)


(8)

I/O USB cable K1

(9)

Display cable K2 Connections for the operator panel front keyboard

(10)

Connection for keyboard X8 of the operator panel front

(11)


(12)



95

Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.6 Spare parts 1. Put the OP 010S and the replacement front plate face down on a flat, soft surface. 2. Loosen the casing screws (see Figure: "Rear side of operator panel front" in section: "Mounting") and remove the casing cover plate. The display holder with the keyboard controller (see Fig. above) will be visible underneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USB interface (see Fig. below). 3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note for procedure). 4. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (see Fig. below) (procedure: see Note below). 5. Remove the screws of the display support and lift it off. 6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement front plate. 7. Place the display support on the replacement front plate. 8. Re-assemble the operator panel front in reverse order (procedure: see Note). Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in chapter: "Connection Conditions", section: "Handling membrane connectors". When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical data").

Figure 4-8

96

USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side

(1)

USB membrane line (see Fig.: "Keyboard controller")

(2)

USB port

(3)

Display support


Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.1

5

Description The SINUMERIK OP 010C operator panel front and 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features a 65-key mechanical keypad with 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys. The 6 hotkeys are designed with replaceable key covers for machine-specific adaptation. The key covers can be freely inscribed using a laser. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 010C operator panel front (order number 6FC5203–0AF01–0AA0)

Features ● 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) ● Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm ● Slight mounting depth ● 10.4" TFT flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels ● Mechanical short-stroke keys with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, control and hotkey key group ● Softkeys: – 1 horizontal row of 8 keys with softkey functions – 1 vertical row of 8 keys with softkey functions ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since it is uppercase only) ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● Front USB interface ● Degree of protection IP 54 ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear ● Can be combined with PCU, TCU


97

Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.2 Operating and display elements

5.2


5.2.1

View

Figure 5-1

98

View of operator panel front OP 010C

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)


(3)

Softkeys

(4)


(5)

Numeric key group

(6)

Cursor key group

(7)

Control key group

(8)

Front USB interface

(9)

Hotkey group

(10)

Area switchover

(11)

Etc. key

(12)

Softkeys

(13)

Machine area

(14)

Recall


Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.2 Operating and display elements

5.2.2


Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the OP 010C operator panel front: ● The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. ● The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the - character and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. ● The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. ● The control key group includes special functions. ● The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas. ● The area switchover shows the main menu. ● The ETC key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. ● The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. ● The machine area key switches directly to the "Machine" operating area. ● The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed.





Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space


Home

Ctrl key

Page up

Alt key

99

Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.2 Operating and display elements Key


Key


Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10


A, ..., Z

A, ..., Z F10


5.2.3


100


Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.3 Interfaces

5.3



Rear side ● Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): – I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) – Display cable K2 ● Direct control key interface X11 (under cover plate) ● Interface X12 - reserved (under cover plate)

Figure 5-2

Connections on rear side of housing: Connections to PCU

(1)

I/O USB cable K1

(2)

PCU main board

(3)

Cable clamp for connecting up direct key module

(4)

Keyboard controller

(5)


(6)


(7)


(8)


(9)

Display cable K2


101

Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.3 Interfaces

Pin assignment More details in Chapter: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions".

102


Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.4 Mounting

5.4

Mounting

5.4.1




Width (mm)

Height (mm)


450

290

108.2 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010C, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed.

7HQVLRQMDFNV

6HWVFUHZV

)URQWVLGH

5

PLQWRPD[


0RXQWLQJSDQHO

6HDOLQJDUHDIURQW

Figure 5-3

Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010C operator panel front

5.4.2

Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU When combining an OP 010C and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installing them in the assembly panel.


103

Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.4 Mounting

:LGWK WRS

+HLJKW

'LVSOD\ VXSSRUWSODWH &RYHUSODWHIRU &RQQHFWLRQV .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU 'LVSOD\ FDEOH.

,286% FDEOH.

0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV &DEOHVKRZQIROGHGWRJHWKHU

Figure 5-4

&DVLQJVFUHZV

Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots

Procedure To do this, proceed as described in the section: “OP 012”, section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU."

5.4.3


Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front," section: "Preparation for mounting").

104


Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.4 Mounting 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm).


105

Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.5 Technical data

5.5




Front panel IP54

Rear side IP 00

Approvals

CE / cULus


Display

Backlight inverter


5 V +/- 5% 280 / 380


Power consumption

12 V +/- 10% 750 / 1000


5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1000





Weight

approx. 5 kg




M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation

Transport

Vibratory load

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing



(in shipping packaging)





106



EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-25 ... 55 ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C max. 1% /min


Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.5 Technical data Display Size / resolution

10.4 " TFT / 640 x 480 pixels

MTBF backlight




107

Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.6 Spare parts

5.6

Spare parts

5.6.1

Overview The diagram shows the OP 010C front plate as an individual part. The components available as spare parts are combined in one overview

Figure 5-5

Front plate of OP 010C

Spare parts (1)

108

Order number

Remarks


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0

Set of 10

Key cover (for labeling)

6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0

Set with 90 ergo-gray items 20 red items 20 yellow items 20 green items 20 medium gray items

Tension jacks

6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0

Set of 6



5.6.2

Replacement

Key covers The key covers of the vertical softkeys (short stroke keys) of the SINUMERIK 840D/810D ManualTurn product can be replaced. They are included in the delivery kit.

Procedure 1. Lever the key cover of the short stroke key up and off. 2. Press the new key cover onto the frame of the short stroke key.


109


110



6

Description The SINUMERIK OP 012 operator panel front and 12.1" TFT color display with a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) features a 59-key membrane keypad as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The optional SINUMERIK direct key module provides an additional connection of the 2 x 8 vertical softkeys as direct keys to the PROFIBUS DP, if no pushbutton panel or machine control panel with connection of the direct keys is available. Securing is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 012 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203–0AF02–0AA1)

Features ● 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) ● Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm ● Slight mounting depth ● 12.1" TFT flat screen (color) with SVGA resolution 800 x 600 pixels ● Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad ● Soft keys/direct keys: – 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function – 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions – Direct control keys via direct control key module (optional), PP031 MC or directly connectable to the I/Os ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) ● Integrated mouse ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● Front USB interface ● Degree of protection IP65 ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear ● Can be combined with PCU, TCU


111


6.2


6.2.1

View

Figure 6-1

112

Front view of operator panel front OP 012

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)


(3)


(4)

Numeric key group

(5)

Softkeys and direct keys

(6)

Cursor key group

(7)

Control key group

(8)

Front USB interface

(9)

Mouse

(10)

Area switchover

(11)

Etc. key

(12)

Softkeys

(13)

Machine area

(14)

Recall



6.2.2


Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: ● The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. ● The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the - character and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. ● The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. ● The control key group includes special functions. ● The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. ● The area switchover shows the main menu. ● The ETC key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. ● The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. ● The machine area key switches directly to the "Machine" operating area. ● The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed.


Overview of key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown in the overview along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key



Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space


Home

Ctrl key

113

Operator panel front: OP 012 6.2 Operating and display elements Key


Key


Page up

Alt key

Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10


A, ..., Z

A, ..., Z F10


6.2.3


114



6.3

Interfaces The operator panel front has the following interfaces:

Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "View of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended.

Rear side ● Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): – I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) – Display cable K2 ● Direct control interface X11 (under cover plate); signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct control keys ● Interface X12 - reserved (under cover plate)

Figure 6-2


(1)

I/O USB cable K1

(2)

PCU main board

(3)

Cable clamp for connecting the direct key module

(4)

Keyboard controller

(5)


(6)


(7)


(8)


(9)

Display cable K2


115


Pin assignment and assignment of keys More details in section: "Direct control key module."

116



6.4

Mounting

6.4.1




Width (mm)

Height (mm)


450

290

108.2 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 012, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted).

7HQVLRQMDFNV

6HWVFUHZV

PLQWRPD[


Figure 6-3

0RXQWLQJSDQHO

6HDOLQJDUHD



117


6.4.2

Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU For a combination involving an OP 012 and PCU and possibly a direct control key module (see section: "Direct control key module") it is advisable to assemble the units in an assembly panel prior to installation.

Requirements The PCU must now be bolted to the mounting brackets prior to assembly (if this has not already been done) (see section: "PCU 50.3", section: "Mounting")

:LGWK WRS


&DEOH FODPS 'LVSOD\ FDEOH.

,286% FDEOH. 0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV 6OLWIRUVRIWNH\ODEHOLQJVWULSV

Figure 6-4

+HLJKW



&DVLQJVFUHZV

Rear side of OP 012

Procedure 1. Place the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft (to avoid scratches) surface. – Installation of direct control key module (see Chapter: "Direct control key module"). – To install or replace the softkey labeling strips (see Section: "Softkey labels"). 2. Remove the PCU's interface cover. 3. Place the PCU with the lugs of the bolted-on mounting brackets into the mounting slots on the OP 012 as shown by the white arrows in diagram (A). To make it easier to insert the lugs, it can be helpful to reduce the 90 ° angle between the PCU and OP 012 by tilting the PCU as shown by the black arrow in the picture.

118


Operator panel front: OP 012 6.4 Mounting 4. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 012 into the plug connectors behind the opening in the PCU casing (see gray arrows in diagram (A)]. Make sure that the connectors lock in audibly and that the locks [see arrows in Fig: (B)] are closed. 5. Swivel the PCU into its limit position [see Fig.: (C)] and secure it with knurled screws, tightening torque of 1.8 Nm [see Fig.: (D)].

(A) Assembling PCU and OP 012

3&8

23

(1)

I/O / USB cable K1

(2)

Display cable K2

(B) Correct connection of IO/USB and display cables to the PCU

3&8

(1)

I/O / USB cable K1

(2)

Display cable K2


119


(C) Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front (viewed from above)

R

3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW

3&8WLOWHGE\

5HTXLUHGFOHDUDQFH IRUFRROLQJ

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW

0RXQWLQJOXJV ZLWKZLWKRXW KLQJHGFDWFKHV

23

'LPHQVLRQVLQPP

(D) OP 012 and PCU after assembly

3&8

23

(1)

120

Knurled screw



6.4.3


Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front," section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm).

6.4.4

Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the labels, DIN-A4 film is available (Order No., see Section: "Spare parts"). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.


121


Proceed as follows 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Remove the PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front. 4. Insert the strips into the slots provided on the rear side of the operator front panel. 5. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. If the operator panel front and PCU are dismantled, omit steps 3 and 5.

122



6.5




Front side IP65

Rear side IP 00

Approvals

CE / cULus


Display

Backlight inverter


5 V +/- 5% 280 / 380


Power consumption

12 V +/- 10% 750 / 1000


5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1200





Weight

approx. 5 kg




M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation

Transport

Vibratory load

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing



(in transport packaging)








EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60 ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C max. 1% /min

123


12.1 " TFT / 800 x 600 pixels

MTBF backlight



124



6.6

Spare parts

6.6.1

Overview The diagram shows the OP 012 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts.

Figure 6-5 (1)


Backlight with backlight inverter Spare parts

(2)


(3)

Display support

(4)

LCD unit

(5)

Keyboard controller Spare parts

Order number

Remarks

6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0

Order number

Remarks

(6)


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0

(7)

USB mouse

6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0

(8)


6FC5248-0AF02-0AA0

Without LCD unit, without mouse, without keyboard controller, without direct control key module

Slide-in labels *) (DIN A4 films)

6FC5248-0AF08-0AA0

Set of 3

Tension jacks

6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0

Set of 6


Set of 10

125

Operator panel front: OP 012 6.6 Spare parts *) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram.

3DUW

5

3DUW 3DUW

6OLGHLQODEHOV

3DUW

&HQWHURIWKHNH\

Figure 6-6

Dimensions for DIN A4 film

6.6.2



126



Film labels The procedure for replacement is described in Section: "Softkey labels".

Operator panel front/mouse When replacing the operator panel front, the previous mouse, LCD unit and keyboard controller can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. This description is therefore valid for both the operator panel front and the mouse. Note We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.

Procedure 1. Put the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 casing screws (see figure:. “OP 012 rear side,” section: "Assembling an OP 012 and PCU"). 2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate. 3. Remove connector X14 for the backlight and the IO-USB cable K1 from the keyboard controller (see following Fig.). 4. Lift off the display support and the display. In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USB interface become visible. 5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface. 6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (Procedure: see Note). 7. Remove the fastening screws from the mouse and keyboard controller. 8. Lift USB interface, mouse and keyboard controller off the front plate. The interconnections may remain plugged. 9. Install the components into the new operator front panel in reverse order (procedure: see Note). Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Handling membrane connectors." When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical data").


127


Figure 6-7

(1)

128

Replacement of operator panel front OP 012

Mouse

(2)

USB port

(3)

Keyboard controller

(4)

Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1

(5)

Direct control key connection X11

(6)

Membrane connector for connecting the keyboard of the operator panel front

(7)


(8)


(9)

Connection X4 for mouse


Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.1

7

Description The SINUMERIK OP 012T operator panel front for decentralized configuration enables physical separation from the SINUMERIK PCU. The PCU can be mounted in a control cabinet. With the SINUMERIK OP 012T operator panel front, up to four distributed OP 012T operator panel fronts can be connected. The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points (100 m). Signal transmission between operator panel front and PCU/NCU via Industrial Ethernet Mixed operation with one operator panel front direct at the PCU is possible. Operation has the same authorization rights as operation on an operator panel front connected directly to the PCU. The screen on the passive operator panel is blacked out. The SINUMERIK OP 012 operator panel front has a 12.1" TFT color display (with a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels [SVGA]) and a 65-key membrane keypad as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys. The layout of keys corresponds to the SINUMERIK full CNC keyboard KB 310C). The OP 012T is connected to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as a thin client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU/NCU) (see section: "Thin Client Unit (TCU)"). The optional SINUMERIK direct key module provides an additional connection of the 2 x 8 vertical softkeys as direct keys to the PROFIBUS DP, if no pushbutton panel or machine control panel with connection of the direct keys is available. Securing is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 012T operator panel front (order number: 6FC5203-0AF06-1AA0)

Requirements ● PCU 50.3, 1.2 GHz with Windows XP ● PCU base software for WinXP 7.4 ● PCU base software for Thin Client


129

Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.1 Description

Features ● Dimensions (W x H x D): 365 mm x 440 mm x 60 mm (mounting depth incl. cable connectors: 81 mm) ● Panel cutout (W x H): 327 mm x 402 mm ● 12.1" TFT flat screen (color) with SVGA resolution 800 x 600 pixels ● Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad ● Softkeys / direct keys – 2 x (8+2) horizontal softkeys – 2 x 8 vertical softkeys / direct control keys – The 2 x 8 softkeys can be used as direct control keys via the PROFIBUS DP ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● Degree of protection IP65 ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear ● 2 x USB 1.1 for connection of mouse and keyboard ● Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s

130


Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.2 Operating and display elements

7.2


7.2.1

View

Figure 7-1

View of operator panel front OP 012T (1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)


(3)

Etc. key

(4)

Area switchover

(5)

Numeric key group

(6)

Cursor key group

(7)

Control key group

(8)


(9)

Machine area

(10)

Recall

(11)


(12)

Softkeys


131

Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.2 Operating and display elements

7.2.2


Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: ● The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. ● The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the - character and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. ● The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. ● The control key group includes special functions. ● The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. ● The area switchover shows the main menu. ● The ETC key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. ● The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. ● The machine area key switches directly to the "Machine" operating area. ● The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed.


Overview of key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown in the overview along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key

132


Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space


Home

Ctrl key


Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.2 Operating and display elements Key


Key


Page up

Alt key

Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10


A, ..., Z

A, ..., Z F10


7.2.3



133

Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.3 Interfaces

7.3

Interfaces The OP 012T operator panel front provides the following interfaces:

24V 0V PE

Figure 7-2

View of TCU with interfaces

Function

Des.

Input / output

Type

(1)

USB port 2)

X203 / X204

O

2x USB-A

(2)

Direct control key interface 4)

X11

O

20-pin plug connector

(3)

Power supply DC 24 V

X206

E


(4)

CompactFlash interface

X201

I/O

50-pin base

(5)

Ethernet port 2)

X202

O

8-pin RJ45 socket

1) not

3) 1)

enabled

2) for

pin assignment, see section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions"

3) for

pin assignment, see Figure

4) under

the cover plate of the keyboard controller, for pin assignment, see section: "Direct control key module", section: "Interfaces".

134


Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.4 Mounting

7.4

Mounting

7.4.1


Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram)

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

327

402

60 118 (with direct control key module)

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 012T, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal).

'LPHQVLRQVLQPP

7HQVLRQMDFNV

7KUHDGHG VFUHZV

([WHUQDOFRQWRXURIRSHUDWRUIURQW ([WHUQDOFRQWRXURIJDVNHW

PLQWRPD[

0RXQWLQJSDQHO

([WHUQDOFRQWRXURIJDVNHW ([WHUQDOFRQWRXURIRSHUDWRUIURQW

6HDOLQJDUHD

Figure 7-3


Dimension sheet for installing the OP 012T operator panel front


135


7.4.2

Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation.

Procedure 1. Insert the OP 012T (with direct control key module if required) in the panel cutout from the front. 2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm).

136



Dimensional drawings of OP 012T without and with direct control key module

'LPHQVLRQVLQPP

Figure 7-4

Dimensional drawing of OP 012T without direct control key module


137


'LUHFWFRQWURONH\VXEPRGXOH

'LPHQVLRQVLQPP

Figure 7-5

Dimensional drawing of OP 012T with direct control key module already installed

7.4.3

Direct control key module connection Install the direct control key module as described in section: "Direct control key module". Connect it as shown in the diagram.

Figure 7-6

138

Routing of connecting cable for the direct control key module


Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.5 Technical data

7.5

Technical data Safety Degree of protection to EN 60529

Front side IP65

Rear side IP 00

Electrical data Supply voltage

24 V DC (via TCU)

Power consumption



Width: 365

Height: 440

Depth: 60

Panel cutout (mm)

Width: 327

Height: 402

Depth: 81 *)

Weight

Approx. 5.9 kg (without direct control key module and without tension jacks)


Tension jacks: 0.5 Nm


Operation

Transport

Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing




Climatic environmental conditions Cooling


Condensation, spraying water and icing Air inlet

Climate class Temperature limits Limit values for rel. humidity to DIN IEC 68-23, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN 68-2-56

Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation


3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60ºC

5 ... 80% at 25 °C

5 ... 95% at 25 °C

Temperature change max. 10 K/h. Non-condensing


12.1 " TFT / 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA)

*) due to cable connector and ventilation clearance


139

Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.6 Spare parts

7.6

Spare parts The following components are available as spare parts for the OP 012T operator panel: Spare parts Tension jacks

140

Order number 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Remarks Set of 9



7.7

Accessories The following components are available as accessories for the OP 012T operator panel: Component Ethernet cable Ethernet switch


Order number

Remarks

6VX1840-2AH10

Standard cable for universal use

6VX1840-3AH10

Trailing cable

6GK1102-6AA0

ELS TP 40 for linear network structures

6GK1102-7AA0

ELS TP 80 for star-shaped network structures

141


142



8

Description The SINUMERIK OP 015 operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) features 8 +4 horizontal and 8 vertical membrane softkeys. The KB 483C full CNC keyboard can be used as an input keyboard. Securing is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 015 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203–0AF03–0AA0)

Features ● 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) ● Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm ● Slight mounting depth ● 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels ● Membrane keyboard: – 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys – 8 vertical softkeys ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● Front USB interface ● Degree of protection: IP65 ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear ● Can be combined with PCU, TCU


143


8.2


8.2.1

View

Figure 8-1

144

View of operator panel front OP 015

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)


(3)

Softkeys

(4)

Area switchover

(5)

Etc. key

(6)

Softkeys

(7)

Recall

(8)

Machine area

(9)

Front USB interface



8.2.2


Keyboard Several keys are arranged on the operator panel front: ● The eight vertical and horizontal softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. ● The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. ● The area switchover shows the main menu. ● The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. ● The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key


Key


F9

F9

F10

F10


8.2.3



145


8.3



Rear side ● Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): – I/O–USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) – Display cable K2

Figure 8-2

146


(1)

Display cable K2

(2)

Back of operator panel

(3)

I/O USB cable K1





147


8.4

Mounting

8.4.1




Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth + clearance (mm)

450

290

130.2 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is installed).

PLQPD[

6HDODUHD

/ s

s

/

s s

3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV

/ / / $ $

Figure 8-3

148

5]

/

7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV

/ s

$ s

s

$ s

,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD




8.4.2

Assembling an OP 015 and a PCU When combining an OP 015 and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel.

WRS

&DVLQJ FRYHUSODWH


'LVSOD\ FDEOH.

,286% FDEOH.

0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV &DVLQJVFUHZV0 &DVLQJVFUHZV0

Figure 8-4

Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots

Procedure To do this, proceed as described in section: “OP 012,” section: "Assembling OP 012 and PCU."

8.4.3

Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see following Figure). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation." NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5º from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by installed components (PCU, video link receiver, ...).


149


Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front", section: "Preparation for mounting").

+ s

s

% s

2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm).

.

3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ

7 s

s

7

R

$GGLWLRQDOFOHDUDQFHIRUFRQQHFWLRQFDEOHV IRU'LRQO\

3&8WLOWHGRII

&OHDUDQFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ

s / s

$ s 2

2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW /

+

7

7

$

%

2

.

$OOGLPHQVLRQVZLWKRXWWKHVFUHZVSURWUXGLQJ

Figure 8-5

150

Attaching the PCU to the OP015 operator panel front



8.5




Front side IP65

Rear side IP 00

Approvals

CE / cULus


Display

Backlight inverter


5 V +/- 5% 420 / 600


Power consumption

12 V +/- 10% 900 / 1050


5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1000





Weight

approx. 7 kg




M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation

Transport

Vibratory load

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing











EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60 ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C max. 0.1% /min

151


15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels

MTBF backlight



152



8.6

Spare parts

8.6.1

Overview The diagram shows the OP 015 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts.

Figure 8-6


Spare part

Order number

(1)


(2)

Background lighting with backlight inverter

(3)

Display support with keyboard controller (rear side)

(4)

LCD unit Spare part

(5)

6FC5248-0AF03-0AA0

Remark Without LCD unit, USB port and keyboard controller

Order number

Remark


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0

Set of 10

Tension jacks

6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0

Set of 6


153


8.6.2



Operator panel front When changing the operator panel front, the existing USB interface and the display support (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.

Procedure

Figure 8-7 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

154

Keyboard controller

I/O USB cable K1 Connection X11 (reserved) Membrane lines from the operator panel front keyboard Connections for the operator panel front keyboard X7 X8 X10 Connection X12 (reserved) Display cable K2 USB membrane line Connection X14 for display and backlight Connection X4 (reserved)


Operator panel front: OP 015 8.6 Spare parts 1. Put the OP 015 and the replacement operator panel front face down on a flat, soft surface. 2. Loosen the casing screws (see Figure: "Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots", section: "Assembling OP 015 and PCU 50") and remove the casing cover plate. The display support with the keyboard controller (Fig. above) will be visible underneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USB interface (Fig. below). 3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure). 4. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (Fig. below; see note below for procedure). 5. Remove the screws of the display support and lift it off. 6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement operator panel front. 7. Place the display support on the replacement operator panel front. 8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order. Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in section: "Connection Conditions," section: "Handling membrane connectors." When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical data").

Figure 8-8

USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side

(1)

Display support

(2)

USB membrane line (see Fig above)

(3)

USB port

(4)

Fastening screw M4


155


156


Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.1

9

Description The SINUMERIK OP 015A operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) features a 62-key membrane keyboard with 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integral mouse. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 015A operator panel front (order number 6FC5203–0AF05–0AB0)

Features ● 19" mounting format, 8 HU (height units) ● Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm ● Slight mounting depth ● 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels ● Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad ● Soft keys/direct keys: – 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function – 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions – Direct control keys via direct control key module (optional), PP031 MC or directly connectable to the I/Os ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) ● Integrated mouse ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● USB front interface (USB 1.1) ● Degree of protection IP65 (front side) ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear ● Can be combined with PCU, TCU, or Videolink receiver


157

Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.2 Operating and display elements

9.2


9.2.1

View

Figure 9-1

158

Front view of the OP 015A operator panel front

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)


(3)


(4)


(5)

Numeric key group

(6)

Cursor key group

(7)

Control key group

(8)

Mouse

(9)

Etc. key

(10)

Area switchover

(11)

Softkeys

(12)

Machine area

(13)

Recall

(14)

Front USB interface


Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.2 Operating and display elements

9.2.2


Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: ● The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. ● The numeric key group contains the digits 0 – 9, the "–", "+", "=" characters, the slash "/", and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. ● The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. ● The control key group includes special functions. ● The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. ● The area switchover shows the area menu. ● The ETC key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. ● The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. ● The machine area key switches directly to the "Machine" operating area. ● The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed.





Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space


Home

Ctrl key

159

Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.2 Operating and display elements Key


Key


Page up

Alt key

Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10


A, ..., Z

A, ..., Z F10

You will find information about softkeys in ● \BAD\ Operator's Guide HMI Advanced ● \BEM\ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded


9.2.3


160


Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.3 Interfaces

9.3

Interfaces The OP 015 operator panel front has the following interfaces:

Front USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see figure in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended.

Rear side ● Two cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): – I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) – Display cable K2 Under the cover interface cover: ● Direct control key interface X11: Signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct control keys ● Interface X12 (reserved)

Figure 9-2

OP015A - Connections on rear side of housing: Connections to the PCU

(1)


(2)


(3)

Interface cover

(4)

Display cable K2

(5)

I/O USB cable K1


161

Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.3 Interfaces

Pin assignment and assignment of keys Information on this can be found in chapter: "Direct control key module".

162


Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.4 Mounting

9.4

Mounting

9.4.1


Dimensions of the mounting hole (see figure)

Used PCU type PCU 50 PCU 70

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

450

335

Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting wall surface 127 + 10 167 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015A, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). PLQPD[ 6HDO DUHD ¢

¢

¢ ¢

¢

0RXQWLQJZDOO

Figure 9-3

5]

¢


3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV

LQVHDODUHD

Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015A operator panel front


163


9.4.2

Assembling an OP 015A and a PCU

Figure 9-4

OP 015A rear side

(1)

Casing screws (1x concealed under cable K1)

(2)

Mounting slots for PCU lugs

(3)

Slit for inserting softkey labeling strips

(4)

Display cable (K2)

(5)

I/O / USB cable (K1)

(6)

Cover plate for keyboard controller connections

(7)

Retaining screw for the cover plate

If you want to combine the OP 015A with a PCU and possibly a direct control key module (see section: 'Direct control key module"), assemble the components before installing them on the mounting wall.

164



Procedure 1. Place the front end of the OP 015A on a soft, horizontal support (4) to avoid damaging the surface of the operator panel front.

2. Remove the interface cover (2) of the PCU.

3. Position the PCU so that the mounting lugs (3) engage with the OP 015A.

(1)

PCU

(2)

Interface cover of the PCU (cover plate removed)

(3)

Mounting lugs

(4)

Mounting support

4. Connect the cable connectors K1 and K2 to the interfaces of the PCU. 5. Make sure that you hear the connectors lock in and that the locks are closed (see marked rings)

(1)

I/O USB cable K1

(2)

Display cable K2

6. Swing the PCU in the direction of the OP 015A, making sure that the cables are folded correctly.


165


9.4.3

7. Secure the PCU with two knurled-head screws (1) at each end of the two mounting angles (torque: 1.8 Nm). To tighten the screws, use a torque screwdriver (e. g. FACOM A.302A, tightening torque, max.: 1.8 Nm).

Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation. For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation." NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5º from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by insalled components (PCU, video link receiver, ...).

Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front", section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the twelve tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.5 Nm).

166


0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW

/XJV

3&8VZLYHOHGE\r


3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW

23$ 73$

ERWWRP0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWZLWKKLQJHGFDWFKHV

Figure 9-5

Attaching the PCU to the OP 015A operator panel front (viewed from above)

9.4.4

Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already factory-installed. DIN A4 films are available for preparing the vertical strips. You will find the order number in section: "Spare parts" → "Overview". Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.


167


Proceed as follows 1. Label the mat side of the film with a laser printer or another printer that allows "Film" to be set as a printable medium. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to figure: "OP 015A Housing open" in section: "Spare parts" → "Replacement". Note In order to facilitate insertion of the "Part1" strip when the PCU is mounted, it is recommended that you - unscrew the 4 retaining screws of the PCU and - swing the PCU up. Once you have inserted the strip, swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws.

168


Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.5 Technical specifications

9.5

Technical specifications Safety Safety class


Degree of protection per EN 60529

Front: IP 65

Rear side: IP00

Approvals

CE / cULus

Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) Power consumption

Display

Backlight inverter

Logic / USB

4.9 V - 5.25 V 420 / 700

12 V +/- 5% 900 / 1100

5.0 V - 5.2 V 350 / 1050





Mounting depth without PCU: 42 mm Mounting depth with PCU 50: 127 mm *) Mounting depth with PCU 70: 167 mm *) Mounting depth with TCU: 78 mm *)

Weight Max. tightening torques:

Approx. 8.4 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm


M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation


Vibratory load

10 – 58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 1 g

5 – 9 Hz: 3.1 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 1 g

Shock load

5 g, 30 ms, 18 shocks




Moisture condensation, water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet

Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity


Not permissible

without aggressive gases, dusts and oils Operation


EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60 ºC (cyclic)

max. 10 K/h

max. 18 K/h

5 ... 65% (annual mean) and max. 85% over max. 2 months/year

5 ... 95% at 25°C

169

Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.5 Technical specifications Permissible change in the relative air humidity

Max. 6%/h


15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels

MTBF backlight

typ. 50 000 h at 25 ºC (dependent on the temperature)

*)

170

measured from the (exterior) mounting wall surface; plus 10 mm clearance for cable and ventilation


Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.6 Spare parts

9.6

Spare parts

9.6.1

Overview The diagram shows the OP 015A operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts.

Figure 9-6

Individual parts for the OP 015A operator panel front

Spare part

Order number

Remark

6FC5203-0AF05-0AB0

Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard controller

(1)


(2)

Keyboard controller

(3)

Background lighting with backlight inverter Spare part

Order number

Direct key module

6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0

Direct key module mounting kit

6FC5247-0AF30-0AA0

(4)

LCD unit

(5)

Display support Spare part

Remark

Order number

Remark

(6)

USB mouse

6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0

(7)


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0

Set of 10

Tension jacks

6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Set of 9

Mounting bracket

6FC5248-0AF20_2AA0


6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0


Set of 3

171

Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.6 Spare parts *) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram.

3DUW

3DUW

)LOP',1$

&HQWHURIWKHNH\

Figure 9-7

9.6.2



172




Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, mouse, and USB port can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the front panel has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front

1. Place the OP 015A on a soft, horizontal support. Remove the retaining screw (1) from the cover plate (2) and lift off the cover plate.

2. Loosen the 13 casing screws (see also figure: "Rear side of OP 015A operator panel front" in section: "Mounting" → "Assembling OP 015A and PCU") 3. Lift off the cover.


173


Figure 9-8

(1)

174

OP015A Housing open

Screws (M4) for display support

(2)

Slide-in strips (Part1)

(3)

Display support

(4)


(5)


(6)


(7)

USB interface

(8)

Display cable

(9)

Ribbon cable for keyboard controller / USB connection

(10)

Retainer for the mouse / keyboard controller cable

(11)

Port for the mouse

(12)

Cable plug for mouse / keyboard controller

(13)

Backlight inverter cable

(14)

I/O USB cable

(15)

Keyboard cable


Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.6 Spare parts Backlight inverter cable 4. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clips with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables.

Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 5. Disconnect the connection from the keyboard controller to the mouse by carefully pushing the plug back with a screwdriver.

6. Remove the retainer for the cable from the keyboard controller to the mouse.

Connection of keyboard controller / USB port 7. Disconnect the connection from the USB port to the keyboard controller by pulling back the terminal clamps to the left and right of the plug.


175

Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.6 Spare parts 8. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller.

Keyboard cable 9. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders (1) on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables from the bracket. For detailed information about removal and insertion of membrane connectors, see also chapter: "Connection conditions" → "Handling membrane connectors".

176


Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.6 Spare parts Display supports

10. Remove the 12 screws (1) from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to figure: "OP 015A Housing open".

11. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. 12. Lift off the display support.

13. Place the display support on its back side to avoid damaging the display.


177

Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.6 Spare parts USB board 14. Remove the USB port by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board.

Mouse board 15. Loosen the 4 screws (M3) on the bracket for the mouse board. Lift off both the bracket and the mouse board.

178



Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 15. 14.

Mouse board and bracket USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins (1).

13. - 10. Display support 13.

11.

Bend the keyboard cables (1) back slightly before inserting the display support. Otherwise, the keyboard cables could become squeezed or damaged, thus rendering them inoperable.

Insert the USB ribbon cable against the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out.

9.

Keyboard cable

8. - 7.

Connection of keyboard controller / USB port 8.


Ensure that the contact side (1) of the USB plug faces up.

179

Operator panel front: OP 015A 9.6 Spare parts 6. - 5.

Connection of keyboard controller / mouse

4.


3. - 1.

Cover

Note Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see section: "Technical specifications").

180


Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.1

10

Description The SINUMERIK TP 015A touch operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) and touch screen features a 62-key membrane keyboard as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integral mouse. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel.

Validity The description below applies to the TP 015A operator panel front (order number 6FC5203–0AF08–0AB0)

Features ● 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels ● Touch screen (analog resistive, 5-wire) ● Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad ● Soft keys/direct keys: – 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function – 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key function – The direct control keys can be connected through the direct control key module (optional) or directly to the I/O peripherals ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) ● Integrated mouse ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● USB front interface (USB 1.1) ● Degree of protection IP65 (front side) ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear ● Can be combined with PCU, TCU, or Videolink receiver


181

Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.2 Operating and display elements

10.2


10.2.1

View

Figure 10-1

182

Front view, TP 015A operator panel front

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)


(3)


(4)


(5)

Numeric key group

(6)

Cursor key group

(7)

Control key group

(8)

Mouse

(9)

Etc. key

(10)

Area switchover

(11)

Softkeys

(12)

Machine area

(13)

Recall

(14)

Front USB interface



10.2.2

Operation The operator panel front is operated by ● using the touch screen to select the application-specific functions, e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons. ● Softkeys ● Keys ● Mouse CAUTION Do not touch the operating elements with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives.

10.2.3





183




Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space


Home

Ctrl key

Page up

Alt key

Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10


A, ..., Z

A, ..., Z F10



184



10.2.4



185

Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.3 Interfaces

10.3

Interfaces The TP 015A operator panel front has the following interfaces:

Front USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see figure in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended.

Rear side ● Two cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): – I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) – Display cable K2 Under the interface cover: ● Direct control key interface X11: Signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct control keys ● Interface X12 (reserved)

Figure 10-2

186

TP 015A - connections at the rear of the enclosure: Connections to the PCU

(1)


(2)


(3)

Interface cover

(4)

Display cable K2

(5)

I/O USB cable K1


Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.3 Interfaces

Pin assignment and assignment of keys Information on this can be found in the section: "Direct control key module".


187

Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.4 Mounting

10.4

Mounting

10.4.1


Dimensions of the mounting hole (see figure)

Used PCU type PCU 50 PCU 70

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

450

335

Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting panel surface 127 + 10 167 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 015A, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). PLQPD[ 6HDO DUHD ¢

¢

¢

¢ ¢

¢

5]



0RXQWLQJZDOO

LQVHDODUHD

Figure 10-3

188

Dimension sheet for mounting the TP 015A operator panel front



10.4.2

Assembling TP 015A and PCU

Figure 10-4

Back side of the TP 015A operator panel front

(1)

Casing screw (1x concealed under cable K1)

(2)

Mounting slots for PCU lugs

(3)

Slots for inserting softkey labeling strips

(4)

Display cable K2

(5)

I/O / USB cable K1

(6)

Cover plate for keyboard controller connections

(7)

Retaining screw for the cover plate

If you want to combine the TP 015A with a PCU and possibly a direct control key module (see section: "Direct control key module"), assemble the components before installing them on the mounting wall.


189


Procedure 1. Place the front end of the TP 015A on a soft, horizontal support (4) to avoid damaging the surface of the operator panel front.

2. Remove the interface cover (2) of the PCU. 3. Position the PCU so that the mounting lugs (3) engage with the TP 015A.

(1)

PCU

(2)

Interface cover of the PCU (cover plate removed)

(3)

Mounting lugs

(4)

Mounting support

4. Connect cable plugs K1 and K2 to the interfaces of the PCU. 5. Make sure that you hear the connectors lock in and the that locks are closed see (marked rings).

(1)

I/O USB cable K1

(2)

Display cable K2

6. Swing the PCU in the direction of the TP 015A, making sure the cables are folded correctly.

190



(1)

10.4.3

7. Secure the PCU with two knurled-head screws (1) on ends of each mounting angle (torque: 1.8 Nm). To tighten the screws, use a torque screwdriver (e. g. FACOM A.302A, torque: 0.5 - 2.5 Nm).

Knurled-head screws

Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation. For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU chapters and section: "Heat dissipation." NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5º from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by installed components (PCU, video link receiver, ...).

Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front", section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the twelve tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque: 0,5 Nm).


191

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW

/XJV

3&8VZLYHOHGE\r


3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW

23$ 73$

ERWWRP0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWZLWKKLQJHGFDWFKHV

Figure 10-5

Mounting the PCU to the TP 015A operator panel front (as seen from above)

10.4.4

Calibration of the touch screen Whenever a new operator panel front is connected, the touch screen must be calibrated.

Procedure For a description of calibration, refer to chapters: ● "PCU 50", section: "Calibration of the touch screen" or ● "PCU 50.3", section: "Start-up" → "Calibration of the touch screen".

10.4.5

Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already factory-installed.

192


Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.4 Mounting DIN A4 films are available for preparing the vertical strips. You will find the order number in section: "Spare parts" → "Overview". Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.

Proceed as follows 1. Label the mat side of the film with a laser printer or another printer that allows "Film" to be set as a printable medium. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to figure: “TP 015A housing open” in section: "Spare parts" → "Replacement". Note In order to facilitate insertion of the "Part1" strip when the PCU is mounted, it is recommended that you - unscrew the 4 retaining screws of the PCU and - swing the PCU up. Once you have inserted the strip, swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws.


193

Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.5 Technical specifications

10.5

Technical specifications Safety Safety class



Front: IP 65

Rear side: IP00

Approvals

CE / cULus

Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) Power consumption

Display

Backlight inverter

Logic / USB

4.9 V - 5.25 V 420 / 700

12 V +/- 5% 900 / 1100

5.0 V - 5.2 V 350 / 1050





Mounting depth without PCU: 42 mm Mounting depth with PCU 50: 127 mm *) Mounting depth with PCU 70: 167 mm *) Mounting depth with TCU: 78 mm *)

Weight Max. tightening torques:



M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation


Vibratory load

10 – 58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 1 g

5 – 9 Hz: 3,1 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 1 g

Shock load


30 g, 6 ms 18 shocks



Moisture condensation, water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet


194

Not permissible

without aggressive gases, dusts and oils Operation


EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60 ºC (cyclic)

max. 10 K/h

max. 18 K/h

5 ... 65% (annual mean) and max. 85% over 2 months/year, max.

5 ... 95% at 25°C


Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.5 Technical specifications Permissible change in the relative air humidity

Max. 6%/h


15" TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels

MTBF backlight


*)

measured from the (exterior) mounting panel surface; plus 10 mm clearance for cable and ventilation


195

Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.6 Spare parts

10.6

Spare parts

10.6.1

Overview The diagram shows the TP 015A operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts.

Figure 10-6

Individual parts for the TP 015A operator panel front

Spare part (1)


Order number

Remark

6FC5203-0AF08-0AB0

(2)

Keyboard controller

(3)

Background lighting with backlight inverter Spare part

Order number 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0

Direct key module mounting kit

6FC5247-0AF30-0AA0

(4)

LCD unit

(5)

Display support


Remark

Direct key module

Spare part

196

Order number

Remark

(6)

USB mouse

6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0

(7)


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0

Set of 10

Tension jacks

6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Set of 9

Mounting bracket

6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0


6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0

Set of 3



*) The dimensions for production of slide-in film labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagrams.

3DUW

3DUW

)LOP',1$

&HQWHURIWKHNH\

Figure 10-7

10.6.2




197



Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, touch controller, mouse and USB port can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and reassembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front

1. Place the TP 015A on a soft, horizontal support. Remove the retaining screw (1) from the cover plate (2) and lift off the cover plate.

2. Remove the 13 casing screws (see also figure "Rear of TP 015A operator panel front" in section: "Installation"→ "Assembling TP 015A and PCU") 3. LIft off the cover.

198



Figure 10-8

(1)

TP 015A housing open


(2)

Slide-in labels (Part1)

(3)

Display support

(4)


(5)

Touch controller

(6)

Retainer for the cable of the touch controller

(7)


(8)


(9)

USB interface

(10)

Display cable

(11)

Ribbon cable for keyboard controller/USB connection

(12)

Retainer for the mouse/keyboard controller cable

(13)

Port for the mouse

(14)

Cable plugs for mouse/keyboard controller

(15)


(16)

I/O USB cable

(17)

Keyboard cable


199

Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Touch controller 4. Remove the screws (M3) that are holding the touch controller to the display support. Do this with a TX10 screwdriver.

5. Remove the retainer of the touch screen/touch controller cable with a flat screwdriver.

6. Remove the plug connectors from the touch controller by pushing in the retaining lug.

200


Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Backlight inverter cable 7. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clamps with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables.

Keyboard controller/mouse connection 8. Disconnect the connection from the keyboard controller to the mouse by carefully pushing the plug back with a screwdriver.


Keyboard controller/USB port connection 10. Disconnect the connection from the USB port to the keyboard controller by pulling back the terminal clamps to the left and right of the plug.


201

Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.6 Spare parts 11. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller.


Display support

202

13. Remove the 12 screws (1) from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to figure: "TP 015A housing open".



14. Before removing the display support, secure the touch controller with a screw (1) that you tighten by hand. This ensures that the touch controller is protected when storing the display support. Otherwise, the touch controller could get squeezed or damaged, thus rendering it inoperable.

15. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out.

16. LIft off the display support.


203

Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.6 Spare parts 17. Place the display support down on its back side to avoid damaging the display.

USB board 18. Remove the USB port by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board.

Mouse board 19. Remove the 4 screws (M3) on the bracket for the mouse board. Lift off both the bracket and the mouse board.

204


Operator panel front: TP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the individual parts in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 19. 18.

Mouse board and bracket USB board Press the USB board until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps.

Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins (1).

17. - 13. Display support

12.

17.


15.


Keyboard cable

11. - 10. Keyboard controller/USB port connection 11. Ensure that the contact side (1) of the USB cable faces up.

9. - 8.

Keyboard controller/mouse connection

7.


6. - 4.

Touch controller

3. - 1.

Cover


205



206


Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.1

11

Description The SINUMERIK OP 015AT operator panel front with 15" TFT color display and 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) enables the distributed installation of the operator panel front and the controller. It features a membrane keyboard with 62 keys and 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integrated mouse. The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points (100 m/328 ft). The OP 015AT operator panel front is connected to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as a Thin Client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU/NCU). Mixed operation with an operator panel connected directly to the PCU is possible. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel.

Validity The description below applies to operator panel OP 015AT (Order No. 6FC5203–0AF05–1AB0)

Features ● Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s ● 3 x USB 1.1 (2 x rear, 1 x front) ● 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels ● Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad ● Soft keys/direct keys: – 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function – 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key functions (can be used with SINUMERIK 840D sl /840Di sl) ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) ● Integrated mouse ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● Slight mounting depth ● Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm ● IP65 protection rating ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear


207

Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.1 Description The SINUMERIK TP 015AT operator panel front can be used for: ● SINUMERIK 810D/840D SINUMERIK PCU 50/PCU 70

•

with Windows XP and PCU Base software Thin Client as from 7.4 MLFB

6FC5253-7CX10-4XA8 6FC5253-7CX11-5XU8

•

with Windows XP SP2 MLFB

6FC5253-7CX11-5XU8 6FC5253-7CX10-5XU8

● SINUMERIK 840 D sl – NCU 710.1 / NCU 720.1 / NCU 730.1 – SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 ● SINUMERIK 840 Di sl

208


Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.2 Operator controls and indicators

11.2

Operator controls and indicators

11.2.1

View

Figure 11-1

Front view of the OP 015AT operator panel front

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)


(3)


(4)


(5)

Numeric key group

(6)

Cursor key group

(7)

Control key group

(8)

Mouse

(9)

Etc. key

(10)

Area switchover

(11)

Softkeys

(12)

Machine area

(13)

Recall

(14)

Front USB interface


209

Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.2 Operator controls and indicators

11.2.2





210


Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space


Home

Ctrl key


Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.2 Operator controls and indicators Key


Key


Page up

Alt key

Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10


A, ..., Z

A, ..., Z F10



11.2.3



211

Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.3 Interfaces

11.3

Interfaces

11.3.1

Overview The OP 015AT operator panel front has the following interfaces:

Front USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard, mouse, or USB FlashDrive (see Fig.: "Front view of OP 015AT operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" → "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended.

Rear side

Figure 11-2

OP 015AT - Rear with interfaces

(1)

212

Blanking plate screws (M4)

(2)

X206

Power Supply

(3)

X202

Ethernet port

(4)

X203 / X 204

USB interface

(5)

Strain relief for connecting cable



11.3.2

Description Signal type BI

Bi-directional

V

Supply voltage

O

Output

I

Input

Ethernet interface X202 Interface:

Ethernet

Connector designation:

X202

Type:

8-pole RJ45 socket

Cable length max.:

100 m (shielded twisted pair)

Pin

Name

1

TxD+

Type

Meaning Transmit data +

2

TxD-

O

3

RxD+

I

Receive data +

4/5

GND

-

terminated internally with 75 Ω; not required for data transmission

6

RxD -

I

Receive data -

7/8

GND

-


Transmit data -

Note The direct keys are also led out through this interface.


213


USB interfaces Front: The USB interface on the front side of the operator panel front can be loaded with 500 mA. Rear panel: X203 / X 204 Interface:

USB


X203 / X204

Type:

2 x 4-way USB socket, type A (one of the interfaces can be loaded with 500 mA (high current), the other of the two, with 100 mA.)

Cable length max.:

Mouse, keyboard: 5m if hub used: 3.5 m *)

*) Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal unit; max. 1 hub permissible. Please note that some keyboards already include a hub.

Pin

USB port

Name

Type

Meaning

A1

2

USB_P5

V

+ 5V fused

A2

2

USB_1M

A3

2

USB_1P

BI

Data +

A4

2

USB_GND

B1

3

USB_P5

B2

3

USB_2M

V

B3

3

USB_2P

BI

B4

3

USB_GND

V

DataGround (reference potential) + 5V fused DataData + Ground (reference potential)

Power supply X206 The pin assignment of this interface can be found in Section: "Connection conditions" → "Pin assignments of the interfaces".

214


Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.4 Installation

Installation

11.4.1

Mounting

11.4

Figure 11-3

OP 015AT with TCU (integrated)

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015AT, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted).


215

Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.4 Installation

PLQPD[ 6HDO DUHD ¢

¢

¢

¢ ¢

¢

5]



0RXQWLQJZDOO

LQVHDODUHD

Figure 11-4

11.4.2

Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015AT operator panel front

Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the vertical labels, DIN-A4 film is available (Order No., see Section: "Spare parts"). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.

Proceed as follows 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided at the rear of the operator panel front (refer to Fig.: "OP 015AT Housing open" in Section: "Spare parts" → "Replacement").

216


Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.5 Technical data

11.5

Technical data Safety Safety class Degree of protection to EN 60529

III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP65

Rear side: IP00

Certificates and approvals

CE / cULus

Electrical data Power Supply

24 V DC

Current input

Typical, approx. 0.9 A

Max. approx. 1.5 A

Power consumption





Mounting depth: 42 mm



Mechanical ambient conditions

M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation


Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 1g

5 – 9 Hz: 3.1 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 1g

Shock stressing









EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60 ºC (cyclic)

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 65% (annual average)

10 ... 95% at 25°C Max. 6%/h


15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels

MTBF backlight



217

Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.6 Replacement parts

11.6

Replacement parts

11.6.1

Overview The diagram shows the OP 015AT operator panel front disassembled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts.

Figure 11-5

Individual parts for the OP 015AT operator panel front Spare part

Order number

(1)


(2)

Keyboard controller

(3)


(4)

LCD unit

(5)

Display support

(6)

USB mouse

6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0

(7)


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0

Set of 10

Tension jacks

6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Set of 9


6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0

Set of 3

Spare part

6FC5203-0AF05-1AB0

Remark

Order number


Remark


218



3DUW 3DUW

)LOP',1$

&HQWHURIWKHNH\

Figure 11-6

11.6.2




219



Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, mouse, and USB port can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the front panel has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1. Place the OP 015AT on a soft horizontal surface. Loosen the 13 casing screws (see also figure: "OP 015AT - rear with interfaces" in Section: "Interfaces" → "Overview"). 2. Lift off the cover.

220



Figure 11-7

(1)

OP 015AT housing opened


(2)


(3)

Display support

(4)


(5)


(6)


(7)

USB interface

(8)

Display cable

(9)

Ribbon cable for keyboard controller / USB connection

(10)


(11)

Port for the mouse

(12)


(13)


(14)

I/O USB cable

(15)

Direct key cable

(16)

Keyboard cable


221

Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.6 Replacement parts Backlight inverter cable 3. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clips with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables.




222


Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.6 Replacement parts 7. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller.


Display support


9. Remove the 12 screws (1) from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to figure: "OP 015AT housing opened".

223

Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.6 Replacement parts 10. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. 11. Lift off the display support.


USB board 13. Remove the USB port by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board.


224



Installing the individual parts of the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 14.

Mouse board and bracket

13.

USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins (1).

12. - 9.

Display support 12.

10.

8.



Keyboard cable


225

Operator panel front: OP 015AT 11.6 Replacement parts 7. - 6.



5. - 4.


3.


2. - 1.

Cover


226


Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.1

12

Description The SINUMERIK TP 015AT operator panel front with 15" TFT color display, 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA), and touch screen enables the distributed installation of the operator panel front and the controller. It features a membrane keyboard with 62 keys and 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integrated mouse. The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points (100 m/328 ft). The TP 015AT operator panel front is connected to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as a Thin Client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU/NCU). Mixed operation with additional TCUS and an operator panel connected directly to the PCU is possible. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel.

Validity The description below applies to operator panel front TP 015AT (Order No. 6FC5203–0AF08–1AB0)

Features ● Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s ● 3 x USB 1.1 (2 x rear, 1 x front) ● 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels ● Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad ● Soft keys/direct keys: – 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function – 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key functions (can be used with SINUMERIK 840D sl /840Di sl) ● Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) ● Integrated mouse ● Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature ● Slight mounting depth ● Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm ● IP65 protection rating ● Attachment: tension jacks at the rear


227

Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.1 Description The SINUMERIK TP 015AT operator panel front can be used for: ● SINUMERIK 810D/840D SINUMERIK PCU 50/PCU 70

•

with Windows XP and PCU Base software Thin Client as from 7.4 MLFB

6FC5253-7CX10-4XA8 6FC5253-7CX11-5XU8

•

with Windows XP SP2 MLFB

6FC5253-7CX11-5XU8 6FC5253-7CX10-5XU8

● SINUMERIK 840 D sl – NCU 710.1 / NCU 720.1 / NCU 730.1 – SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 ● SINUMERIK 840 Di sl

228


Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.2 Operator controls and indicators

12.2


12.2.1

View

Figure 12-1

Front view of the TP 015AT operator panel front

(1)

Status LED: POWER

(2)


(3)


(4)


(5)

Numeric key group

(6)

Cursor key group

(7)

Control key group

(8)

Mouse

(9)

Etc. key

(10)

Area switchover

(11)

Softkeys

(12)

Machine area

(13)

Recall

(14)

Front USB interface


229


12.2.2

Operation The operator panel front is operated by ● using the touch screen to select the application-specific functions, e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons. ● Softkeys ● Keys ● Mouse CAUTION Do not touch the operating elements with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives.

12.2.3




230





Key


Esc

End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab

Space


Home

Ctrl key

Page up

Alt key

Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor left

Enter

Cursor right

F9

Cursor down

F10


A, ..., Z

A, ..., Z F10




231


12.2.4


232


Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.3 Interfaces

12.3

Interfaces

12.3.1

Overview The TP 015AT operator panel front has the following interfaces:

Front USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard, mouse, or USB FlashDrive (see Fig.: "Front view of TP 015AT operator panel front" in Section: "Control and display elements" → "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended.

Rear side

Figure 12-2

TP 015AT - Rear with interfaces

(1)

Blanking plate screws (M4)

(2)

X206

Power Supply

(3)

X202

Ethernet port

(4)

X203 / X204

USB interfaces

(5)


Strain relief for connecting cable

233


12.3.2

Description Signal type BI

Bi-directional

V

Supply voltage

O

Output

I

Input

Ethernet interface X202 Interface:

Ethernet


X202

Type:

8-pole RJ45 socket

Cable length max.:

100 m (shielded twisted pair)

Pin

Name

1

TxD+

Type

Meaning Transmit data +

2

TxD-

O

3

RxD+

I

Receive data +

4/5

GND

-


6

RxD -

I

Receive data -

7/8

GND

-


Transmit data -

Note The direct keys are also led out through this interface.

234



USB interfaces Front: The USB interface on the front side of the operator panel front can be loaded with 500 mA. Rear panel: X203 / X 204 Interface:

USB


X203 / X204

Type:

2 x 4-way USB socket, type A (one of the interfaces can be loaded with 500 mA (high current), the other of the two, with 100 mA.)

Cable length max.:

Mouse, keyboard: 5 m if hub used: 3.5 m *)

*) Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal unit; max. 1 hub permissible. Please note that some keyboards already include a hub.

Pin

USB port

Name

Type

Meaning

A1

2

USB_P5

V

+ 5V fused

A2

2

USB_1M

A3

2

USB_1P

BI

Data +

A4

2

USB_GND

B1

3

USB_P5

B2

3

USB_2M

V

B3

3

USB_2P

BI

B4

3

USB_GND

V

DataGround (reference potential) + 5V fused DataData + Ground (reference potential)

Power supply X206 The pin assignment of this interface can be found in Section: "Connection conditions" →"Secondary electrical conditions" → "Pin assignments of the interfaces".


235

Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.4 Installation

Installation

12.4.1

Mounting

12.4

Figure 12-3

TP 015AT with TCU (integrated)

Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 015AT, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted).

236



PLQPD[ 6HDO DUHD ¢

¢

¢ ¢

¢

0RXQWLQJZDOO

Figure 12-4

12.4.2

5]

¢



LQVHDODUHD

Dimension sheet for installing the TP 015AT operator panel front

Touchscreen calibration Whenever a new operator panel front is connected the touchscreen must be calibrated.

Procedure For a description of calibration, refer to Chapter: "PCU 50.3", section: "Start-up" → "Calibration of the touch screen".

12.4.3

Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the vertical labels, DIN-A4 film is available (Order No., see Section: "Spare parts").


237


Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.

Proceed as follows 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided at the rear of the operator panel front (refer to Fig.: "TP 015AT Housing open" in Section: "Spare parts" → "Replacement").

238


Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.5 Technical data

12.5

Technical data Safety Safety class Degree of protection to EN 60529

III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP65

Rear side: IP00


CE / cULus

Electrical data Power Supply

24 V DC

Current input

Typical, approx. 0.9 A

Max. approx. 1.5 A

Power consumption





Mounting depth: 42 mm




M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8 Nm

Operation


Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 1g

5 – 9 Hz: 3.1 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 1g

Shock stressing









EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60 ºC (cyclic)

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 65% (annual average)

10 ... 95% at 25°C Max. 6%/h


15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels

MTBF backlight



239

Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.6 Replacement parts

12.6

Replacement parts

12.6.1

Overview The diagram shows the TP 015AT operator panel front disassembled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts.

Figure 12-5

Individual parts for the TP 015AT operator panel front Spare part

Order number

(1)


(2)

Keyboard controller

(3)


(4)

LCD unit

(5)

Display support Spare part

6FC5203-0AF08-1AB0

Order number

Remark Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard controller

Remark

(6)

USB mouse

6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0

(7)


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0

Set of 10

Tension jacks

6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Set of 9


6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0

Set of 3


240



3DUW 3DUW

)LOP',1$

&HQWHURIWKHNH\

Figure 12-6

12.6.2





241


Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, touch controller, mouse and USB port can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and reassembled after the front panel has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1. Place the TP 015AT on a soft horizontal surface. Remove the 13 casing screws (see also figure "TP 015AT rear view with interfaces" in Section: "Interfaces" → "Overview") 2. Lift off the cover.

242



Figure 12-7

(1)

TP015AT housing opened


(2)


(3)

Display support

(4)


(5)

Touch controller

(6)

Cable of the touch controller

(7)


(8)


(9)

USB interface

(10)

Display cable

(11)


(12)

Ribbon cable for keyboard controller / USB port

(13)

Port for the mouse

(14)


(15)


(16)

I/O USB cable

(17)

Direct key cable

(18)

Keyboard cable


243


Touch controller 3. Remove the screws (M3) that are holding the touch controller to the display support. Do this with a TX10 screwdriver.

4. Remove the retainer of the touch screen/touch controller cable with a flat screwdriver.

5. Remove the plug connectors from the touch controller by pushing in the retaining lug.

244


Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.6 Replacement parts Backlight inverter cable 6. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clips with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables.





245

Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.6 Replacement parts 10. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller.


Display support

246

12. Remove the 12 screws (1) from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to figure: "TP 015AT housing open".



13. Before removing the display support, secure the touch controller with a screw (1) that you tighten by hand. This ensures that the touch controller is protected when storing the display support. Otherwise, the touch controller could get squeezed or damaged, thus rendering it inoperable.

14. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. Lift off the display support.



247

Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.6 Replacement parts USB board 16. Remove the USB port by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board.


248



Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 17.

Mouse board and bracket

16.

USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins.

15. - 12. Display support 14.


Insert the USB ribbon cable against the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. 11.

Keyboard cable

10. - 9.




249

Operator panel front: TP 015AT 12.6 Replacement parts 8. - 7.


6.


5. - 3.

Touch controller

2. - 1.

Cover


250


13

Direct control key module 13.1

Description The task of the direct control key module (DKM) is to directly transfer the operating signals for the two rows of keys on the sides of an operator panel front to SIMATIC without diversion through intermediate firmware. The signal-to-key assignments are shown in the table and figure in section: "Interfaces" → "Operator panel front." The DKM can be combined with operator panel fronts of type OP 012, OP 012T, OP 015A or TP 015A. The DKM converts the key signals to the PROFIBUS DP protocol by means of the ASIC LSPM2 (PROFIBUS DIN 19245 Part 1, 12 MBaud). Power is supplied via the operator panel front. The PROFIBUS is completely isolated from the DKM/operator panel front by means of an opto-coupler and DC/DC converter. The DKM operates as a slave on PROFIBUS. The address can be set between 1 and 99 using rotary switches. Two bytes of data are transferred. In SIMATIC, the keys are handled as if they were 16 ordinary digital inputs.

Validity This description applies to the following components Name

Order number

Direct control key module (with kit for OP 012)

6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0

Direct key module mounting kit for OP 015A, TP 015A and OP 012T

6FC5247-0AF30-0AA0


251

Direct control key module 13.2 Operating and display elements

13.2

Operating and display elements On the front of the direct key module there are ● coding switches: unit places ● coding switches: decimal places ● LED: Bus error, Not connected ● LED: Diagnostics

Figure 13-1

252

Direct control key module complete with coding switches and LEDs

(1)

Top coding switches: Units digits Bottom coding switches: Tens digits

(2)

LEDs

(3)

Connection for OP 012 cable (not visible)


Direct control key module 13.3 Interfaces

13.3

Interfaces The direct control key module has a ● Profibus connection (1) and a ● connection for the operator panel front (2).

Figure 13-2

Direct control key module with connections

Operator panel connection The ribbon cable for the operator panel front is inserted through the cut-out in the casing (2). Here, the switching states of the vertical direct control keys can be picked up without intermediate firmware. These signals can be evaluated in the direct control key module. Direct control key interface X11 on the keyboard controller for the operator panel front: per DIN 41651, plug connector, cable length max. 0.5 m. Table 13-1 Pin

Assignment of interface X11: 2 x 8 vertical direct control keys Name

1, ..., 16

DT 1, ..., 16 Data

17 / 18

PSV_D_fused

19 / 20

GND


Type O V

Remarks Data output, direct control key #1, ..., 16 + 5 V (fused) Ground

253

Direct control key module 13.3 Interfaces

Figure 13-3

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

'7

Assignment of direct control keys on an operator panel front

PROFIBUS connection 9-pin connector Note The Profibus cable used should have a connector with a straight outgoing cable.

254


Direct control key module 13.4 Mounting

13.4

Mounting

13.4.1

Overview The DKM is installed to one side of the PCU on the operator panel front and connected to the keyboard controller via a short ribbon cable. Mounting the DKM requires an installation kit appropriate to the operator panel front used (kit for the OP 012 already included with the DKM). An installation kit is needed for OP 015A and TP 015A (see figure) and this has to be ordered. You will find the order number in section: "Description".

Figure 13-4

DKM installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A

(1)

Cover plate for keyboard controller for OP 015A

(2)

DKM cable for OP 015A

(3)

DKM cable for TP 015A


255


13.4.2

Combination with OP 012 The OP 012 outputs the signals from the direct control keys at connector X11(3).

23

Figure 13-5

Rear side of OP 012

(1)

I/O USB cable K1

(2)

Display cable K2

(3)


Preparation

:LGWK

&RYHUSODWHIRU .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU

&DEOH FODPS 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH.

256

0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV 6OLWIRUVRIWNH\ODEHOLQJVWULSV

Figure 13-6

+HLJKW



&DVLQJVFUHZV

Rear side of OP 012


Direct control key module 13.4 Mounting 1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU. 2. Remove the ribbon cable clamp (1) alongside the keyboard controller cover plate by inserting a pointed tool in each of the two slits and loosening the fixing cams by levering in the direction shown (3). 3. Unscrew the cover plate for the keyboard controller (4). It is no longer needed for assembly. 4. Remove the rubber rim (5) from the edge of the housing cutout (used to secure a pushbutton panel cable).

Figure 13-7

Removing the cable clamp from the OP 012

(1)

Cable clamp

(2)

OP 012

(3)

Tipping motion of tool

(4)

Previous cover plate

(5)

Rubber rim

Assembly You will find the reference diagrams for the individual mounting stages at the end of the description of the procedure. 1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the ribbon cable supplied with the DKM through the slit in the cover also supplied with the DKM and into socket X11 on the keyboard controller. 2. Screw down the new cover tightly using the screws supplied (A). 3. Install the PCU as described in section "OP 012," section: "Mounting." 4. Set Profibus addresses 01 to 99 using the top (units) and bottom (tens) coding switches of the DKM (see Fig. in section: "Operating and display elements"). 5. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (B). 6. Screw the DKM firmly to the cover using the knurled screws on the side. 7. Insert the Profibus plug (with straight outgoing cable) into the socket of the DKM (C). Operator Components and Networking Manual, 01/2008, 6FC5397-1AP10-2BA0

257

Direct control key module 13.4 Mounting If the DKM is not connected to Profibus connector (or in the event of another fault), the "bus error" LED lights up. Note The direct control key module must be removed first on deinstallation of the PCU. (A)

Figure 13-8

Installation of the direct control key module on the OP 012

(1)

New cover plate

(2)

Securing nipple for DKM (1 of 3)

(3)

Cable to direct control key module

(4)

OP 012

(B)

Figure 13-9 (1)

258

Installation of the direct control key module on the OP 012

OP 012

(2)


(3)

PCU 50

(4)

Cable from OP 012 to DKM

(5)

Securing nipple for DTM

(6)

Cover plate

(7)

Retaining screws


Direct control key module 13.4 Mounting (C)

Figure 13-10 Pre-installed direct control key module

(1)

13.4.3

PCU 50

(2)

DKM

(3)

OP 012

Combination with OP 015A

Preparation 1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU. 2. Unscrew the cover plate for the keyboard controller (see figure).

Figure 13-11 OP 015A rear side

(1)

Cover plate for keyboard controller


259


Assembly You will find the reference diagrams for the individual mounting stages at the end of the description of the procedure. 1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the DKM ribbon cable (figure in section: "Mounting" → "Overview") in socket X11 of the keypad controller (A). Note the fold! 2. Screw down the cover plate supplied with the installation kit and labeled "OP 015A". 3. Fold the DKM cable as shown in (B). 4. Fit the PCU as described in Chapter: “OP 012”, section: "Mounting". 5. Set Profibus addresses 01 to 99 using the top (units) and bottom (tens) coding switches of the DKM (see Fig. in section: "Operating and display elements"). 6. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (C). 7. Screw the DKM firmly to the keyboard controller cover plate using the knurled screws. (A)

Figure 13-12 OP 015A: Keyboard controller connections (1)

Display cable K2

(2)

I/O USB cable K1

(3)

Direct control key cable

(4)


(B)

Figure 13-13 OP 015A: DKM cable routing

260

(1)

DKM cable

(2)

I/O USB cable K1

(3)

Display cable K2


Direct control key module 13.4 Mounting (C)

DTM

PCU 50

OP 015A

Figure 13-14 Installation of the direct control key module on the OP 015A

(1)

Cable from TP 013A to direct control key module

(2)


(3)

Securing nipple for direct control key module

(4)

Retaining screws


261


13.4.4

Combination with TP 015A

Preparation 1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU. 2. Unscrew the cover plate for the keyboard controller (see figure). The plate is required for re-installation.

ab

Figure 13-15 TP 015A rear side

(1)


Assembly You will find the reference diagrams for the individual mounting stages at the end of the description of the procedure. 1. Insert the DKM ribbon cable into socket X11 of the keyboard controller (A) The cable has already been folded (B). 2. Tighten the screws in the cover plate. Fold the DKM cable around as shown in (C). 3. Fit the PCU as described in section: “OP 012,” section: "Mounting." 4. Set Profibus addresses 01 to 99 using the top (units) and bottom (tens) coding switches of the DKM (see Fig. in section: "Operating and display elements"). 5. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (D). 6. Screw the DKM onto the securing nipple with the knurled screws.

262



Reference diagrams (A)

Figure 13-16 TP 015A: Keyboard controller connections

(1)

DKM interface X11:

(2)

I/O USB cable K1

(3)

Display cable K2

(B)

Figure 13-17 TP 015A: DKM cable routing

(1)

Display cable K2

(2)

DKM cable

(3)

I/O USB cable K1


263


(C)

Figure 13-18 TP 015A: Installing the cover plate (1)

DKM cable

(2)

I/O USB cable K1

(3)

Display cable K2

(D)

3&8

'70

73$

Figure 13-19 Installation of the direct control key module on the TP 015A

264

(1)

Cable from TP 015A to DKM

(2)

Securing nipple for direct control key module

(3)

Retaining screws


Direct control key module 13.5 Technical data

13.5

Technical data Safety Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529)

IP20

Electrical data Input voltage

5 VDC

Power consumption

Max. 0.75 W


Width: 106

Height: 42

Weight

Depth: 80

approx. 0.6 kg

Climatic ambient conditions Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air

Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Limits for relative humidity




EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

0 ... 55 ºC

-20 ... 60 ºC

5 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C

265

Direct control key module 13.5 Technical data

266


14

PCU 50.3 14.1

Description The powerful SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 not only has an integrated 150 W main power section but also all of the interfaces for communication via Ethernet and PROFIBUS DP already on board. Four high-speed USB ports (USB 2.0) offer points where a keyboard, mouse and other peripheral devices can be connected. A covered slot is available for CompactFlash cards (CF cards). Two internal PCI slot connections are available for specific expansions. A slot connection can be occupied depending on the device version. Two 7-segment displays and/or LEDs are integrated for diagnostic purposes. These indicate the current operational state or, during powering up, the BIOS error codes. The SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 is supplied with an operating system based on Windows XP.

Validity The description applies to the following devices: Processor

Operating system

RAM (DDR2)

SINUMERIK PCU 50.3-C

Celeron M 1.5 GHz

WinXP ProEmbSys

512 MB

SINUMERIK 840Di/DiE sl PCU 50.3-C

Celeron M 1.5 GHz

WinXP ProEmbSys

512 MB

SINUMERIK PCU 50.3-P

Pentium M 2.0 GHz

WinXP ProEmbSys

1024 MB

SINUMERIK 840Di/DiE sl PCU 50.3-P

Pentium M 2.0 GHz

WinXP ProEmbSys

1024 MB


Other features

Order number 6FC5210-0DF31-2AA0

incl. MCI2 board

6FC5220-0AA31-2AA0

6FC5210-0DF33-2AA0 incl. MCI2 board

6FC5220-0AA33-2AA0

267

PCU 50.3 14.1 Description

Features ● Robust design (continuous operation, high noise immunity) ● Compact construction for space-saving installation ● Service-friendly layout (e.g. battery can be accessed externally) ● Can be expanded via two PCI cards (min. 140 mm to max. 288 mm in length) ● The installation location and length vary due to the different types of mounting and mounting brackets ● Integrated 2-digit diagnostics display and status LEDs (e.g. for operating without a monitor) ● Powerful processors – Celeron M 1.5 GHz, 400MHz FSB or – Pentium M 2.0 GHz, 533 MHz FSB ● Working memory of 512 MB or 1024 MB (DDR2-RAM), max. 2048 MB ● Hard disk drive with cable dampers and 2.5" S-ATA hard disk > 40 GB ● Operating system based on Windows XP ● Screen resolutions with 32 bit colors , 85 Hz) – 640 x 480 – 800 x 600 – 1024 x 768 – 1280 x 1024 – 1600 x 1200 (max.) ● Power supply: 24V DC, 190W with On / Off switch ● Interfaces to peripheral devices: – PROFIBUS (max. 12 MBaud) – DVI-I interface for external monitor – 2 Ethernet connections of 10/100 Mbit/s – CF card shaft (covered) – 4 high-speed USB ports (USB 2.0) ● Interfaces to operator panel front: – LVDS panel interface (channel 1 and optional channel 2) – I/O USB panel interface – Additional high-speed USB port (USB 2.0)

268


PCU 50.3 14.1 Description

View

Figure 14-1

Perspective view of PCU 50.3 (without plug-in card)

Figure 14-2

(1)

Top view of PCU 50.3

Housing cover screws

(2)

Power supply cover screws

(3)

Interfaces on right side of casing

(4)

Rating plate for power supply

(5)

Component label (with designation, order no., series no., version of the device)

(6)

Hard disk module screws

(7)

Hard disk drive

(8)

Handle for shipping lock


269

PCU 50.3 14.2 Operating and display elements

14.2


On / Off switch

Figure 14-3

PCU 50.3 On / Off switch

The integrated 24 V main power section of the PCU is always switched on and off via the On / Off switch (1). It also serves as a substitute for the reset button which is no longer provided. WARNING Before opening the device, always disconnect the main power plug because the On / Off switch does not guarantee separation of the power supply unit from the main power supply, from an electrical standpoint. When in switch position '0', the power supply unit is only placed in standby mode during which all output voltages are zero, but the main power section itself remains energized!

270


PCU 50.3 14.3 Interfaces

14.3

Interfaces

14.3.1

External interfaces

Right-hand casing side

Figure 14-4

(2)

X1

(3)

PCU 50.3 side view from right with interfaces (without plug-in card)

Interface/connection (1)

Function

Line breaker

On / Off switch (for standby) for the power supply unit

Power supply connection

24 V DC, max. 190 W

PCI slot (Slot 1 / Slot 2)

2 slots for expansion modules

(4)

X302

DVI-I interface

Bus for external monitor (VGA monitors via optional adapter)

(5)

X4

CompactFlash card

Slot for CF card under cover plug, not hot plug-capable

(6)

X600

PROFIBUS DP/MPI

12 MBit/s connection for connecting an S7 automation unit, potentialseparated

(7)

X41

USB 4 / USB 5

(8)

X40

USB 0 / USB 2

4 external high-speed USB connections (USB 2.0) - max. 2 can be operated at the same time as high-current 1)

(9)

X501

Ethernet 1

(10)

X500

Ethernet 2

1)

2 x 10/100 MBit/s, connections for local networks (LAN), RJ45

The max. current carrying capacity of the 4 USB connections is a total of 1.2 A. The max. current carrying capacity of a USB connection is 500 mA.


271


Left-hand casing side

Figure 14-5

Side view of PCU 50.3 from left

(1)

Status displays

(2)

Cover plate with retaining screw

(3)

Type plate of the PC unit

(4)

Device fan

(5)

Cover plate for battery

The cover plate (2) for the interfaces for connecting the operator panel fronts (see figure in Section: "Rear side of housing") is not installed at the factory and is delivered separately packaged. Install it if the PCU 50.3 is built into a control cabinet.

Casing rear side

Figure 14-6

PCU 50.3 interfaces for connecting operator panel fronts Interface/connection

(1)

272

X44

I/O interface for connecting the I/O cable of the operator panel front

(2)

X42

Optimum connection for the operator panel front with USB 2.0 front port

(3)

X400

LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display cable



Pin assignment for external interfaces For the pin assignments of the individual external interfaces, refer to section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions".

14.3.2

Internal interfaces

14.3.2.1

Connector assignment of motherboard

Overview

;

;

;

; ;

;

;

; ;

; ; ;

;

; ;

;

; ; ;

;

;

;

; ;

; ;

; ; ;

Figure 14-7

;

;

PCU 50.3 - Motherboard interfaces

*) Internal Connector X1

Interface

Description

Processor

Socket for FCPGA mobile processor


273

PCU 50.3 14.3 Interfaces Connector

Interface

Description

X3

Optical drive Parallel ATA

44-pin, 2 mm male connector

X10

Bus expansion

Socket for bus expansion, uses PCI bus signals

X13

Power supply

20-pin connection plug for power supply

Memory

2 DIMM sockets, 64-bit

Backup battery

Power supply for backup battery, 2-pin male connector

X19 / X20 X24 X25

SATA 0 Power supply

X26

SATA 1

X602

SATA 2

X43

USB port

USB channel 6 and 7

X45

Diagnostics

Connection for diagnostics module

X50

SATA 0 Serial ATA

Data cable for serial ATA

X128

Connection for equipment fan

Power supply for equipment fan, 3-pin male connector

X129

Connection for PS fan

Power supply for CPU fan, 3-pin male connector

X240

Tap for backup battery

Voltage tap ( = 3V) of the backup battery, 2-pin, male connector

X51

SATA 1

X52

SATA 2

X607

Lock status detection for MC hard disk module SATA

Signal type: I

Input

O

Output

V

Power supply

-


Connection for DVD-ROM drive X3 Table 14-1

X3 connector assignment

Connector

Pin

Name

Type

1

RESET

i

Reset

2

GND

-

Ground reference potential

3

D7

4

D8

Data signal D7 I/O

Data signal D8

5

D6

Data signal D6

6

D9

Data signal D9

7

D5

8

274

Remark

D10

Data signal D5 I/O

Data signal D10


PCU 50.3 14.3 Interfaces Connector


Pin

Name

Type

Remark

9

D4

Data signal D4

10

D11

Data signal D11

11

D3

12

D12

Data signal D3

13

D2

Data signal D2

14

D13

Data signal D13

15

D1

Data signal D1

16

D14

17

D0

Data signal D0

18

D15

Data signal D15

19

GND

-


20

N.C.

-

Not connected

21

DREQ

I

DMA request

I/O

I/O

Data signal D12

Data signal D14

22

GND

-


23

IOW_N

O

I/O write (writing signal)

24

GND

-


25

IOR_N

O

I/O read (reading signal)

26

GND

-


27

IORDY

I

I/O ready (ready signal)

28

CSEL

O

Cable select

29

DACK_N

O

DMA acknowledgment

30

GND

-


31

IRQ_R

I

IDE interrupt

32

N.C.

-

Not connected

33

AD_1

O

Address 1

34

PDIAG_N

I/O

PDIAG

35

AD_0

O

Address 0

36

AD_2

O

Address 2

37

CS1_N

-

Chip Select 1

38

CS3_N

-

Chip Select 3

39

HDACT_N

I

HD active

40

GND

-


41

P5V

V

+5V voltage supply (LOGIC)

42

P5V

V

+5V voltage supply (MOTOR)

43

GND

-


44

-

-

Reserved

275


DC interface of the power supply X13 Table 14-2


Connector

Pin

Name

1

P5V

2

P5V

3

P5V

4

P5V

Type

Remark +5V +5V

V

+5V +5V

5

P5V Sense

6

PS_NAU_N

Power loss early warning signal

7

PS_PWROK

Power Good Signal

8

GND

9

GND

10

GND

11

N12V

12

GND

13

GND

14

GND

O

Sense 5 V

Ground -

Ground Ground

V

- 12 V Ground

-

Ground Ground

15

P12V

16

P12V

V

+ 12 V

+ 12 V

17

P3V Sense

O

Sense 3.3 V

18

P3V

19

P3V

20

P3V

+ 3.3 V V

+ 3.3 V + 3.3 V

Connector for backup battery X24 The battery for backing up the CMOS-RAM is connected to this connection. A 3V lithium battery with a capacity of 750 mAh is used for this purpose. Table 14-3

Assignment of the X24 connector Connector

Pin

Name

Type

Remark

1

+

VI

Plus pole

2

-

VI

Minus pole

276



USB port connector X43 Table 14-4

X43 connector assignment Connector

Pin

Name

Type

Remark

1

VCC 5V

O

+ 5 V fused

2

VCC 5V

O

+ 5 V fused

3

USB3

4

USB5

USB3_M I/O

USB5_M

5

USB3

6

USB5

USB3_B

7

GND

-


8

GND

-


9

GND

-


10

GND

-


USB5_B

Connection for equipment fan X128 Table 14-5


Connector

Pin

Name

Type

Remark

1

GND

-


2

+ 12 V

V

Switched voltage supply

3

CPU FAN_CLK

I

Clock signal

Connection for power supply fan X129 Table 14-6


Connector

Pin

Name

Type

1

GND

-

Remark Ground (reference potential)

2

+ 12 V

O

Switched voltage supply

3

PG1 FAN_CLK

I

Clock signal


277


Tap for backup battery X240 This connection is intended for expansion modules with their own CMOS-RAM. The voltage of the backup battery can be tapped here to back up the CMOS-RAM data of the expansion module. Table 14-7

Assignment of the X240 connector Connector

Pin

Name

Type

1

+

VO

Plus pole of battery over 100 Ohm

2

-

VO

Minus pole

Remark

NOTICE No battery should be connected to this connection.

Lock status detection connection X607 This connection serves to detect a locked MC hard disk. Table 14-8

Pin assignment of connector X607 Connector

Pin

Name

Type Remark

1

SATA_GP0

I

Detection input

2

GND

-

Ground

14.3.2.2

Connector assignment of bus board The bus board is designed as a link between the motherboard and the expansion modules. It is mounted using two screws. The bus board has two PCI slots (1x short, 1x long). Expansion modules can be installed acc. to the PCI specification (rev. 2.2) for 5 V and 3.3 V. All PCI slots are capable of being masters. The expansion modules are supplied with power via the bus board's connection to the motherboard.

278



Figure 14-8

PCU 50.3 bus board

(1)

Slot 1

(2)

Slot 2

(3)

12 V power supply connection for WinAC module

PCI slot pin assignment 5V System Environment Side B Side A 1

- 12 V

TRST#

2

TCK

+ 12 V

3

Ground

TMS

4

TDO

TDI

5

+5V

+5V

6

+5V

INTA#

7

INTB#

INTC#

8

INTD#

+5V

9

PRSNT1#

Reserved

10

Reserved

+ 5 V (I/O)

11

PRSNT2#

Reserved

12

Ground

Ground

13

Ground

Ground

14

Reserved

Reserved

15

Ground

RST#

16

CLK

+ 5 V (I/O)

17

Ground

GNT#

18

REQ#

Ground

19

+ 5 V (I/O)

Reserved


279

PCU 50.3 14.3 Interfaces 5V System Environment Side B Side A

280

20

AD[31]

AD[30]

21

AD[29]

+ 3.3 V

22

Ground

AD[28]

23

AD[27]

AD[26]

24

AD[25]

Ground

25

+ 3.3 V

AD[24]

26

C/BE[3]#

IDSEL

27

AD[23]

+ 3.3 V

28

Ground

AD[22]

29

AD[21]

AD[20]

30

AD[19]

Ground

31

+ 3.3 V

AD[18]

32

AD[17]

AD[16]

33

C/BE[2]#

+ 3.3 V

34

Ground

FRAME#

35

IRDY#

Ground

36

+ 3.3 V

TRDY#

37

DEVSEL#

Ground

38

Ground

STOP#

39

LOCK#

+ 3.3 V

40

PERR#

SDONE

41

+ 3.3 V

SBO#

42

SERR#

Ground

43

+ 3.3 V

PAR

44

C/BE[1]#

AD[15]

45

AD[14]

+ 3.3 V

46

Ground

AD[13]

47

AD[12]

AD[11]

48

AD[10]

Ground

49

Ground

AD[09]

50

CONNECTOR KEY

51

CONNECTOR KEY

52

AD[08]

C/BE[0]#

53

AD[07]

+ 3.3 V

54

+ 3.3 V

AD[06]

55

AD[05]

AD[04]

56

AD[03]

Ground

57

Ground

AD[02]

58

AD[01]

AD[00]

59

+ 5 V (I/O)

+ 5 V (I/O)

60

ACK64#

REQ64#


PCU 50.3 14.3 Interfaces 5V System Environment Side B Side A 61

+5V

+5V

62

+5V

+5V

Pin assignment 12V power supply connection for WinAC module Pin

Name

Signal type

1

+ 12 V

V

Remark 12 V voltage

2

GND

-


3

GND

-


4

+5V

V

5 V voltage

Interrupt assignment (PCI-IRQ) PCU 50.3

PCI devices interrupt assignment (PCI IRQ)

INT - A

Graphics, USB A (channel 0+1), USB B (channel 2+ 3)

INT - B

Slot 1

INT - C

Slot 2

INT - D

Serial ATA

INT - E

Ethernet 1

INT - F

MPI/DP

INT - G

Ethernet 2, USB C (channel 4+5), USB D (channel 6 + 7)

INT - H

USB 2.0

Exclusive PCI hardware interrupt Applications which have stringent requirements in terms of interrupt performance need a fast interrupt response time from the hardware. The PCI hardware interrupt may only be assigned by one resource if a fast hardware response time is to be available. To enable this, the Ethernet 1, PROFIBUS/MPI interfaces and the two slots each have an exclusive interrupt. IRQ assignments for Windows XP operating system (APIC mode)

IRQ assignments for DOS-based operating systems (PIC mode)

Ethernet 1

20

10

PROFIBUS/MPI

21

7

Slot 1

17

5

Slot 2

18

3


281

PCU 50.3 14.4 Installation

14.4

Installation

14.4.1

Preparation for mounting Mounting of the PCU 50.3 depends on how it is going to be used. A distinction is made between the following types of mounting: 1. Standard mounting - for assembly of PCU and operator panel front 2. Flat mounting - for PCU in the control cabinet 3. Upright mounting - for PCU behind the operator panel front You require a suitable set of mounting brackets for each mounting method. You will find the corresponding order number in section: "Accessories". Note First, screw corresponding the mounting bracket to PCU before mounting the PCU on an operator panel front or video link transmitter. The figures shows the PCU and mounting bracket for standard mounting correctly aligned before screwing together (tightening torque M3: 0.8 Nm, tightening torque M4: 1.8 Nm).

282



Figure 14-9

PCU 50.3 with mounting brackets (standard mounting)

(1)

Lugs without hinged catch

(2)

M4x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer

(3)


(4)

B bracket

(5)

Lugs with hinged catch

(6)

A bracket

WARNING Securing the PCU to ceiling or wall Ensure that the wall or ceiling can support 4 times the total weight of the PCU (including mounting brackets and additional expansion modules). The total weight of the PCU is a max. of 7 kg.


283


NOTICE For installing the mounting brackets for the upright installation, use only M4x10 screws. For all remaining mounting brackets, use M3x8 and M4x8, (provided). The mainboard will be damaged if you - screw in the M3x8 and M4x8 screws without mounting brackets, - or if you use other 8 mm screws (without a flat washer or tension ring) or - longer screws, - use the M4x10 screws for mounting the brackets on the PCU 50 (previous model).

284



Dimension drawings for mounting

QRQRSHUDWLQJ

RSHUDWLQJ

Figure 14-10 PCU 50.3 dimension drawing for mounting without ETH strain relief

All dimensions in mm 1)


2)


3)

M4 (only present on this side)


285


Figure 14-11 PCU 50.3 dimension drawing for mounting with ETH strain relief

All dimensions in mm

14.4.2

1)


2)


3)

M4 (only present on this side)

Assembly of PCU and operator panel front (standard mounting) Install the PCU and operator panel front as described in section: “OP 012,” section: "Mounting" → "Assembling OP 012 and PCU."

286



14.4.3

Flat mounting Use the 'flat' mounting bracket (see section: "Accessories" → "Overview") to mount the PCU 50.3 flat on the side of the control cabinet.

Figure 14-12 PCU 50.3 with mounting brackets for flat mounting

Procedure 1. Mount the two brackets on the right and left of the PCU 50.3. 2. Mount the PCU 50.3 on the side of the control cabinet in accordance with the installation instructions (see section: "Installation instructions").

Figure 14-13 PCU 50.3 - one bracket mounted


287


Dimension drawing

+ + %DWWHULH

$ 0RQWDJHVFKOLW]HI¾U6FKUDXEHQ0 $Q]XJVGUHKPRPHQW1P

$

Figure 14-14 Dimension drawing for the flat mounting of the PCU 50.3 without video link transmitter

288



14.4.4

Upright mounting Use the 'upright' mounting bracket (see section: "Accessories" → "Overview") to mount the PCU 50.3 behind the operator panel front. Mounting is only possible in one position (fan at the top).

Procedure 1. Mount the rear panel bracket on the right side of the PCU 50.3 (see figure). 2. Mount the PCU 50.3 at a 90° angle in the control cabinet.

Figure 14-15 PCU 50.3 with mounting bracket for upright mounting

(1)

'Upright' mounting bracket

(2)

PCU 50.3


289


Dimension drawing

%

$

$

% 0RQWDJHVFKOLW]HI¾U6FKUDXEHQ 0$Q]XJVGUHKPRPHQW1P RGHU 0$Q]XJVGUHKPRPHQW1P

Figure 14-16 Dimension drawing for the upright mounting of the PCU 50.3 without video link transmitter

14.4.5

Notes on installation Observe the following during installation: ● Avoid extreme environmental conditions as far as possible. Protect the PCU from severe vibrations, jolts, dust, humidity and heat. ● An external fire protection housing is required. ● Do not expose the PCU directly to the sun's rays. ● Install the device in such a way that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result. ● Ventilation clearances: – Both fan sides: 50 mm each. – On top, on the bottom, on the rear side: 10 mm (see Fig.) ● Make sure that the vent slots are not covered.

290


PCU 50.3 14.4 Installation Permissible mounting positions of PCU 50.3 acc. to UL508

(1)

Position of hard disk

Inclined position On the basis of the standard mounting positions shown above (checked with a variance of ± 5°), an inclined position of up to ± 20° is permitted if sufficient ventilation is still ensured.


291


14.4.6

Mounting the Ethernet tension relief The ETHERNET strain relief serves to secure the main power connector on the PCU 50.3. The ETH strain relief is not mounted and is delivered in a separate package.

Procedure 1. Remove the cable ties (1), the ETH strain relief (2) and the two screws (M3) from the separate package.

2. Secure the ETH strain relief on the PCU by tightening the two screws with a Torx screwdriver T10.

292


PCU 50.3 14.4 Installation 3. Plug in the Ethernet cable.

4. Secure the Ethernet cable at the ETH strain relief with a cable tie.


293


14.4.7

Installing the anchor tie The anchor tie (2) ensures strain relief for the cable to the USB interfaces. It has a releasable lock and can therefore be reused. The anchor tie is supplied in a separate package from the factory.

Figure 14-17 PCU 50.3 - anchor tie

Mounting 1. Press the anchor tie firmly in the drill-hole above the PROFIBUS DP / MPI (1). 2. Undo the release and insert the USB cable. 3. After inserting the cable, tighten the anchor tie again, so that the cable is reliably relieved of strain. 4. Rotate the anchor tie in such a manner that the interfaces and connector remain freely accessible.

294


PCU 50.3 14.5 Connections

14.5

Connections

14.5.1

Ground terminal The ground terminal (1) of the PCU 50.3 is on the underside of the casing.

Figure 14-18 Underside of PCU 50.3

14.5.2

I/O devices NOTICE When connecting up I/O devices, check that they are suitable for industrial applications acc. to EN 61000-6-2:2001.

Operator panel front If you are using the PCU together with an operator front panel, before switching on the PCU first connect up the operator front panel. Note The simultaneous operation of the operator panel and monitor is no longer a standard activation under Windows XP.

DVI / VGA monitor Only switch on the PCU once you have connected the external monitor. Otherwise, this interface is automatically deactivated.


295


CF card Only switch on the PCU once you have plugged in the CompactFlash card. The CompactFlash interface is not capable of acting as a hot-plug. Never plug-in or pull a card while the PCU is operating.

Units based on USB You can connect or disconnect units based on USB (USB 1.1 or 2.0) during PCU operations if they are supported by the operating system (e.g. Windows XP). Note If you are using commercially available USB devices, the interference immunity of the entire system can be reduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices. Information on which connection cable is required and how to adapt and set the interface can be found in the User's Manual for your I/O device.

14.5.3

DC power supply (24V) The PCU 50.3 is supplied with 24 V DC voltage. WARNING The cable cross-section must be adapted to the short-circuit current of the 24V DC power source so that no damage is caused by the cables if a short-circuit occurs. Only cables with a cross-section of at least 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) and maximum 3.3 mm2 (AWG12) may be connected.

NOTICE The 24V-DC power source must be adapted to the input data of the PCU (see section: "Technical data").

Connecting the PCU to the 24V-DC power supply 1. Ensure that the PCU's On/Off switch is in the '0' (Off) position to prevent unintentional startup of the device when connecting it to the power supply. 2. Switch off the 24 V DC power supply. 3. Connect the DC connector.

296



14.5.4

Equipotential A low-impedance ground connection ensures that interference signals generated by external power supply cables, signal cables or cables to the I/O modules are safely discharged to ground. The equipotential bonding terminal (1) on the device (large surface, large-area contact) must be connected with the central grounding busbar of the cabinet or plant in which the PCU is to be installed. The minimum cross-section must not fall below 5 mm2.

Figure 14-19 PCU 50.3 equipotential connection


297

PCU 50.3 14.6 Start up

14.6

Start up

14.6.1

Locking / unlocking hard disk Protect the PCU hard disk drive during any form of transport by locking it.

Interlock To lock the hard disk drive, turn the black rotary knob to the "non-operating" position. The sensitive dampers are then reliably protected from damage during transport.

QRQRSHUDWLQJ

RSHUDWLQJ

Figure 14-20 PCU 50.3 hard disk drive locked

Unlocking To unlock the hard disk drive, turn the black rotary knob to the "operating" position. The sensitive dampers are then reactivated for subsequent operations.

QRQRSHUDWLQJ

RSHUDWLQJ

Figure 14-21 PCU 50.3 hard disk drive unlocked

298



Error message during locking When the PCU BIOS is powered up, the system checks whether the hard disk drive has been unlocked. If it has not been unlocked, the following error message is output on the screen: "Error System halted - hard disk drive (HDD) locked! Please switch power off, remove HDD-interlock and reboot the system" The status display is "A8" while the error message is output. Action to take during error message: 1. Switch off the PCU. 2. Unlock the hard disk drive. 3. Switch the PCU on again.

14.6.2

BIOS

14.6.2.1

BIOS powering up Once you have switched the PCU on, the preinstalled system powers up automatically. During powering up, the parameters saved in the BIOS setup take effect. If necessary, you can reactivate the factory-preset parameters (default values) at anytime during the setup using the key. 1. Press the (default load) key to do this. 2. Store the settings by pressing the button (save settings). Once powering up is complete, the start screen is displayed (see IM8: start-up of PCU base software).

Checking the boot sequence If you want to check or change the boot sequence: 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. Press the key (or on the operator panel), if you are prompted to do so. The boot list with all of the booted devices is displayed. 3. Select the desired boot device and press the enter key.


299


Booting using the USB FlashDrive If you connect an external USB device or start from a boot-capable USB FlashDrive for servicing purposes, you have to manually call up the USB device from setup. Two options are available: USB device is entered in boot list 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. Press the key. 3. Press the key (or on the operator panel). 4. Select the corresponding USB device from the boot list. USB device is not entered in boot list 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. Press the key. 3. Select the menu item to reach the Setup menu. 4. Go to the menu bar for . 5. Use the '↓' button to reach the "Excluded from boot order" entry and select the USB device you want to enter in the boot list. 6. Press the 'x' key. The device is entered in the boot list 7. If you want to change the sequence of devices within the boot list, select the corresponding device and press the '+' key to move further up the list or the '-' key to move further down the list. 8. Then reboot the PCU.

PCU doesn't boot up If the PCU no longer boots up as a result of incorrect settings in the BIOS: 1. Take the battery out (see section: "Spare parts" → "Replacement" → "Battery"). 2. Bridge the pins of the PCU's battery connector for approx. 10 seconds with a conductive object. 3. Then wait approx. 1 minute. 4. Put the battery back in. All the BIOS settings (including time and date) are thereby reset. 5. You can set the time and date using the key. 6. Use the button to load the default values and the button to save these.

300



14.6.2.2

Changing the BIOS settings If additional components (e.g. an external USB diskette drive) are attached or removed, you may need to change the BIOS settings (see section: "BIOS start up" → "Booting using the USB FlashDrive"). WARNING Only change the BIOS settings if you are fully aware of the consequences of doing so! Incorrect settings may result in the entire system (including the operating system) no longer starting (see section: "BIOS start up" → "PCU not booting up").

Changing the BIOS settings using the standard keyboard Creating your own user profile Use the "User" profile in the setup menu if you need your own settings in the BIOS and want to permanently save these settings (also used after changing the battery). 1. Switch on the PCU and wait a few seconds. 2. Once you have been prompted to switch to the BIOS setup, press the button. The BIOS Setup menu will appear. 3. Select "User" under "Exit" → "Profile". 4. Make your specific settings in the other menu items. 5. Save the new settings permanently using the button by confirming the dialog with "Yes." 6. Your specific settings will be available once the machine has been restarted. Calling up your own user profile As soon as you select the "User" selection from the "Exit" → "Profile" setup setting and save with the button and "Yes," the values saved originally appear after a reboot, provided that you do not change any data (with the exception of the time and date). Changing data (with the exception of the time and date) is the same as creating a new user profile (see "Creating your own user profile").

Changing the BIOS settings via an operator panel front 1. Switch on the PCU and wait a few seconds. 2. Once you have been prompted to switch to the BIOS setup, press the button. The BIOS Setup menu will appear. 3. Use the cursor keys for navigating in the menu to the desired selection field (e.g. "Disk A:"). 4. Change the setting using the key (press and at the same time) or the key on in the numeric keypad. 5. You can also use the cursor keys (right) and (left) to reach other setup menu items.


301

PCU 50.3 14.6 Start up 6. Press the button ( button) to go to the "Exit" menu. (This menu can also be reached by pressing and holding down the (right) cursor key.) 7. Press the key to quit the setup menu. 8. Press the key to confirm your decision to exit BIOS Setup with "Yes". Then power up the system (see section: "BIOS start up").

6KLIWNH\ 6+,)7

$/$50 &$1&(/

(VFDSHNH\ ,QSXWNH\

,1387

SUHVV)!WRHQWHU%,26VHWXS

)NH\

Figure 14-22 Using the BIOS Setup via an operator panel front

14.6.2.3

Status display The status display consists of two 7-segment displays with two 2-color LEDs.

Figure 14-23 PCU 50.3 status display

302

(1)

2 x 7-segment display

(2)

LED H2

(3)

LED H1



Function of the 7-segment display During the BIOS powering up process, the POST codes of the corresponding test stage are displayed. Once power up has been completed correctly, code 00 is displayed. If an error occurs, the POST code of the last test stage started is displayed. Application codes can also be displayed if required.

Function of LEDs H1 and H2 During the BIOS powering up process, both LEDs light up in two colors (red and green) to test their function. Both LEDs are switched off once powering up is completed correctly. Applications can trigger the two LEDs if required.

14.6.3

System start More information on the system start can be found in the manual "IM8 start-up of PCU base software."

14.6.4

Switching off / reset

Closing Windows XP To close the Windows XP operating system, select "Start" → "Shut down". This ensures that the system and operating system can be restarted without any problems.

Switching off the PCU Once you have closed and shut down Windows XP, the power supply module of the PCU is still on. If you also want to switch off the power supply module, tip the PCU's On / Off switch into the "0" position.

Reset The PCU does not have a special reset button to restart the system. If you want to enforce a system restart, use the On / Off switch to switch your PCU off and on again. Note When undertaking service work (opening the PCU), also disconnect the main power connector from the 24V power supply. This is the only way of totally de-energizing the unit!


303


14.6.5

Calibration of the touch screen If you want to connect a new Touch Panel (TP 012 or TP 015A) to the PCU, you have to recalibrate the Touch Screen of the operator panel front. Touch software, required for the calibration, is included in the basic Windows XP software.

Proceed as follows A functioning touch panel system with PCU 50.3 is required. 1. Boot up the system in service mode. 2. Start the SINUMERIK desktop (password-protected). 3. Invoke the calibration menu from "Start" → "Programs" → "Touchware" → "Touchware" (see figure). Note On the TP 015A the default calibration is centrosymmetric to the center point. This means that you must press the top right of the screen to activate the "Start" button (bottom left).

Figure 14-24 Menu for touch screen calibration (Touchware version 5.64 SR3)

304



Note Depending on the software version and setting, the screen can include 2, 4 or 5 calibration points. You can toggle between 2 and 5 points (Touchware version 5.63 SR3) or between 2 and 4 points (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) from the menu "Tools" → "Options" → "Advanced" → "Style". 4. Press the "Calibrate" button. The following display will appear on the screen:

Figure 14-25 Calibration screen

5. Using the tip of a finger, touch the calibration point indicated by the hand symbol as precisely as possible for as long as the "Hold" prompt is displayed. The "Hold" instruction disappears after a few seconds and the hand moves to the next calibration point. 6. Repeat the instructions in step 5 until all available points have been calibrated. Once the calibration point parameters have been saved, the following menu appears:


305


Figure 14-26 Test menu

7. To test the calibration values, move your finger around the screen and watch the cursor. If necessary, recalibrate using "Calibrate." 8. Exit the calibration menu via "Done" → "Close". If you take too long on calibration, the whole process is aborted by a "timeout" and you have to start again from the beginning.

14.6.6

Operation with an S7-CPU (without NCU)

Application range MCP communication is understood to be the transfer of E/A images to the following components: ● two machine control panels ● one HHU ● two direct key units of an OP The machine control panel signals are communicated on SINUMERIK systems using the FB1 (MCP communication). On more complex systems, the FB9 is used to carry out the M:N switchover. The parameters are filed in DB7 and can be changed by the FB9. Since these blocks are not available in the SIMATIC environment, the FB9 Proxy assumes these tasks. The FB9 Proxy is executable both on a PCU 321 (Linux) together with an HMI sl and on a PCU 50.3 together with HMI Advanced or HMI sl.

Prerequisites It is a requirement that a DB19 is available on the installed S7-CPU in accordance with SINUMERIK specifications: ● PCU 321 with HMI program (e.g., HMI sl) ● PCU 50.3 with HMI program (e.g., HMI sl) ● PCU 50.3 with HMI-Advanced The FB9 Proxy only functions if the MCP Client (mcpdrv) is also running.

306



Creating DB19 for a PCU 321 The DB19 for the PLC project of the PCU 321 must be created by the user. If the DB19 is copied from an existing PLC project to a NCU, it may be that it is not saved during the series machine startup. The DB19 copied from the existing SINUMERIK project was generated by the basic program and a corresponding generic bit set. This bit is evaluated during a series machine startup and the block would NOT be saved, as it has been generated by the system. A new data block (DB19) is created via STEP 7 with the following structure: STRUCT: Array [-32768..-32371] type: BYTE Address Name 0.0

Type STRUCT

Start value

+0.0 DB_VAR

ARRAY(-32768 ... -32371)

+1.0

BYTE

=398.0

END_STRUCT

A flag is not set for blocks created by the user, i.e. not created by the system, and the block is always saved during the series machine startup.

Operation with a PCU 321 In this case, the two utilities, FB9 Proxy and MCP Client, are started automatically by the system. Only the fb9_proxy.ini file needs to be modified. For this purpose, the fb9_proxy.ini file is copied to a user directory and the necessary entries are changed. Directories on the CF card: /siemens/sinumerik/fb9proxy

→

/user/sinumerik/fb9proxy

→

/oem/sinumerik/fb9proxy

Operation with a PCU 50.3 The two utilities, FB9 Proxy and MCP Client, are not started automatically by the system on the PCU 50.3 with HMI-Advanced. To start the two utilities, changes are made in the following files: If HMI sl is used: ● systemconfiguration.ini file: In the [processes] section, the MCP Client and the FB9 Proxy need to be entered after the CP entry. The section must include the following: ... [processes] PROC000= image:=cp_840di, process:=CP_840di, background:=true PROC001= image:=slsmhmihost, process:=SlHmiHost1, deferred:=true PROC002= image:=mcpdrv, process:=mcpdrv, background:=true PROC003= image:=fb9proxy, process:=fb9proxy, background:=true


307

PCU 50.3 14.6 Start up If HMI Advanced is used: ● REGIE.INI file: In the [StartupConfiguration] section, activate the following line: Startup36 = name := StartPrg, Timeout :=20000 ● STARTPRG.INI file: Enter the two utilities in the [StartProg] section. Disable the mcp_rout.exe call. The section must include the following: ... [StartProg] E:\Siemens\services\mcp_client\mcpdrv.exe E:\Siemens\services\fb9proxy\fb9proxy.exe

14.6.7

Configuring the 'fb9_proxy.ini' file

Configuring the fb9_proxy.ini file Example of configuration file when supplied: [PLC] ;# Set GET_IP_BY_HMI to '0', if you want a static connection to PLC ;# with specified ip address ;# otherwise FB9-Proxy tries to determine IP-Address and CPInterface ;# from mmc.ini of HMI ;GET_IP_BY_HMI = 1 ;# if GET_IP_BY_HMI is set to '1' the following key 'IP-ADDRESS' ;# has no effect ;# otherwise this key determines the static IP-Address of the PLC ;IP-ADDRESS = 192.168.214.241 ;# if GET_IP_BY_HMI is set to '1' the following key ' CP-INTERFACE ' ;# has no effect ;# otherwise this key determines the interface to the shared memory ;# of the CP software. ;# The key is useful to avoid collisions between FB9-Proxy and ;# the HMI. The CP software supports two shared memory interfaces. ;# Normally one interface is used by the HMI. ;# HMI Embedded and HMI sl use the interface with index 1. ;# So the FB9-Proxy uses by default the interface with index 2. ;# HMI Advanced uses the interface with index 2, so you have ;# to instruct the FB9-Proxy to use the interface with index 1. ;CP-INTERFACE = 2

308


PCU 50.3 14.6 Start up ;# 2 bytes for PLC alarms ;ALARM = AB80 ;# address of 2 bytes for life sign of fb9proxy ;LIFESIGN = AB82 ;# cycle for transmission of life sign ;# (valid values between 200 and 2000 milliseconds) ;LIFECYCLE = 200 [MCP1] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB0 ;OUT = AB0 [MCP2] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB64 ;OUT = AB64 [HHU] ;BUS-ADDRESS = ? ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB32 ;OUT = AB32 [DCK1] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 1 ;IN = EB16 ;OUT = AB16 [DCK2] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 1 ;IN = EB48 ;OUT = AB48

Connection to the PLC In the [PLC] section, the "IP-ADDRESS" key specifies the IP address of the S7-CPU. A connection is made to this PLC. This key is only evaluated if no IP address for the PLC is found by the HMI sl in the MMC.INI file. The IP address of the S7-CPU can be set via GET_IP_BY_HMI: The operator can define whether the IP address of the PLC is obtained from the HMI mmc.ini or whether a static IP address is defined.


309

PCU 50.3 14.6 Start up GET_IP_BY_HMI = 1 → IP address is obtained from the HMI mmc.ini. GET_IP_BY_HMI = 0 → Static IP address is defined via fb9_proxy.ini. The "LIFESIGN" key can be used to obtain a sign of life from the FB9 Proxy on the PLC. The "ALARM" key indicates the location in the PLC to which the two alarm bytes should be written. If this key does not exist, the alarm bytes are not transferred.

Triggering alarms In contrast to the original FB9, it is not possible for the FB9 Proxy to trigger PLC alarms. The user program on the SIMATIC CPU can decide whether or not alarms are triggered. When the cause of the alarm has been remedied and this is detected by the FB9 Proxy, the relevant bit is reset. If the alarms are acknowledged, the user program on the SIMATIC CPU can reset the bits itself. The alarms are entered in a byte array that can be transferred to the PLC. For this purpose, the variable "ALARM" must be specified in the [PLC] section in the INI file. In the case of transitional edges 0→1, the PLC user program can trigger the relevant alarms and, in the case of transitional edges 1→0, it can cancel the alarms again. The alarm bits are written to AB30 and AB31 by default. List of alarms that can be triggered by FB9 Proxy via MCP communication: Alarm number

Alarm text

Byte

Bit

400260

Failure of machine control panel 1

0

0

400261


0

1

400262

Failure of manual operating device

0

2

400274

Direct control key 1 failed

0

3

400275


0

4

410900

m:n - call waiting discontinued

1

0

410901

m:n - HMI 1 not responding to displacement

1

1

410902

m:n - HMI 1 is not going offline

1

2

410903


1

3

410904


1

4

410905

m:n - HMI connection to assigned interface not available

1

5

410906

m:n - No sign of life on an HMI

1

6

References: Diagnostics Manual, PLC Alarms

Connection to additional components The contents of the [MCP1], [MCP2], [HHU], [DCK1] and [DCK2] sections are configured in exactly the same way and are used to configure the connections to the MCP/DCK devices: If the "BUS-ADDRESS" key exists, a static connection is set up for the relevant device, i.e., no dynamic request is required in the DB19 from an HMI. If, however, a dynamic request is made by an HMI, the static connection is stopped and the dynamic connection is made. The "PROFILE" key indicates whether the standard parameter set or the direct key parameter set should be used from the MCP_CLIENT.INI file.

310



Default: PROFILE=0

for machine control panels and HHU

PROFILE=1

for direct keys

The "IN" key is used for addressing the inputs (key information) and indicates the address to which information should be written. The "OUT" key is used for addressing the outputs (LED information) and indicates the address from which information is read. The length of the inputs and outputs is determined directly by the device and, therefore, does not need to be indicated. However, it is important to ensure that the addressing range is adequately dimensioned, so as to ensure that information does not overlap. For example, if the address EB0 is configured for the MCP1 inputs and an HT 8 and an MCP483 are available for the M:N switchover, the direct key inputs can only be configured from EB16. The MCP483 inputs are 14 bytes long. Note m:n configuration If there is an HMI application in the system that supplies the m:n interface in the DB19, the FB9 proxy dynamically establishes the connections with the names "MCP1" and "DCK1". In this case, these two connections cannot be configured statically. Therefore, use to the connections with the names "MCP2", "HHU" and "DCK2" instead. The names have been selected with reference to the FB9 and are not linked to any semantics. The connection with the name "HHU" can also be used for an MCP. For addresses for the memory areas in the PLC, expressions such as EBx, ABx, MBx and DBy.DBBx can be used. These are always byte addresses. Examples: IN = EB0

→

Inputs are written to the PLC from EB0.

OUT = DB100.DBB20

→

Outputs are read from DB100 from byte 20.


311

PCU 50.3 14.7 Technical data

14.7

Technical data

14.7.1

PCU 50.3 Safety Safety class

III (PLEV) acc. to EN 61800-5-1

Degree of protection in accordance with EN 60529

IP 20


CE / cULus

Electrical data Input voltage Max. current output

Power consumption

24 V DC (20.4 V ... 28.8 V) USB external, each 0.5 A (in total: 1.2 A) 3.3 V

2A

5V

2A

12 V

0.3 A

-12 V

0.05 A

PCU basic unit

PCI slots

typ. 65 W (at 55° C)

max. 15 W 1)

Main power outage buffering time

min. 20 ms


Height: 267

Depth: 82

Weight

Max. 7 kg

Slot 1:

Card length max. 288 mm (measured without slot plate) 2)

Slot 2:

Card length max. 175 mm (measured without slot plate) 2)

Mechanical environmental conditions

Operation


Vibration stressing

10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 DIN IEC 60068-2-6

5 -9 Hz: 6.2 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 DIN IEC 60068-2-6

Shock stressing

50 m/s2, 30 ms 18 shocks DIN IEC60068-2-27

300 m/s2, 6 ms 18 shocks DIN IEC60068-2-27

Noise

312

Width: 297

< 55 dB(A) according to DIN 45635-1


PCU 50.3 14.7 Technical data Climatic environmental conditions Cooling

Open-circuit-ventilated


Applicable standards Climate class



DIN IEC 60068-2-1

DIN IEC 60068-2-2 / -2-14

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

Temperature limits

5 ... 55 °C

2)

-20 ... 60 °C

Temperature change

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 … 80% at 25 °C

5 ... 95% at 25°C

Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity

14.7.2

max. 0.1 % / min

1)

All of the slots must not exceed this total output

2)

With total power of slots amounting to 15 W

DC power supply module of 24 V (integrated)

Technical data Safety Protective class Degree of protection in accordance with EN 60529 Approvals

III (PELV) acc. to EN 61800-5-1 IP 20 (when mounted) CE / cULus


DC 24 V (20.4 V ... 28.8 V)

Input current

Continuous current to 9 A (to 14 A for 30 ms at startup)

Power consumption Temperature-limited output power Main power outage buffering time


max. 190 W max. 105 W (operation at 55 °C) Min. 20 ms

313

PCU 50.3 14.7 Technical data

Output voltages Voltage

Max. current

+12 V

6.5 A, peak 8 A

- 12 V

0.3 A

+5V

16.5 A 1), peak 18.5 A

+ 3.3 V

8.5 A 1)

1) The max. permitted accumulated power of the + 5 V and 3.3 V is 90 W.

Power good signal on DC 24V power supply (diagram)

9LQSXWYROWDJH

99¢9RXWSXW

32:(5*22'

7

7

7SUHVHWWLPHPV 7KROGXSWLPHPLQPV Figure 14-27 Power good signal on DC 24V power supply

NAU signal on DC 24V power supply (diagram - main power failure alarm)

9LQSXWYROWDJH

32:(5*22'

1$8

7

7

7SUHVHWWLPHPLQPV 7KROGXSWLPHPLQPVGDWDUHVFXHWLPH Figure 14-28 NAU signal on DC 24V power supply

314


PCU 50.3 14.8 Spare parts

14.8

Spare parts

14.8.1

Overview The following spare parts are available for the PCU 50.3: Component

Order number

Hard disk with mounting plate and damper

6FC5247-0AF08-4AA0

Device fan (60 mm)

A5E00319306

Power supply module fan (50 mm)

A5E00319305

CMOS battery 3V lithium CR 1/2AA

A5E00331143

150W DC power supply (24V)

A5E00320852

14.8.2

Replacement

14.8.2.1

Hard disk drive The installed hard disk drive is connected to the main board by three cables. ● S-ATA data cable ● Power supply cable ● Cable for detection of lock status

Figure 14-29 PCU 50.3 with hard disk drive folded up (1)

Hard disk module

(2)

Ribbon cable (S-ATA) for hard disk connection to port 0

(3)

Power supply cable of the hard disk module to X602

(4)

Locking cable for switch to X607

(5)

Fastening clip for power supply cable


315


Proceed as follows 1. Disconnect the PC from the power supply. 2. Lock the hard disk's transport lock by turning the black rotary knob to the "non-operating" position (see Fig. "PCU 50.3 hard disk module locked" in section: "Start up" → "Locking / unlocking hard disk"). 3. Loosen the four fastening screws of the hard disk module. 4. Fold up the hard disk module (see Figure above). 5. Disconnect the ribbon cable (2) from the main board and note its position. 6. Also disconnect the other two cables (3) and (4) and note their slots on the main board. 7. When installing the new hard disk module, proceed in reverse order. The new module must be of the same type or a compatible successor. 8. Unlock the hard disk's transport lock by turning the black rotary knob to the "operating" position (see Fig. "PCU 50.3 hard disk module unlocked" in section: "Start up" → "Locking / unlocking hard disk").

14.8.2.2

Power supply

Removing the power supply

Figure 14-30 Removal and installation of PCU 50.3 power supply

316

(1)

Retaining screws for the power supply cover

(2)

Power supply cover

(3)

Power supply retaining screws

(4)

Connector for power supply

(5)

Power supply



WARNING The power supply may only be replaced by authorized personnel.

1. Disconnect the PC from the power supply. 2. Lock the transport lock for the hard disk (see section: "Start-up" → "Lock/unlock hard disk") and remove the hard disk. 3. Undo the retaining screws (1) from the power supply cover (2) and take off the power supply cover. 4. Unscrew the power supply retaining screws (3) (Torx T10). 5. Disconnect the connection plug for the power supply (4) from the power supply. 6. Pull the power supply up and out of the casing.

Installing the power supply Install the new power supply in reverse order. Note Observe the correct position of the resting hook of the power supply for upright bus boards.


317


14.8.2.3

Power supply module fan To be able to replace the power supply module fan, you must first remove the power supply. You will find a description of this process in section: "Spare parts" → "Replacement" → "Power supply".

Removing the power supply module fan

Figure 14-31 PCU 50.3 power supply module fan (1)

Connector for power supply

(2)

Power supply module fan (correct installation position - fan blows outward)

1. Remove the power supply. 2. Remove the connector to the fan's power supply (1). 3. Loosen the four black plastic rivets or screws on the rear of the casing and take out the fan.

Installing the power supply module fan Re-install the new fan in reverse order. Ensure the correct mounting position is used (see arrow in diagram above). NOTICE Only a fan of the same type may be mounted.

318



14.8.2.4

Device fan

Removing the device fan

Figure 14-32 Replacement of the PCU 50.3 device fan (1)

Expansion rivets for mounting the device fan

(2)

Power supply cable for device fan

(3)

Device fan (blows outward)

*) Direction of air flow

1. Disconnect the PC from the power supply. 2. Remove the casing cover by loosening the two screws (see diagram "Plan view of PCU 50.3" in section: "Description") 3. Pull the device fan's power supply cable out of the socket. 4. Loosen the four black plastic rivets on the rear of the casing. 5. Take the fan out of the casing.

Installing the device fan Re-install the new fan in reverse order. Ensure the correct mounting position is used (see arrow in diagram above). NOTICE Only a fan of the same type may be mounted.


319


14.8.2.5

Battery Note Batteries are wear-susceptible parts. They should be replaced every 5 years to ensure that the device functions permanently. If a mounted PCI plug-in card is also supplied (central battery concept), preventive replacement intervals are shortened to 4 years. Dispose of used batteries using the local connection point specifically set-up locally so that they are correctly recycled or are disposed of as hazardous waste. The backup battery supplies voltage to not only to any plug-in cards used during operations but also to the hardware clock once the device has been switched off. In addition to the clock time, the BIOS settings of the device are also stored. This data is lost if the backup battery fails for longer than 1 minute or remains separate from the plug-in contact while the PCU is not switched on. WARNING Only use 3.0 V lithium batteries for the PCU 50.3 because any plug-in cards present must not be subjected to any permanent voltage in excess of 3.0 V.

Figure 14-33 Main board of PCU 50.3 with assignment of RAMs and the backup battery (1)

320

Equipment fan

(2)

Backup battery

(3)

Plug for connecting device fan

(4)

Plug for connecting backup battery

(5)

Socket for RAM bank 1 (not assigned)

(6)

RAM bank 0

(7)

Locating hole for board retainer



Note before replacing the battery CAUTION Risk of damage! The lithium battery may only be replaced with an identical battery or with a type recommended by the manufacturer (Order No.: A5E00331143). All lithium batteries should be returned to the battery manufacturer / recycler for disposal or treated as special grade waste. Note the current BIOS Setup settings. This must be done in particular if you have undertaken different settings which are not saved in the user profile. If you have saved all settings in the user profile or if you are working with the standard settings, the settings will not be lost when the battery is replaced. WARNING Risk of explosion and release of harmful substances! Therefore, do not throw Lithium batteries into an open fire, do not solder or open the cell body, do not short-circuit or reverse polarity, do not heat up above 100 °C, dispose as regulated and protected against direct exposure to sunlight, humidity and condensation.

Changing the backup battery You will find the reference diagrams after this description. Note If you reconnect the new battery within one minute, all the settings (including time / date) and backed up data will be retained. 1. Open the battery box (A). 2. Take out the battery holder (B). 3. Remove the connection cable (C). 4. Remove the old battery from the holder. 5. Secure the new battery in the holder. 6. Reconnect the connection cable. 7. Close the battery box.


321


Reference diagrams (A)

Figure 14-34 Opening the battery compartment

(B)

Figure 14-35 Removing the battery holder

(C)

Figure 14-36 Unplugging the cable

322


PCU 50.3 14.9 Accessories

14.9

Accessories

14.9.1

Overview The following accessories are available for the PCU 50.3:

Component

Order number

Mounting bracket

Standard Flat

Memory expansion

6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0

1)

2)

A5E00022108

Upright 3)

6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0

128 MB, DDR2 533, SODIMM

6ES7648-2AG10-0GA0


6ES7648-2AG20-0GA0

512 MB. DDR2 533, SODIMM

6ES7648-2AG30-0GA0


6ES7648-2AG40-0GA0

CompactFlash card

512 MB (empty)

6FC5313-4AG00-0AA2

USB FlashDrive

1 GB

6ES7648-0DC30-0AA0

SINUMERIK service pack Recovery Media WIN XP ProEmbSys

for PCU with Windows XP ProEmbSys on CD CD1:

Windows XP ProEmbSys incl. SP2

CD2:

Ghost of basic software; emergency boot

CD3 to CD5:

Multilingual user interface pack (Chinese simplified, Chinese traditional, Danish, German. Finnish, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese/Brazilian, Russian, Swedish, Czech, Turkish, Hungarian)

6FC5253-8CX10-1XU8

Documentation (German / English) PCI Multi I/O module

2 x COM, LPT for PCU 50.3 (only for use with applications within the framework of HMI Open Architecture, occupies 1 to 2 PCI expansion slots)

6ES7648-2CA00-0AA0

1) for PCU or video link receiver behind operator panel front 2) for PCU in the control cabinet 3) for PCU behind operator panel front


323


14.9.2

Installing and removing expansion modules

14.9.2.1

Memory expansion

Expansion options On the main board there are two slots for memory modules (RAM banks). If you fill these slots with one or two modules, you can increase the memory capacity of the PCU to up to 2 GB. 184-pin DDR2 memory modules, unbuffered, no ECC can be used. The following combinations are possible: Combination

Slot X1

1

128/256/512/1024 MB

2

128/256/512/1024 MB

Slot X2

Removal max. 1 GB

128/256/512/1024 MB

2 GB

Note It does not matter which modules are inserted into which slots.

Installation of memory module 1. Disconnect the device from mains. 2. Remove the screws from the casing cover (see diagram "Plan view of PCU 50.3" in section: "Description") and take off the casing cover. 3. Insert module in socket (see "Main board of PCU 50.3 with assignment of RAMs and the backup battery" diagram in section: "Spare parts" → "Replacement" → "Battery"). When doing so, pay attention to the recess (anti-rotation element) on the plug side of the RAM module. 4. Press the module downwards, applying slight pressure until the locking snaps into place. 5. Re-install the casing cover.

CAUTION Insert the module well into the socket so that it cannot fall out or become damaged. The electrostatic components on the PCBS are highly sensitive to electrostatic discharge. It is therefore vital to take precautionary measures when handling these components. Refer to the directives for handling components that are sensitive to electrostatic charge.

324


PCU 50.3 14.9 Accessories The installed memory module is detected automatically by the PCU. When the device is switched on, the division into "Base-Memory" and "Extended-Memory" is shown.

Removal of memory module 1. Disconnect the device from main power and unplug all cables. 2. Loosen the casing cover screws (see Figure: "Plan view of PCU 50.3" in section: "Description") and take off the casing cover. 3. Loosen locks on left and right sides of memory module (see Fig.). 4. Pull the memory module out of the slot.

Figure 14-37 Unplug locks


325


14.9.2.2

PCI cards The PCU 50.3 is designed for use with modules conforming to PCI specifications V 2.2. It has two PCI slots (1) for expansion modules.

Figure 14-38 Expansion slots

(1)

PCI slots for expansion modules

(2)

Bus board

(3)

Rear guide rail

(4)

Retaining screw for module bracket

(5)

Module retainer

(6)

Retaining screws for slot cover plates and/or external module connections

(7)

Cover plates for slots

PCI modules with 5 V and 3.3 V supply voltage can be used.

PP

PP

The dimensions of the boards must not exceed the specified dimensions. Otherwise, contact problems, malfunctions and installation difficulty cannot be ruled out.

Figure 14-39 Typical PCI module (with a length between 170 - 175 mm)

326



PP

PP

PP

Figure 14-40 Maximum size of PCI module (only possible on slot 1)

Installing PCI cards NOTICE When installing PCI cards, ensure that you do not touch or smudge the golden plug connections of the card. This protects the card from malfunctioning.

Figure 14-41 Installation of an expansion module

(1)

Retaining screw for module bracket

(2)

PCI card (in slot 1 with short shape)

(3)

Module retainer

(4)

Retaining screw for the slot-steel sheet cover

(5)

Slider

(6)

Stabilizer

1. Separate the PCU 50.3 from the main power by disconnecting the main power connector. 2. Loosen the casing cover screws (see Figure: "Plan view of PCU 50.3" in section: "Description") and take off the casing cover.


327

PCU 50.3 14.9 Accessories 3. Remove the fastening screw (1) of the module bracket (3) and remove the bracket. 4. Undo the retaining screws of the slot cover plate (see Fig. "Slots for expansion modules" (6)) for the corresponding upper or lower slot and remove the slot plate. 5. Carefully insert the PCI card (2); firm seat should be ensured. When using long PCI cards, be aware of the rear guide rail. 6. Install the module bracket (3). 7. Lock the PCI card (2) by inserting a slider (5) through the guide slot until it securely holds the edge of the module in its groove. CAUTION No pressure should be applied to the module. Therefore, do not apply excessive force to the slider when you push it onto the module. 8. Use a diagonal cutter to cut off the excess part of the slider (5). 9. Mount the casing cover. For half-height PCI cards, the following points do not apply: 7. and 8. Note If you use cards with a battery connection, connect the connecting cable to the battery before you install the housing cover (point 9) (see Section: "Installing battery cable")

PCI Multi I/O module If you use the PCI module Multi I/O (order no.: 6ES7648-2CA00-0AA0), install the driver from the accompanying driver CD per the instructions. To ensure the card works properly, it is necessary to make a change in the BIOS setup. Make settings in the menu: Advanced → I/O Device Configuration → Internal COM 1: Disabled

328



Installing battery cable - only for MC-specific PCI cards

Figure 14-42 Installing the battery cable for PCI modules (1)

Plug for connecting device fan

(2)

Plug for connecting backup battery

(3)

Connector plug for connecting the PCI module to the battery

● Connect the PCI module via the cable (3) to the battery connection (see figure)

14.9.2.3

CompactFlash card The PCU 50.3 has a slot for CompactFlash cards (types I/II). We recommend using CF cards for industrial applications (e.g. industrial grade types produced by SANDISK) because they offer special data security, service life and data transfer speeds. NOTICE The slot for the CF card is not capable of acting as a hot-plug. You should therefore fit the CompactFlash card before you switch on the PCU and only remove the card once you have switched the PCU off.

Installing the CF card 1. Separate the PCU from the power supply by disconnecting the main power connector. 2. Loosen the fastening screw (4) for the cover plate (3) of the card slot. 3. Fold up the cover plate (3) and slide it towards the DVI-I interface (2). Lift the cover plate slightly until it unlatches on the left side. Then slide it back until it unlatches on the right side.


329

PCU 50.3 14.9 Accessories 4. Carefully slide the CF card straight into the card slot until it snaps in. 5. Close the card slot by inserting the cover plate and lock it on the left and right.

Figure 14-43 Installing CF card

(1)

Cover plates for PCI slots

(2)

DVI-I interface

(3)

Cover plate for PC card slot

(4)

Retaining screw for cover plate

Note The slot for the CompactFlash card is coded to prevent incorrect plugging of the card. If the CF card is incorrectly plugged, it protrudes out of the housing approx. 1 cm and remains functionless.

Removing the CF card 1. Open card slot as described under "Installing the CF card" (point 1-3). 2. Press the eject button on the right-hand side of the module slot (e.g. with narrow end of the cover plate - see Fig.). 3. Remove the CF card. 4. Close the card slot.

Figure 14-44 Press the eject button

330


15

PCU 321 15.1

Description

15.1.1

Overview The SINUMERIK PCU 321 is a powerful computer unit without a hard disk or fan of the same assembly type as the SIMATIC S7-300, allowing simple installation on an S7 sectional rail. It has five on-board Ethernet communication ports. Two of these ports are standard Ethernet interfaces, the other three are Profinet interfaces. An additional two USB interfaces are available for connecting I/O devices. The SINUMERIK PCU 321 is optimally prepared for installation of an operating system on CompactFlash card. The user interface software HMI Pro-sl and HMI-sl can also be ordered (see Section: "Accessories"). The PCU 321 offers machines with pure SIMATIC control not only the SINUMERIK user interfaces HMI-sl and HMI Pro-sl but also the SINUMERIK operator components.

Validity The description applies to the following devices: Processor SINUMERIK PCU 321

Operating system

RAM (DDR2)

Order No.:

LINUX

256 MB

6FC5310-0DF00-2AA0

Celeron M 900 MHz

Features ● Powerful processor – Intel Celeron M 900 MHz ● Simple mounting on sectional rail ● Status LEDs for displaying the operating states ● Ports – 3 x Profinet – 2 x standard Ethernet (transmission rate: 10/100 MBit/s) – 2 x USB – Slot for CF card (type II)


331

PCU 321 15.1 Description The SINUMERIK PCU 321 can be used in conjunction with SIMATIC CPUs for Operating software HMI Pro sl RT HMI sl

Component OP 08T / OP 012 / OP 012T / OP 015A / OP 015AT / TP 015A / TP 015AT HT 8 OP 08T / OP 010 / OP 010C / OP 010S / OP 012 / OP 012T OP 015 / OP 015A / OP 015AT / TP 015A / TP 015AT HT 8

15.1.2

System structure The SINUMERIK PCU 321 does not have a P/K bus. For that reason it must be installed to the left of the PLC-CPU and to the right of the power supply in a DIN rail configuration (s. Fig.).

3RZHU6XSSO\ HJ6,723$

Figure 15-1

3&8

6[[31 HJ 6,0$7,&631

GLJLWDO,2V HJ60

System assembly with SINUMERIK PCU 321

Note If this assembly sequence is not followed, the P/K bus communication from the S7-CPU with its I/Os will be interrupted. The configured S7 modules are reported as defective after delayed start-up.

332


PCU 321 15.1 Description

15.1.3

Networking The figure shows how the PCU 321 can be networked, in this case the largest possible structure. )DFWRU\QHWZRUN

0&,6 VHUYHU 6&$/$1&(

3/&KHDGHQG 6\VWHPQHWZRUN 3RZHU6XSSO\

3/&

3&8 &1&XQLW

Figure 15-2

3/&XQLW

Networking the PCU 321

Profinet interfaces The connection between the PCU 321 and the system network is established via the three Profinet interfaces. ● PN1: PCU to an assigned PLC (e.g.: PLC 317 or PLC 319 PN) ● PN2: PCU to an adjacent Profinet module (e.g.: SINUMERIK 840D sl with integrated PLC 319 PN or SIMATIC S7-319 PN) ● X120: – PCU to a stationary or mobile SINUMERIK TCU (and operator panel front) – PCU to a SINUMERIK operator panel front with TCU – PCU to a machine control panel SINUMERIK MCP xxx – PCU to a Machine Pushbutton Panel MPP xxx Note If the SINUMERIK 840D sl is used without integrated PLC 319 PN or SIMATIC S7-317 as the adjacent controller, the system network requires an external local switch (e.g. SCALANCE).


333

PCU 321 15.1 Description

Standard Ethernet interfaces ● X130 The PCU 321 is connected to the factory network via this interface. The software ePS must be integrated via the factory network as is possible with an NCU 7xx. ● X127: The programming device can be connected for servicing via this interface.

USB interfaces For the connection of I/O devices such as ● Full CNC keyboard ● PC keyboard, standard ● USB FlashDrive the PCU 321 provides two USB interfaces (USB 2.0). Note If you are using commercially available USB devices, the interference immunity of the entire system can be reduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices.

334


PCU 321 15.2 Operator controls and indicators

15.2


Figure 15-3

View of a PCU 321 (closed)

(1)

Type plate

(2)

Front-panel door (hinged)

(3)

Mode selector

(4)

LEDs

Mode selector The mode selector switch (3) is used for service and testing. It is located below the LEDs and has three positions: ● RUN - top position (latching) – HMI is started ● STOP - center position – HMI does not start or – HMI is closed if it had been started ● MRES - bottom position (not latching) – LINUX configuration data are reset to the factory setting


335


LEDs 6 LEDs (4) for status and error display are located on the front (top left) of the PCU 321. They are arranged vertically. The meaning of the LEDs is summarized in the table. Identifier

1

RDY/SE

Color

Meaning

Green

Ready

yellow (flashing)

Access to CF card

Red

System fault

2

RUN

Green

Run

3

STOP

yellow

Stop

4

Reserved

5 6

Reserved PN

Green

Profinet: OK

Red

Profinet: Fault

Figure 15-4

336

View of a PCU 321 (open)

(1)

CF card slot

(2)

Rotary encoding switch

(3)

7-segment display

(4)

Grounding jumper

(5)

Reset button



CF card The firmware of the PCU 321 is located on a CompactFlash memory card and is booted from the card which is inserted in the CF card slot (1) for that purpose: Note The CF card is not included in the scope of supply. The order number is given in Section: "Accessories."

Rotary encoding switch The rotary switch (2) is gray-coded, has 16 positions, and is used for installation and startup. The IP address of the company network (X130) and the 7-segment display (3) are output with switch position "8".

7-segment display The BIOS-POST code of the test step in question is displayed on the 7-segment display (3) while the PCU is booting. When booting is complete the current operating status is output. The POST code of the most recently started test step is displayed when an error occurs.

Reset button Pressing the Reset button (5) triggers a hardware reset. The PCU reboots.


337

PCU 321 15.3 Interfaces

15.3

Interfaces

15.3.1

Overview ;

31

;

31

;

;

Figure 15-5

Connector

;

;

PCU 321 - interfaces

Interfaces

Description

PN1

Ethernet

Profinet connection for the adjacent PLC

PN2

Ethernet

Profinet connection for the next adjacent Profinet node

X120

Ethernet

System network connection for the TCU / MCP

X127

Ethernet

Connection for programming device

X130

Ethernet

Connection company network

USB

Double socket USB-A (5 V / 0.5 A)

X125/X135

338

;

X145

Standard V24 (RS232) interface

X150

24 V power supply



15.3.2

Description Signal type I

Input

O

Output

V

Voltage supply

-


Ethernet interfaces PN1 / PN2 / X120 / X127 / X130 Connector designation:

PN1 / PN2 / X120 / X127 / X130

Type:

RJ-45 jack

Cable type:

Industrial Ethernet cable

Cable length, max.:

100 m

Table 15-1

Assignment of connectors PN1 / PN 2 / X120 / X127 / X130

Pin

Name

Type

1

TXP_0

O

Ethernet Transmit P

Meaning

2

TXN_0

O

Ethernet Transmit N

3

XRP_0

I

Ethernet Receive P

4

N.C.

-

Unassigned

5

N.C.

-

Unassigned

6

RXN_0

I

Ethernet Receive N

7

N.C.

-

Unassigned

8

N.C.

-

Unassigned

USB interfaces X125 / X135 Connector designation:

X125/X135

Type:

Double socket USB-A

Current carrying capacity:

5 V / 0.5 A

Table 15-2

Assignment of connectors X125 / X135

Pin

Name

Type

A1

PWR_USB0

VO

5V voltage for USB0

A2

USB0_N

I/O

USB0-N

A3

USB0_P

I/O

USB0-P

A4

GND

-

B1

PWR_USB1

VO

5V voltage for USB1

B2

USB1_N

I/O

USB1-N

B3

USB1_P

I/O

USB1-P

B4

GND

-

Ground


Meaning

Chassis ground

339


RS-232 (V.24) interface X145 Connector designation:

X145

Type:

9-pin SUB-D connector

Table 15-3

Assignment of connector X145

Pin

Name

Type

1

N.C.

-

Unassigned

Meaning

2

RXD_RS232

I

Receive Data

3

TXD_RS232

O

Transmit Data

4

N.C.

-

Unassigned

5

GND

-

Ground

6

N.C.

-

Unassigned

7

N.C.

-

Unassigned

8

N.C.

-

Unassigned

9

N.C.

-

Unassigned

24V power supply X150 The 24 V DC power supply is connected at the screw-type terminal. DANGER The 24 VDC should be configured as functional extra-low voltage with safe isolation. Note The connection cable between the voltage source and the current supply connection L+ and the associated reference potential M must not exceed a maximum length of 10 m.

Table 15-4

Pin assignment of the screw-type terminal.

Terminal

Pin assignments Function ground/earth

M

Chassis ground

L+

24 V DC

M

Chassis ground

If you want to ground the reference potential, you must not remove the link between terminals M and functional ground on the PCU 321.

340



/ / / 1 3(

/RZYROWDJHGLVWULEXWLRQ HJ716V\VWHP[9

0RXQWLQJUDLO 36 SRZHU VXSSO\

3&8

/

*1' /

1

*1'

*1'

*URXQGLQJUDLO LQFDELQHW

Figure 15-6

Module supply options

Supply system lines Use flexible cables with a cross section of 0.25 to 2.5 mm2 (or AWG 18 to AWG 14) for wiring the power supply. If you only use one wire per connection, a ferrule is not required. You can use ferrules without an insulating collar in accordance with DIN 46228, Form A, long version. Wiring with the power connector Use the power connector to connect the power supply module with the PCU 321. The power supply module is included. WARNING You could come into contact with live wires if the power supply module and any additional load power supplies are switched on. Before connecting the module, first disconnect the equipment from the mains! 1. Open the front panels of the power supply module and the PCU 321. 2. Unscrew the strain relief clamp on the power supply module. 3. Strip the power supply cable (230 V/120 V) (stripped length of 12 mm) and connect it to the power supply. 4. Screw the strain relief clamp in place. 5. Insert the jumper and screw it tight. 6. Close the front panels. Operator Components and Networking Manual, 01/2008, 6FC5397-1AP10-2BA0

341


3RZHUVXSSO\

3&8

6WUDLQUHOLHI

-XPSHU

99 WR1P

Figure 15-7

Connect power supply module and PCU 321 with power connector

Other 24 V connections On the power supply via the power connector an additional 24 V connections are still free for connecting the supply of additional S7-300 modules.

342


PCU 321 15.4 Installation

15.4

Installation

15.4.1

Dimension drawing

Figure 15-8

15.4.2

Dimension drawing PCU 321

Preparation of the sectional rail for mounting

Figure 15-9

PCU 321 with sectional mounting rail

(1)

Mounting rail

(2)

PCU 321


343

PCU 321 15.4 Installation The PCU 321 is mounted on a sectional rail together with the power supply module and other components (see Section: "Description" → "System design). For this, you must prepare the sectional rail. 1.

Cut the mounting rail (2 m) to the required length.

2.

Mark out the 4 holes for the fixing screws. 2 m - mounting rail

"Standard" mounting rail

FD

D

Length of the mounting rail

3.

E

Dimension a

FD

Dimension b

160 mm

10 mm

140 mm

482.6 mm

8.3 mm

466 mm

530 mm

15 mm

500 mm

830 mm

15 mm

800 mm

_

If the mounting rail is longer than 830 mm, stabilize it by making more holes for additional fixing screws. Mark out these additional holes along the groove in the center of the rail at intervals of approx. 500 mm.

*URRYHIRUGULOOLQJ DGGLWLRQDOKROHVIRU IL[LQJVFUHZV

+ROHIRUWKHIL[LQJVFUHZ

'ULOOHGKROHIRUH[WUDIL[LQJ VFUHZ +ROHIRUSURWHFWLYH FRQGXFWRUWHUPLQDO

344

+ROHIRUWKHIL[LQJVFUHZ

4.

Mark out a hole for a protective conductor fixing screw (see Fig. under Item 3).

5.

Drill the holes to 6.5 +0.2 mm for screws size M6.


PCU 321 15.4 Installation 6.

Mount an M6 screw for fixing the ground conductor.

Fixing screws / washers The screw types listed in the table are provided for fixing the mounting rail. Outer fixing screws

Fillister head screw M6 to ISO 1207 / ISO 1580 (DIN 84 / DIN 85) Hexagon head screw M6 to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017)

Additional fixing screws

Fillister head screw M6 to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/DIN 85)

Washers

6.4 washers to ISO 7092 (DIN 433)

Note Select a screw length that corresponds to your system design.

15.4.3

Mounting the sectional rail on the surface 1. Fit the mounting rail in a position that will allow enough room for the modules to be installed and for the heat to dissipate (a minimum of 40 mm above and below the mounting rail). 2. Screw on the mounting rail (screw size: M6). Note If the surface is a grounded metal plate or a grounded device mounting plate make sure that there is a low-resistance connection between the DIN rail and the surface. Use suitable contacting media or contact washers in the case of painted or anodized metals. 3. Connect the mounting rail to the protective conductor (see "Assembly preparation" Item 6.) The cross-section of the lead to the protective conductor must be no less than 10 mm2.


345

PCU 321 15.4 Installation

Note Make always sure that a low-resistance connection is provided to the protective conductor. Use a flexible lead to the protective conductor if the subrack is mounted on a moving rack, for instance.

15.4.4

Mounting modules on the mounting rail NOTICE Mount the modules in this sequence - power supply - PCU 321 - PLC 317 / PLC 319 PN 1. Hinge the module into the top catch of the mounting rail. 2. Push the module right up to the left component (if available). 3. Tilt the module down into place. 4. Bolt all modules tight, applying a torque of between 0.8 and 1.1 Nm.

346


PCU 321 15.5 Commissioning

15.5

Commissioning

15.5.1

Operation with an S7-CPU (without NCU)

Application range MCP communication is understood to be the transfer of E/A images to the following components: ● two machine control panels ● one HHU ● two direct key units of an OP The machine control panel signals are communicated on SINUMERIK systems using the FB1 (MCP communication). On more complex systems, the FB9 is used to carry out the M:N switchover. The parameters are filed in DB7 and can be changed by the FB9. Since these blocks are not available in the SIMATIC environment, the FB9 Proxy assumes these tasks. The FB9 Proxy is executable both on a PCU 321 (Linux) together with an HMI sl and on a PCU 50.3 together with HMI Advanced or HMI sl.

Prerequisites It is a requirement that a DB19 is available on the installed S7-CPU in accordance with SINUMERIK specifications: ● PCU 321 with HMI program (e.g., HMI sl) ● PCU 50.3 with HMI program (e.g., HMI sl) ● PCU 50.3 with HMI-Advanced The FB9 Proxy only functions if the MCP Client (mcpdrv) is also running.

Creating DB19 for a PCU 321 The DB19 for the PLC project of the PCU 321 must be created by the user. If the DB19 is copied from an existing PLC project to a NCU, it may be that it is not saved during the series machine startup. The DB19 copied from the existing SINUMERIK project was generated by the basic program and a corresponding generic bit set. This bit is evaluated during a series machine startup and the block would NOT be saved, as it has been generated by the system. A new data block (DB19) is created via STEP 7 with the following structure: STRUCT: Array [-32768..-32371] type: BYTE Address Name 0.0

Type STRUCT

+0.0 DB_VAR

ARRAY(-32768 ... -32371)

+1.0

BYTE

=398.0


Start value

END_STRUCT

347

PCU 321 15.5 Commissioning A flag is not set for blocks created by the user, i.e. not created by the system, and the block is always saved during the series machine startup.

Operation with a PCU 321 In this case, the two utilities, FB9 Proxy and MCP Client, are started automatically by the system. Only the fb9_proxy.ini file needs to be modified. For this purpose, the fb9_proxy.ini file is copied to a user directory and the necessary entries are changed. Directories on the CF card: /siemens/sinumerik/fb9proxy

→

/user/sinumerik/fb9proxy

→

/oem/sinumerik/fb9proxy

Operation with a PCU 50.3 The two utilities, FB9 Proxy and MCP Client, are not started automatically by the system on the PCU 50.3 with HMI-Advanced. To start the two utilities, changes are made in the following files: If HMI sl is used: ● systemconfiguration.ini file: In the [processes] section, the MCP Client and the FB9 Proxy need to be entered after the CP entry. The section must include the following: ... [processes] PROC000= image:=cp_840di, process:=CP_840di, background:=true PROC001= image:=slsmhmihost, process:=SlHmiHost1, deferred:=true PROC002= image:=mcpdrv, process:=mcpdrv, background:=true PROC003= image:=fb9proxy, process:=fb9proxy, background:=true If HMI Advanced is used: ● REGIE.INI file: In the [StartupConfiguration] section, activate the following line: Startup36 = name := StartPrg, Timeout :=20000 ● STARTPRG.INI file: Enter the two utilities in the [StartProg] section. Disable the mcp_rout.exe call. The section must include the following: ... [StartProg] E:\Siemens\services\mcp_client\mcpdrv.exe E:\Siemens\services\fb9proxy\fb9proxy.exe

348



15.5.2

Configuring the 'fb9_proxy.ini' file

Configuring the fb9_proxy.ini file Example of configuration file when supplied: [PLC] ;# Set GET_IP_BY_HMI to '0', if you want a static connection to PLC ;# with specified ip address ;# otherwise FB9-Proxy tries to determine IP-Address and CPInterface ;# from mmc.ini of HMI ;GET_IP_BY_HMI = 1 ;# if GET_IP_BY_HMI is set to '1' the following key 'IP-ADDRESS' ;# has no effect ;# otherwise this key determines the static IP-Address of the PLC ;IP-ADDRESS = 192.168.214.241 ;# if GET_IP_BY_HMI is set to '1' the following key ' CP-INTERFACE ' ;# has no effect ;# otherwise this key determines the interface to the shared memory ;# of the CP software. ;# The key is useful to avoid collisions between FB9-Proxy and ;# the HMI. The CP software supports two shared memory interfaces. ;# Normally one interface is used by the HMI. ;# HMI Embedded and HMI sl use the interface with index 1. ;# So the FB9-Proxy uses by default the interface with index 2. ;# HMI Advanced uses the interface with index 2, so you have ;# to instruct the FB9-Proxy to use the interface with index 1. ;CP-INTERFACE = 2 ;# 2 bytes for PLC alarms ;ALARM = AB80 ;# address of 2 bytes for life sign of fb9proxy ;LIFESIGN = AB82 ;# cycle for transmission of life sign ;# (valid values between 200 and 2000 milliseconds) ;LIFECYCLE = 200 [MCP1] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB0 ;OUT = AB0 [MCP2] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB64 ;OUT = AB64


349

PCU 321 15.5 Commissioning [HHU] ;BUS-ADDRESS = ? ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB32 ;OUT = AB32 [DCK1] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 1 ;IN = EB16 ;OUT = AB16 [DCK2] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 1 ;IN = EB48 ;OUT = AB48

Connection to the PLC In the [PLC] section, the "IP-ADDRESS" key specifies the IP address of the S7-CPU. A connection is made to this PLC. This key is only evaluated if no IP address for the PLC is found by the HMI sl in the MMC.INI file. The IP address of the S7-CPU can be set via GET_IP_BY_HMI: The operator can define whether the IP address of the PLC is obtained from the HMI mmc.ini or whether a static IP address is defined. GET_IP_BY_HMI = 1 → IP address is obtained from the HMI mmc.ini. GET_IP_BY_HMI = 0 → Static IP address is defined via fb9_proxy.ini. The "LIFESIGN" key can be used to obtain a sign of life from the FB9 Proxy on the PLC. The "ALARM" key indicates the location in the PLC to which the two alarm bytes should be written. If this key does not exist, the alarm bytes are not transferred.

Triggering alarms In contrast to the original FB9, it is not possible for the FB9 Proxy to trigger PLC alarms. The user program on the SIMATIC CPU can decide whether or not alarms are triggered. When the cause of the alarm has been remedied and this is detected by the FB9 Proxy, the relevant bit is reset. If the alarms are acknowledged, the user program on the SIMATIC CPU can reset the bits itself. The alarms are entered in a byte array that can be transferred to the PLC. For this purpose, the variable "ALARM" must be specified in the [PLC] section in the INI file. In the case of transitional edges 0→1, the PLC user program can trigger the relevant alarms and, in the case of transitional edges 1→0, it can cancel the alarms again. The alarm bits are written to AB30 and AB31 by default.

350


PCU 321 15.5 Commissioning List of alarms that can be triggered by FB9 Proxy via MCP communication: Alarm number

Alarm text

Byte

Bit

400260 400261


0

0


0

1

400262

Failure of manual operating device

0

2

400274


0

3

400275


0

4

410900

m:n - call waiting discontinued

1

0

410901


1

1

410902


1

2

410903


1

3

410904


1

4

410905

m:n - HMI connection to assigned interface not available

1

5

410906

m:n - No sign of life on an HMI

1

6

References: Diagnostics Manual, PLC Alarms

Connection to additional components The contents of the [MCP1], [MCP2], [HHU], [DCK1] and [DCK2] sections are configured in exactly the same way and are used to configure the connections to the MCP/DCK devices: If the "BUS-ADDRESS" key exists, a static connection is set up for the relevant device, i.e., no dynamic request is required in the DB19 from an HMI. If, however, a dynamic request is made by an HMI, the static connection is stopped and the dynamic connection is made. The "PROFILE" key indicates whether the standard parameter set or the direct key parameter set should be used from the MCP_CLIENT.INI file. Default: PROFILE=0

for machine control panels and HHU

PROFILE=1

for direct keys

The "IN" key is used for addressing the inputs (key information) and indicates the address to which information should be written. The "OUT" key is used for addressing the outputs (LED information) and indicates the address from which information is read. The length of the inputs and outputs is determined directly by the device and, therefore, does not need to be indicated. However, it is important to ensure that the addressing range is adequately dimensioned, so as to ensure that information does not overlap. For example, if the address EB0 is configured for the MCP1 inputs and an HT 8 and an MCP483 are available for the M:N switchover, the direct key inputs can only be configured from EB16. The MCP483 inputs are 14 bytes long.


351


Note m:n configuration If there is an HMI application in the system that supplies the m:n interface in the DB19, the FB9 proxy dynamically establishes the connections with the names "MCP1" and "DCK1". In this case, these two connections cannot be configured statically. Therefore, use to the connections with the names "MCP2", "HHU" and "DCK2" instead. The names have been selected with reference to the FB9 and are not linked to any semantics. The connection with the name "HHU" can also be used for an MCP. For addresses for the memory areas in the PLC, expressions such as EBx, ABx, MBx and DBy.DBBx can be used. These are always byte addresses. Examples:

352

IN = EB0

→

Inputs are written to the PLC from EB0.

OUT = DB100.DBB20

→

Outputs are read from DB100 from byte 20.


PCU 321 15.6 Technical data

15.6


I per IEC 60536

Degree of protection to EN 60 529

IP 20


cULus


24 V DC (20.4 V … 28.8 V)

Max. current output

External USB each 0.5 A

Power consumption

max. 26.5 W

Main power outage buffering time

20 ms


Width: 200

Height: 125

Weight Mechanical ambient conditions

Depth: 130

Approx. 1.3 kg Operation


Vibration stressing

10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz:1g DIN IEC 60068-2-6

5 - 9 Hz: 7.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 2g DIN IEC 60068-2-6

Shock stressing

15g, 11 ms 3 shocks in each direction DIN IEC 60068-2-27

300 m/s2, 6 ms 3 shocks in each direction DIN IEC 60068-2-29

Noise

< 55 dB(A) according to DIN 45635-1

Climatic environmental conditions (to DIN EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5) Cooling

Open circuit ventilation


Not allowed

Air inlet

Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation / transportation (in transport packaging)

Applicable standards Temperature limits Limits for relative humidity

1)

Storage

DIN IEC 60068-2-1 / -2 / -14 0 ... 55 °C 1)

-40 ... 70 °C

5 … 80% at 25 °C

5 ... 95% at 25 °C

only horizontal installation is permissible.


353

PCU 321 15.7 Accessories

15.7

Accessories The following accessories can be ordered for the PCU 321.

Component CF card

Description CompactFlash card 512 MB (empty)

Numbe r

Order number

1

6FC 5313-4AG00-0AA2

The operating software for the PCU 321 is available separately. The order numbers are given in Catalog NC 61.

354


16

Thin Client Unit (TCU) 16.1

Description

16.1.1

Overview The Thin Client Unit (TCU) for distributed installation permits physical separation of SINUMERIK OP/TP operator panel fronts and SINUMERIC PCU/NCU as well as connection of up to four operator panel fronts each with a TCU to a PCU/NCU. For this reason, the user interface is copied to several OPs with one TCU each.

Validity This description applies to: Name

Order number:


6FC5312-0DA00-0AA1


6FC5312-0DA00-0AA1

Features ● Design of flat operator panels through shallow installation depth and low power dissipation. ● Graphics: Resolution 640 x 480 to 1024 x 768 pixels; 16-bit color resolution ● More stable mounting of the SINUMERIK PCU in the control cabinet. ● Efficient operator control of larger machines thanks to up to 5 operator panels ● Signal transmission between PCU/NCU and operator panel front via Industrial Ethernet (see section: "Accessories") ● Easy installation and service-friendly layout thanks to the component structure ● The same operating screen is shown synchronously on all OPs and can be used from all OPs. Operation on a Thin Client has the same authorization rights as operation on an operator panel front connected directly to the PCU. ● Mixed use of operator panel fronts on a TCU or with an integrated TCU and an operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible. ● The distance between PCU and operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance of two access points (100 m).


355

Thin Client Unit (TCU) 16.1 Description

Prerequisites ● SINUMERIK 810D / 840D / 840Di – SINUMERIK PCU 50 / PCU 70 with PCU base software WinXP 7.4 and later and PCU base software Thin Client, operator panel fronts – SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 – Operator panel fronts: OP 010 / OP 010C / OP 010S / OP 012 / OP 012T/ TP 012 / OP015 / OP 015A / TP 015A with TFT display ● SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl – NCU 710.1 / NCU 720.1 / NCU 730.1 – SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 – Operator panel fronts: OP 010 / OP 010C / OP 010S / OP 012 / OP 012T/ OP 015 / OP 015A / TP 015A with TFT display

Design The TCUs are coupled via Ethernet as Thin Clients in a dedicated subnetwork (via DHCP server on the PCU/NCU) to the PCU/NCU. Ports: ● 2 x USB 1.1 for connection of mouse and keyboard ● Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s

16.1.2

Configurations

Configurations

7&8

3&8

2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWVUHTXLUHG IODWIRU3&8)&$)$$PRXQWLQJLQFDELQHW %RRNIRU3&8)&$)$$PRXQWLQJLQFDELQHW IRU7&8)&$)$$

Figure 16-1

356

Distributed installation with TCU: minimum configuration with no central operator panel front on the PCU



7&8

3&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW

2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWVUHTXLUHG)&$)$$IRU3&8DQG7&8

Figure 16-2

Distributed installation with TCU: Configuration with central operator panel front on the PCU

7&8 ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW

2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW

7&8 ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 3&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW

,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW

2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW

6ZLWFK 7&8 ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW

2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW

7&8 ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWVUHTXLUHG IRU3&8DQG7&8)&$)$$ QRWIRU236

Figure 16-3

2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW

7&8QRWUHTXLUHGIRURSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWVZLWKLQWHJUDWHG7&8

Distributed installation with TCU: Configuration with five operator panel fronts on PCU


357


7&8 3&8

3&8 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW

2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWUHTXLUHG IRUPRXQWLQJLQWKHHOHFWULFDOFDELQHW )&$)$$RU )&$)$$ ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW

7&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW

,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW


1&8b 1&8b 1&8b

,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW

6ZLWFK

,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW


,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW


0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWUHTXLUHG IRUPRXQWLQJRQRSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 7&83&8)&$)$$ QRWIRU236

Figure 16-4

7&8QRWUHTXLUHGIRURSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWVZLWKLQWHJUDWHG7&8

Connection overview for TCU, several TCUs on NCU 710.1/NCU 720.1/NCU 730.1

Reference: /IAM/

Commissioning Manual (HMI) Installation and start-up TCU (IM5)

358


Thin Client Unit (TCU) 16.2 Interfaces

16.2

Interfaces

Overview Function

Designation Input/output

Type

• Ethernet interface

X202

O

8–pin RJ45 socket

• USB port

X203/204

O

2x USB-A

• Reserved

X205

• Power supply 24 V DC

X206

I


• I/O interface *)

X207

I/O

2 x 13-pin plug connector

• LVDS display interface *)

X208

O

2 x 10-pin plug connector

*) for connection to an operator panel front

9

9

3(

Figure 16-5

(1)

Front view of the TCU with interfaces (Ethernet cable inserted, one mounting bracket mounted)

X203 / X204

2 USB-A ports

(2)

Mounting bracket (1 of 2)

(3)

Hinged catch for latching into operator panel front (1 of 2)

(4)

X206

(5) (6)

Cable tie to secure the connector X205

(7) (8)

24 V DC power supply (detail) Reserved Ground terminal

X202


Ethernet port

359

Thin Client Unit (TCU) 16.2 Interfaces

Figure 16-6

Rear view of the TCU with interfaces

(1)

X208

Display cable K2

(2)

X207

I/O USB cable K1

Description X202

Ethernet port

8-pin standard Ethernet socket

X203/ X204

USB

One of the interfaces can be loaded with 500 mA (high current), the other, with 100 mA. Connector designation:

X203/X204; USB socket, 2 x 4-pin, type A

Max. cable length

Mouse, keyboard: 5 m if hub used: 3.5 m *)

*)Length including the supply cable to hub and connected terminal; only one hub is allowed. It should be noted that some keyboards already have a hub. X206

Power Supply

X207/ X208

Pin assignments

360

3-pin terminal block DC 24 V; for connection assignment, see detail in figure above X207

26-pin plug connector for the IO/USB cable K1 for connecting the operator panel front

X208

20-pin plug connector for the LVDS display cable K2 for connecting the operator panel front

Unless explicitly specified, you can take the pin assignment for the connections from section: "Connection conditions".


Thin Client Unit (TCU) 16.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front

16.3

Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front Before the two components are assembled, the two interface cables for the operator panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2, see Fig. A) must be inserted into the correct sockets on the TCU (visible behind the casing cut-out). For more detail, see section: “OP 012,” section: "Interfaces" / "Mounting."

OP 010S The operator panel front OP 010S and the TCU are screwed together without additional mounting brackets. (A)

7&8

236

236

)L[LQJVFUHZV[0 WRVHFXUH7&8 FDUULHUSODWHRQRSHUDWRU SDQHOIURQWRI

236

Figure 16-7

9 ; 9 3(

;

;

;

; ;

7&8

6XSSRUWLQJSODWH

Mounted TCU with OP 010S, front, side and rear view


361


OP 010, OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012, TP 015A Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required for mounting on an operator panel front of type OP 010, OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 or TP 015A (see Section: “Accessories”). 1. Screw the mounting bracket onto the TCU. The ends of the hitch-type catches (see Fig. B) must be facing left. 2. Use the two hitch catches to suspend the TCU mounting bracket unit (like a PCU) in the operator panel front. Swing closed after inserting cables K1 and K2 and use four knurled screws to secure. (B)

23

23

7&8

+LQJHFDWFKIRUKDQJLQJ LQRSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWRI

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW

3( 9 ; 9

23

;

.QXUOHGVFUHZIRU VHFXULQJPRXQWLQJ EUDFNHWRQRSHUDWRU SDQHOIURQWRI

7&8

;

; ; ;

Figure 16-8

362

0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW

Mounted TCU (example with with OP 012) in front, side and rear view



Cable connections Fig. (B) shows the outward-bound connections: ● the double USB port, ● the Ethernet port (cable inserted), ● the keyboard interface, ● and the power supply connection. Since some of the connections do not have a cable strain relief, it is recommended to secure the cables to the U-shaped lugs on the supporting plate using cable ties (see Fig., section: "Interfaces").


363

Thin Client Unit (TCU) 16.4 Technical data

16.4

Technical data Table 16-1

Thin Client Unit

Safety Protective class


Degree of protection per EN 60529 (IEC 60529)

IP00

Approvals

CE / cULus

Electrical data Power supply

24 V DC

Power consumption, max.

36 Watts


Width: 260

Height: 265


Depth: 40

1.7 kg Operation


Vibratory load

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing




Free convection, without fan



364



EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

0 ... 55 ºC (at rear)

-25 ... 55 ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

10 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C max. 0.1 % /min


Thin Client Unit (TCU) 16.5 Accessories

16.5

Accessories

Table 16-2

Thin Client Unit

Compon.

Description

Mounting bracket

Mounting bracket for PCU, video link receiver or TCU behind operator panel front Flat mounting bracket for PCU 50/70 with video link transmitter in control cabinet

Number

6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0 1 set (2 items)

Upright mounting bracket, book for PCU 50 with video link transmitter in control cabinet Industrial Ethernet cable

Industrial Ethernet switch

Order number

6FC5248–0AF20–0AA0 6FC5248–0AF20–1AA0

IE FC Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A)

4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter (max. 1000 m; min. 20 m);

1

6XV1840–2AH10

IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C)

4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug 180/90 for use in trailing cables; PROFINET-compatible; without UL approval; sold by the meter (max. 1000 m; min. 20 m);

1

6XV1840–3AH10

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180

RJ plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing and integrated cutting/clamping contacts; with 180° outgoing cable

1

6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0

SCALANCE X108 unmanaged

with 8 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s for configuring star topologies

1

6GK5108–0BA00-2AA3

SCALANCE X208 managed

with 8 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s for configuring linear, star and annular topologies

1

6GK5208–0BA00-2AA3

SCALANCE X208PRO managed

with 8 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s for configuring linear, star and annular topologies; degree of protection IP65 incl. 8 RJ45 and 3 M12 dust protection caps

1

6GK5208–0HA00-2AA6


365

Thin Client Unit (TCU) 16.5 Accessories

366


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.1

17

Description The SINUMERIK HT 2 (Handheld Terminal 2) has been designed for manual operation of machine tools and distinguishes itself as a result of its ruggedness and ease of handling. The low weight and the ergonomic design make this unit easy to use, even over longer periods of time. The HT 2 should be preferably used if it is necessary to be mobile while monitoring or controlling the machine tool (e.g. during setting-up procedures. In this case, the HT 2 can be connected at any location in the system via a terminal box Basic PN or a terminal box Plus PN. In conjunction with the terminal box Plus PN, the HT 2 can be simply withdrawn and inserted in operation without initiating an Emergency Stop. For mounting in the control cabinet, the HT 2 is connected with a connection module Basic PN. The HT 2 is suitable for both for righthanded and lefthanded personnel as it has two agreement buttons. The magnetic handwheel allows intuitive axis feed motion. All of the HT 2 keys can be freely configured and labeled. The HT 2 can be mounted using a retaining magnet or an appropriate bracket. Both the retaining magnet as well as the holder are available as accessory (refer to Section: "Accessories").

Validity The following description applies to the following components: Name

Features

HT 2

Agreement button, Emergency Stop button, override rotary switch

Order No.: 6FC5303-0AA00-2AA0

Function blocks In the unit: ● PCB with CPU, memory ● Ethernet Controller Device front: ● LC display (black / white) – Resolution: 168 x 72 pixels – LCD controller on board – 4 lines each with 16 characters can be displayed


367

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.1 Description ● 20-key membrane keyboard – 16 machine control keys – 4 keys (upper row of keys) can be assigned as softkey or system key ● Emergency Stop button, 2-channel ● Rotary override switch (19 positions) ● Magnetic handwheel Device rear side: ● Recess for the bracket or retaining magnet ● Cable duct for the HT 2 connecting cable to – terminal box PN (Basic / Plus) – PN Basic connection module Righthand side of the device ● Key-operated switch (3 positions, 2 keys) ● Agreement button (2-channel, 3-stage) Lefthand side of the device: ● Agreement button (2-channel, 3-stage)

368


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.2 Operator control and display elements

17.2

Operator control and display elements

17.2.1

Overview

Figure 17-1 (1)

Operator control and display elements of the HT 2

Emergency Stop button (stop button)

(2)

Rotary override switch

(3)

Display

(4)

Keyboard

(5)

Handwheel

(6)

Agreement button (left)

(7)

Agreement button (right)

(8)

Opening for the cable entry

(9)

Cable duct cover

(10)

Type plate

(11)

Standard position retaining magnet (optional: mounting bracket)

(12)

Standard position mounting bracket (optional: Retaining magnet)

(13)

Key-operated switch


369


17.2.2

Description

Display The Handheld Terminal HT 2 is equipped with an LCD display (black / white). The display has a resolution of 168 x 72 pixels. This means that for a normal font of 16 pixels high, 4 lines each with 16 characters can be displayed.

Keyboard On the HT 2 there are total of 20 keys each assigned 1 LED. Of which ● All 4 keys in the upper row of keys can be used both as softkey as well as system keys. ● The remaining 16 keys are reserved for the machine control. When supplied from the factory, the HT 2 has 5 horizontal slide-in labels. One of these slide-in labels is not printed. The remaining four slide-in labels have standard symbols for the machine control printed on them. The standard symbols used and their position on the slide-in labels are listed together with the corresponding symbol number in the table. Table 17-1 -

Standard symbols on the slide-in labels (specific).

-

(specific).

-

(specific).

-

(specific).

7001

7015

7048

7011

7025

7026

7112

7022

7013

7124

7027

7028

7020

7021

7111

7029

Symbols that you specify can be printed on all of the slide-in labels. Plain films are available for this purpose. Information on the Order No. for the plain strips and for printing as well as exchanging the slide-in labels is provided in the following section: "Accessories" → "Slide-in labels".

Rotary override switch The rotary override switch of the HT 2 has 19 positions. The evaluation scale (0 to max.) is specified by the machine's manufacture in the form of machine data.

370



Handwheel The HT 2 handwheel has magnetic bearings. A turning knob is integrated in the handwheel knob. This allows fast rotary motion to be executed using a finger (run-on < 1 revolution). Individual increments can be reliably moved at the machine – as the transition from one position to another can be clearly sensed. The handwheel operates with 100 pulses/revolution and has a detent torque of approx. 1.8 Ncm (+/- 0.3).

Emergency Stop button The red mushroom-shaped head of the Emergency Stop button is provided with a yellow ring. Directly under the mushroom-shaped head, there is also a black ring which identifies the position status of the Emergency Stop button. State Ring (black)

Visible

not visible

Emergency Stop button

Not pressed

Pressed

If an Emergency Stop is triggered, the button locks into place. If the button is locked in place, it can be unlocked by rotating it to the right. Emergency Stop button Press the red button in emergencies when ∎

people are at risk,

∎

there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged.

As a rule, when operating the Emergency Stop button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the Emergency Stop: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions! The signals are sent via the the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring.

Agreement button The HT 2 has two agreement buttons that are logically grouped. This allows the enabling function to be triggered by either the left or the right hand during normal operation. The agreement buttons comprise a 3-stage operator element and separate evaluation electronics. They have a 2-circuit configuration. The actuatior comprises 2 symmetrically arranged rockers whose position is determined using electrical sensors and which is transferred to the evaluation electronics. The agreement buttons can assume one of three different switch positions.


371

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.2 Operator control and display elements Switch position

Function

Agreement button

Switching contact

1

Zero position

Not actuated

Off (open)

2

Agreement

Actuated

On (closed)

3

Panic

Pressed

Off (open)

The switching sequences, shown in the diagrams are possible for the agreement buttons. Normal actuation Zero position → X → Agreement → Y → Zero position

[

(YDOXDWLRQ HOHFWURQLFV

&LUFXLW

=7[ $JUHHPHQW EXWWRQ

=7[

&LUFXLW

2))

21

&LUFXLW

2))

21

\

&LUFXLW

=7[

=7[

Figure 17-2

&LUFXLW

2))

21

&LUFXLW

2))

21

Switching distance diagram for normal actuation

Panic actuation Completely pressing the actuator to the panic position is evaluated by the fact that when released, the agreement position is skipped. Zero position → X → Agreement → U → Panic → Y → Zero position

[

=7[

=7[

(YDOXDWLRQ HOHFWURQLFV

&LUFXLW

2))

&LUFXLW

2))

&LUFXLW

$JUHHPHQW EXWWRQ

Figure 17-3

&LUFXLW

X 21 21

2)) 2))

Y

=7[ =7[

&LUFXLW

2))

2))

2))

&LUFXLW

2))

2))

2))

Switching distance diagram for panic actuation

The signals are sent via the the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring.

372



WARNING It is not permissible that the agreement button is fixed in the agreement position.

Key-operated switch The key-operated switch has three positions: I - 0 - II.

,

Figure 17-4

,,

Key-operated switch positions

The key can be removed in the switch position 0. Remove the key after use. This avoids possible damage to the key if the HMI device falls down. Note The key for the key-operated switch is provided with the HMI device. Its coding is not specific to the device. This means the key can be used on any Handheld Terminal HT 2.


373

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.3 I/Os

17.3

I/Os

17.3.1

Overview The Handheld Terminal HT 2 communicates with the SIMATIC- / SINUMERIK control unit via ● Terminal box Basic PN / terminal box Plus PN or ● Connection module Basic PN (for control cabinet installation) or ● MPP 483 HTC SINUMERIK control

SIMATIC control &RQWUROOHUV 1&8[

+7 +0, &RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH %DVLF31

(WKHUQHW3URILQHW IDFWRU\QHWZRUN

6DIHW\ VLJQDOV

Communication between HT 2 and NCU 7x0 via the connection module Basic PN *)

+7

&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH %DVLF31

(WKHUQHW3URILQHW IDFWRU\QHWZRUN

6DIHW\ 6LJQDOV

3&8

3&8

Communication between HT 2 and PCU 321 / PCU 50.3 via the connection module Basic PN *)

*) Instead of the connection module Basic PN, a terminal box Basic PN, terminal box Plus PN or an MPP 483 HTC can be connected.

Note The handwheel signals are only effective at a SINUMERIK control. The system keys (machine control panel functionality / override) are transferred both to a SINUMERIK-PLC as well as also to a SIMATIC in a DB interface. The safety signals for Emergency Stop and agreement are retrieved from the terminal box, the connection module or MPP 483 HTC via the connecting cable and connected to the safety relays in the control cabinet.

374



17.3.2

Terminal Box PN

17.3.2.1

Features

Figure 17-5

Terminal Box PN

(1)

LED displays

(2)

Screwed joint for power supply cable and shield

(3)

Screwed joint for cable with supplementary stop and agreement button signals and for PLC-accompanying signals

(4)

Connecting socket for the connector plug of the connecting cable (covered with dummy cap)

(5)

Screwed joint for process data line (Ethernet)

Note Protection class IP65 at the terminal box is ensured with plugged-in HT 2 or plugged-in dummy cap. The terminal box PN is available in two variants. ● Terminal box Basic PN ● Terminal box Plus PN Note The exterior of the terminal box PN variants differ only in the printing on the side.


375


Terminal box Plus PN The terminal box PN is not capable of acting as a hot-plug. This means that it is possible to connect and disconnect during operation without any disruption. The Emergency Stop circuit is automatically maintained during the switching of connectors. The Terminal box Plus PN is available under order no.6AV6671-5AE11-0AX0.

Terminal box Basic PN The terminal box Basic PN can be used if no hot plug-capability is required. The Emergency Stop circuit can be overridden here by external mechanisms. The Terminal box Basic PN is available under order no.6AV6671-5AE01-0AX0.

Clearance

The following clearances are required around the Terminal Box PN:

376



17.3.2.2

Terminal box Plus PN The Terminal Box Plus PN differs from a Terminal Box Basic PN due to four relays that are mounted on the board.

Figure 17-6

Terminal box Plus PN

(1)

Board

(2)

Relays

Switching statuses of the Emergency Stop circuit ● with HT 2 connectedwith Emergency Stop button and terminal box Plus PN HT 2


connected

Not pressed

connected

Pressed

not connected

-

Switch status, Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. The Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. Emergency stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed.

WARNING disconnect HT 2 If you disconnect the HT 2 from the terminal box Plus PN, the EMER STOP circuit is closed and the stop state of the system to be monitored is cleared. This occurs irrespective of whether the Emergency Stop button has been pressed on the HT 2.


377


17.3.2.3

Terminal box Basic PN In contrast to the Terminal Box Plus PN, the "Stop loop through" function is not implemented in the Terminal Box Basic PN. Relays are therefore not required.

Figure 17-7

Terminal box Basic PN

CAUTION The Emergency Stop circuit is controlled via the Emergency Stop button when the HT 2 is connected. If the connecting cable of the HT 2 is disconnected from the terminal box Basic PN, the Emergency Stop circuit is interrupted. This leads to a reliable machine stop or an Emergency Stop of the system to be monitored.

Switching statuses of the Emergency Stop circuit ● with HT 2 connectedwith Emergency Stop button and terminal box Basic PN HT 2

EMERGENCY STOP button

Switch status EMERGENCY STOP circuit

connected

Not pressed

connected

Pressed

The Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped.

-

The Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped.

not connected

Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed.

WARNING If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the Emergency Stop button or place the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the Emergency Stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out.

378



17.3.2.4

Interface assignments Information for interface assignment of the terminal box PN can be found under ● SIMATIC HMI/Operating unit Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible) ● www.siemens.de\simatic-doku

17.3.3

Connection module Basic PN

17.3.3.1

Features The connection module Basic PN was specially developed for installation in the control cabinet. The terminating connector protrudes through the panel of the control cabinet so that the HT 2 can be connected from the outside. The Connection module Basic PN is available under order no.6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0.

2SHUDWRU3DQHO +0, 6\VWHPQHWZRUN

0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO +7

(PHUJHQF\6WRSFLUFXLWV

&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH31 3

&RPELFDEOH 3

+7

3 &RQWURO 1&8[

6WDWXVVLJQDOV (PHUJ6WRS 3DQHOSUHVHQW

6DIHW\ &RPELQDWLRQ 7.

Figure 17-8

)DFWRU\QHWZRUN

Block diagram - control cabinet installation


379

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.3 I/Os The connection module Basic PN is not hot plug-capable. The Emergency Stop cables of the HT 2 are not monitored, but are directly connected to the Emergency Stop circuit. To override the Emergency Stop circuit when inserting or withdrawing the HT 2, a key or key-operated switch is used (see Section: "Connecting/disconnecting during operation"). The HT 2 can either be connected directly to the NCU or to the PCU 321 / PCU 50.3 as a Thin Client.

380



17.3.3.2

Dimension drawing

6 6

;

;

;

;

0 *URXQG

;

;

;

ท

ท

0

0

ท

ท

)L[LQJKROHV

O

QD

WLR

RS

0

(ORQJDWHGKROHVWREHXVHGLIPRGXOHVDUHWREHVFUHZPRXQWHGWRWKHLQVLGHRIWKHFDELQHW

Figure 17-9

Connection module Basic PN - dimension drawing for control cabinet installation


381


17.3.3.3

interfaces The HT 2 is connected to the connection module Basic PN via a round connector. The interfaces of the connection module are located on the rear side (see figure). 6 6 6 6

;

;

;

;

;

; ;

S1 / S2

DIP Fix switches (rotary coding switch)

(1)

Interfaces with attached connectors

Information on setting the bus addresses can be found in Chapter: "Networking".

Connector pin assignments Signal type: I

Input (Input)

O

Output (Output)

B

Bi-directional signals

P

Potential

X3: Power supply For the pin assignments of the power supply interface X3, refer to Section: "Connection conditions" →"Secondary electrical conditions" → "Pin assignments of the interfaces".

382



X7: Panel Present Connector designation:

X7

Connector type:

6-pole Phoenix terminal

Table 17-2

Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7

Pin

Signal name

Signal type

1

PRES

O

"High": Panel (HT 8) plugged in

2

XCTL

O

"Low": Emergency Stop button pressed 1)

3

XFAULT

O

"Low": Error in Emergency Stop electronics 1)

4

N.C.

-

Unassigned

5

N.C.

-

Unassigned

6

M (GND)

P

Ground

1) Function

Meaning

not implemented in Basic PN variant, output is not switched to "High"

X8: Emergency Stop wiring terminal Connector designation:

X8

Connector type:


Table 17-3

Assignment of the Emergency Stop wiring terminal X8

Pin

Protective circuit

1

On-board jumper between 1 and 2

2 3 4


Note Use this terminal for simple routing of the Emergency Stop cables, optional. The connector is only used to assist looping through. The connected pins 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 have no additional function on the connection module.


383

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.3 I/Os X20: Enabling buttons Connector designation:

X20

Connector type:


Table 17-4

Assignment of the interface enabling buttons X20

Pin

Signal name

Signal type

Significance

1

ZUST1P

I

Electronic agreement button 1 P

2

ZUST1M

O

Electronic agreement button 1 M

3

ZUST2P

I

Electronic agreement button 2 P

4

ZUST2M

O

Electronic agreement button 2 M

5

N.C.

-

Unassigned

6

N.C.

-

Unassigned

7

N.C.

-

Unassigned

8

N.C.

-

Unassigned

X21: Emergency Stop and key-operated switch Connector designation:

X21

Connector type:


Table 17-5

384

Assignment of the interface Emergency Stop and key-operated switch X21

Pin

Signal name

1

STOP23

2

STOP24

3

STOP13

4

STOP14

5

M

P

6

N.C.

-

7

IN_E9

8

P24_FILT

9

IN_E9_EXT

10

IN_E12_EXT

Signal type

Significance Emergency Stop circuit

B

Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit

P O

Ground P24 switched by key-operated switches Filtered 24V module power supply "High": Key-operated switch actuated "High": Terminating connector plugged in



17.3.3.4

Installing the terminating connector

Proceed as follows

(1) Retaining nuts

1. Unscrew the retaining nuts.

2. Attach the bracket for the terminating connector.


385


3. Tighten the retaining nut and insert the terminating connector into the bracket.

Note If you never remove the HT 2 from the connection module, it is not necessary to attach the terminating connector.

17.3.4

Connection examples for the agreement button The connection examples for the agreement button for safety category 3 according to EN 954-1 according to EN 954-1 are shown in the following diagrams. NOTICE In order to guarantee safety category 3 in accordance with EN 954-1, please also consider the operating instructions of the monitoring device used.

386



Agreement button with monitoring device PILZ PST1 The diagram shows the connection of a monitoring device PILZ PST1 to the agreement button of the HT 2. +7 DJUHHPHQWEXWWRQ VWDJHDQGFLUFXLW =7/

=75

=7/

=75

=7/

=75

'&'& &RQYHUWHU

9

*1'

(YDOXDWLRQHOHFWURQLFV &LUFXLW &LUFXLW

('

('

('

('

+7FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH

9

&RQWUROFDELQHWIRU FRQQHFWLRQWRWKHFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH%DVLF31

*1'

('

('

('

('

2'8SOXJFRQQHFWRURIWKH+7FDEOH 2'8VRFNHWFRQQHFWRU 7HUPLQDOER[%DVLF31WHUPLQDOER[3OXV31 RUFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH%DVLF31 3OXJFRQQHFWRU

&RQWUROFDELQHWIRUFRQQHFWLRQWR WKHWHUPLQDOER[%DVLF31RU WHUPLQDOER[3OXV31

; 9

*1'

9'& *1' ) $

) $W RU $I )HHGEDFNFLUFXLW .$

$

;

) $W RU $I

) $

.%

;

6

('

('

('

; ('

7HUPLQDOVRFNHWFRQQHFWRU

5HFRPPHQ &RQQHFWLRQ 7HUPLQDOER[%DVLF31 GHGFLUFXLW PRGXOH%DVLF31 7HUPLQDOER[3OXV31 ; (' (' (' ('

; =8673 =8670 =8673 =8670

7HUPLQDOVWULS (1$%/( (1$%/( (1$%/( (1$%/(

; *1' 9

; 0 3

7HUPLQDOVWULS 0 3

6 /

/

/

. 3,/= 367

.$

(QDEOHVWKH KD]DUGRXV PRWLRQ

. .% $

6

6 0

.$ *1'

.% *1'

*1'

1RWH$OOFRQWDFWVIURP.$DQG.%PXVWEHSRVLWLYHO\GULYHQ

Figure 17-10 Agreement button with monitoring device PILZ PST1


387


Agreement button with monitoring device ELAN SRB-NA-R-C.27/S1 The diagram shows the connection of a monitoring device ELAN SRB-NA-R-C.27/S1 to the agreement button of the HT 2. +7 DJUHHPHQWEXWWRQ VWDJHDQGFLUFXLW =7/

=75

=75

=7/

=7/

=75

9

=7[\DJUHHPHQW EXWWRQ[\

(YDOXDWLRQHOHFWURQLFV &LUFXLW &LUFXLW

'&'& FRQYHUWHU *1'

('

('

('

('

+7FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH

9

*1'

('

('

('

('

2'8SOXJFRQQHFWRURIWKH+7FDEOH

&RQWUROFDELQHWIRUFRQQHFWLRQ WRWKHFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH%DVLF31

2'8VRFNHWFRQQHFWRU 7HUPLQDOER[%DVLF31WHUPLQDOER[3OXV31 RUFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH%DVLF31 3OXJFRQQHFWRU ; 9

*1'

('

('

; ('

('

&RQWUROFDELQHWIRUFRQQHFWLRQ WRWKHWHUPLQDOER[%DVLF31 RU7HUPLQDOER[3OXV31

7HUPLQDOVRFNHWFRQQHFWRU

9'&

/ *1'

.$ & &

6

5HFRPPHQ &RQQHFWLRQ GHGFLUFXLW PRGXOH%DVLF31

.% 6 6

6

6

7HUPLQDOER[%DVLF31 7HUPLQDOER[3OXV31

; (' (' (' ('

; =8673 =8670 =8673 =8670

7HUPLQDOVWULS (1$%/( (1$%/( (1$%/( (1$%/(

; *1' 9

; 0 3

7HUPLQDOVWULS 0 3

) )

6 6

6 . . .

'

5HDURIWKHPRGXOH

/ /

. .

. .

.

(/$1 65%1$5&6

&URVVFLUFXLW IDXOWGHWHFWLRQ 6

.

.

.

.

'

.

/

.$

*1'

/

/

.$

(QDEOHVWKH KD]DUGRXV PRWLRQ

.%

/

.%

0 1

5HPDUNV

$OOFRQWDFWVIURP.$DQG.%PXVWEHSRVLWLYHO\GULYHQ 6DQG6DWWKHUHDURIWKHPRGXOHPXVWEHDWSRVLWLRQ

Figure 17-11 Agreement button with monitoring device ELAN SRB-NA-R-C.27/S1

S1 and S4 switches on the rear of the module must be in position '0'.

388



17.3.5

Connecting cable The connecting cable is an industrial cable and, thus, resistant to many solvents and lubricants. The flexural strength is geared to the actual usage conditions. The connecting cable is available in different lengths. You will find information in Section: "Accessories."

Figure 17-12 Connecting cable of the HT 2

(1)

Metallic push-pull circular connector (ODU connector)

(2)

Strain relief and kink protection for connecting cable

(3)

Connector for agreement button, Emergency Stop, 24V and safety signals

(4)

RJ45 connector (Ethernet connection)

The connecting cable is connected to the HT 2 via the RJ 45 connector (3) and the connector (4). The ODU connector (1) serves to connect the connecting cable to the terminal box PN or the connection module PN (control cabinet installation). The tightening torque for the nut of the ODU socket is 6.5 Nm. The HT 2 has one cable entry on its rear side for connecting the cable. It is located under the cover (see Section: "Control and display elements" → "Overview").


389


Laying the connecting cable CAUTION Only open the connection slot when the power supply voltage is switched-out. Otherwise, components could be destroyed or non-defined signal states can occur. When the connection slot is open, the Handheld Terminal HT 2 is sensitive with respect to electrostatic discharge.

1. Please the device down on a soft, horizontal surface so that the operator control components are not mechanically damaged. Open the cable duct cover (2) by unscrewing the six PT screws (4 x 20 mm) approximately 1 cm (1). Use a size 2 Phillips screwdriver Ensure that you do not exceed the tightening torque of max. 0.4 - 0.5 Nm.

Cable duct cover open (1)

Cable entry

390


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.3 I/Os 2. Insert the connecting cable into the cable entry. Gently press the cable downwards until it is completely retained by the retaining elements (1).

Ensure that the cable doesn't sag away from the mounting surface, but is located flush to the mounting surface. Otherwise, the device could be pulled down to the floor and damaged. In order to avoid damaging the cable sheath, do not route it over sharp edges.

3. Connect the RJ-45 connector(1) to the Ethernet socket.

Press the plug connector (2) firmly into the power supply socket.

NOTICE When plugging in the connector plug, ensure that all cables are lying straight in the cable guide. Otherwise, crushed wires can negatively impact the functionality. Check that all of the conductors are aligned so that they are straight and ensure that the connector is firmly seated before you re-attach the cable duct cover. If the cable gland is incorrectly installed, then this could mean that the device is not properly sealed.

4. Put the cable duct cover on and secure it by tightening the six screws.


391


NOTICE The housing of the HT 2 is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. Therefore, do not exceed 0.4 to 0.5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws (also for protecting the connecting cable). If you use a power screwdriver, ensure the max. speed of 600 rpm is adhered to (torque: 1 Nm). The screws of the cable duct cover may only be loosened or tightened a maximum of 20 times. Otherwise, there is the danger that the threads might become damaged and the seal of the housing will be compromised which could lead to failure of the device.

17.3.6

MPP 483 HTC The MPP 483 HTC variant of the machine control panel MPP 483 has an integrated connection module thereby providing a connection option for the HT 2.

Emergency Stop override For the MPP 483 HTC, the Emergency Stop circuit is overridden by a key-operated switch. The actuation of the key-operated switch is sent to the PLC, which generates a message after a certain period of time if the key-operated switch was held for too long or remains actuated due to a defect.

17.3.7

Power Supply The HT 2 is supplied with power via the connecting cable of the terminal box PN or of the connection module PN. The input voltage range is designed for +24 V DC.

392


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.4 Unplugging/plugging during operation

17.4

Unplugging/plugging during operation Trouble-free disconnection and connection of the HT 2 during machine operation requires the following: ● Release or override the HT 2 Emergency Stop ● Inserting the terminating connector after withdrawing the HT 2

DANGER Emergency Stop switches that are inactive • not recognizable or • not accessible This is to prevent the Emergency Stop switch from being used inadvertently.


393


(PHUJ6WRSFLUFXLWV\VWHP(PHUJ6WRS

.H\RSHUDWHGVZLWFK ZLWKSRVLWLYHDFWLRQFRQWDFWV

.H\RSHUDWHGVZLWFK 21 (PHUJ6WRSRYHUULGHSDVVLYH +7SOXJJHGLQ

;

6LJQDOWR3/&

(OHFWU VZLWFK

&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH )&$$$$

0 ;

9

;

)LOWHU &XUUHQWOLPLWDWLRQ

6KLHOG 0 9

0

+7

(PHUJ6WRS EXWWRQ

.H\RSHUDWHGVZLWFKFRQVLVWLQJRI ವFRQWDFWEORFNV6%$DQG ವDFWXDWRU6%RU6% DSSURSULDWHVDIHW\ORFNDVUHTXLUHG &DWDORJ6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHVDQGV\VWHPV16. DW$ '&'

WULJJHUVDWLPHU ,IDIWHUWKHPRQLWRULQJSHULRG DSSUR[PLQ WKHVLJQDOOHYHOLVVWLOO/RZ (0(5*(1&

Exiting the main menu

Left (outside)

Scrolling upwards

Left (center)

Scrolling downwards

Right (center)

< OK >

Activating the selected menu item

Right (outside)


397

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.5 Commissioning

Submenu: Display Submenu

Menu item

Significance

Display

Brightness

Setting the display brightness

Contrast

Setting the display contrast

Submenu: Diagnostics Submenu

Menu item

Significance

Notes

Diagnostics

LEDs

The LEDs are switched-in one after the other in the form of a running light.

With this test, ensure that all of the LEDs light up and no LED remains permanently lit up.

Keyboard

Visualizing the pressed keys. Multiple keys can be simultaneously pressed. In addition, the LEDs of all pressed keys are lit.

The upper left key exits this test.

Enabling switch

Displays the state of the two agreement button circuits. - "Off" - "Enabled" - "Panic"

This test only checks the functionality of the agreement button. This test does not include any of the other safety-relevant components (e.g. correct connection of the agreement function at the machine)! If the state of a circuit is not correctly displayed, then the device must be immediately disabled.

Override switch

Displays the position of the override rotary switch (value 0 to 18).

Key switch

Displays the key-operated switch position. - "Off" - "On (1)" - "On (2)

Handwheel

Displays the actual counter state of the handwheel.

398

Each time that this menu item is called, the counter state is reset to zero.



Submenu: Info Submenu

Menu item

Sub point

Significance

Info

Hardware

Memory

Displays the size of the main memory in MB

Software

Counters

17.5.1.3

Flash

Displays the size of the flash module in MB

Supply

Displays the power supply voltage in volt

Temperature

Displays the internal housing temperature in °C

BIOS

Displays the version number of the BIOS

Boot loader

Displays the version number of the boot loader

Coprocessor

Displays the version number of the coprocessor firmware

Hours counter

Operating hours counter (units: hours)

Power on

Power-on counter

Error handling

Faults #

Problem

Cause

Solution

1

No display - all LEDs off

The power supply is interrupted.

Check the power supply connection. If the fault remains, then the device is defective.

2

No display - LEDs briefly flash once

The display contrast is incorrectly set.

1.

When powering-up, keep the lefthand (first) softkey pressed.

2.

Press once, one after the other - the righthand (fourth) softkey - the third softkey - the righthand (fourth) softkey

3.

Using the second and third softkeys, change the contrast until it is easy to read the display.

3

No display - all LEDs flash permanently

The display is defective.

4

Displays the message: "Testcommandhandler"

The "Testcommandhandler" was activated.


Re-boot the HT 2.

399


Error messages #

Display

Description

Cause

1

SDRAM data line test failed!

An error has occurred while testing the SDRAM data lines.

The hardware is defective.

2

SDRAM data line test failed!

An error has occurred while testing the SDRAM address lines.


3

SDRAM access test failed!

An error has occurred when accessing the SDRAM.


4

SDRAM fill test failed!

An error has occurred when writing a test pattern to the SDRAM.


5

Unexpected SDRAM size!

The size of the SDRAM The hardware is defective. determined, does not correspond to the expected size.

6

Wrong coprocessor version, update required!

The firmware of the ATmega88 is The BIOS was updated Update the ATmega88 too old. however not the ATmega88 firmware. firmware.

7

Coprocessor communication error!

An error has occurred for the cyclic SPI communication with the ATmega88.

8

BIOS code corrupted!

The BIOS checksum is invalid.

The BIOS has been corrupted due to an unsuccessful update or a defective flash module.

9

Hardware info block invalid!

The hardware information block is invalid.

The block was corrupted when updating or the flash module is defective.

10 Serial number not set!

The serial number is missing.

It is possible that the serial number was deleted while updating.

11 MAC ID not set!

There is no MAC ID.

The MAC ID may have been deleted while updating.

12 No bootloader present!

There is no bootloader.

13 Bootloader code corrupted!

The bootloader checksum is invalid.

14 Pressed keys detected!

One or several keys are pressed. The hardware is defective if no keys have been pressed.

15 Display error!

Reading back the display status was unsuccessful.

400

Solution

The bootloader has been damaged due to an unsuccessful update or a defective flash module.




17.5.2

Interface signals

PLC module The FC13 "HHUDisp" supports the handling of the LC display. For a detailed description, please refer to: Literature: /FB/, P3, "Basic PLC program". Note The customer is responsible for programming the transfer of key signals to the interface in a PLC user program.

User interface Layout of keys and LEDs

; < =

7+ $;,6

Figure 17-16 Operator keys, standard assignment

The first row of keys is not assigned as standard.


401


Input image HT 2 You can tap the signals for the keys, feed rate override switch, key-operated switch and acknowledgment of the digital display at the input area. The address range is set by parameter assignment with STEP7 tools. Byte no.

Input signals to PLC

Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

EB m+0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

EB m+1

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

EB m+2

Feed start

Free key

AUTOMATIC

NC stop

Spindle stop

Feed stop

Free key

JOG

EB m+3

Free key

Handwheel

4. Axis

Z

NC start

Spindle start

EB m+4

Direction key -

Rapid traverse override

Direction key +

Free key

EB m+5

Acknowledg ement digital display

Key switch

E

Y

X

Rapid traverse/feed rate override switch D

C

B

A

Rotary switch positions HT 2

402

Position

%

EDCBA

0

0

00001

1

1

00011

2

2

00010

3

4

00110

4

6

00111

5

8

00101

6

10

00100

7

20

01100

8

30

01101

9

40

01111

10

50

01110

11

60

01010

12

70

01011

13

75

01001

14

80

01000

15

85

11000

16

90

11001

17

95

11011

18

100

11010



Output image HT 2 The signals for controlling the LEDs, HHU mode, display signals and digital display are present at the output area. Byte no.

Output signals to the HHU

Byte

Bit 7

AB m+0

always 1

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

AB m+1

New data for selected line

AB m+2

Feed start

Rapid traverse override

AUTOMATIC

NC stop

Spindle stop

AB m+3

Direction key -

Handwheel

4. Axis

Z

Y

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Selection lines 3, 4

Selection lines 1, 2

Feed stop

Direction key +

JOG

X

NC Start

Spindle start

Bit 1

Bit 0

Lx = 1 → LED lights up Note Output byte AB m + 0, bit 7 must always have the value '1'! This sets the display's output mode.

Output image of digital display Control of the digital display in the HT 2 Byte no. Byte

Output signals to the HHU Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

AB m+4

Default setting of 1st character (right) of selected line

AB m+5

Default setting of 2nd character of selected line

AB m+6

Default setting of 3rd character of selected line

AB m+7

Default setting of 4th character of selected line

AB m+8


AB m+9


AB m + 10


AB m + 11



403

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.5 Commissioning Byte no.

Output signals to the HHU

AB m + 12


AB m + 13


AB m + 14


AB m + 15


AB m + 16


AB m + 17


AB m + 18


AB m + 19

Default setting of 16th character (left) of selected line

Display The digital display is used as a 4-line alphanumeric display with 16 digits per line. The display data is coded according to the character set given in the ASCII code table for the digital display via the ABm + 4...19 bytes. The decimal point is a separate character. The display always starts line by line right-justified with the byte ABm + 4 and is built up towards the left up to ABm + 19.

Selecting the line ABm + 1, bit 0 and bit 1 This bit is used to select the line to be written. Table 17-6

Line selection Bit 0

Bit 1

Selected line

0

0

1st line

1

0

2nd line

0

1

3rd line

1

1

4th line

New data for selected line ABm + 1, bit 7 This bit is used to request writing in of new data into a line. The bit is set by the user program and can be reset on detection of the acknowledgment bit EBm + 5, bit 7. Bit 7 = 0: Reset request. Bit 7 = 1: Set request

404



Acknowledgement digital display EBm + 5, bit 7 This bit is set by the system after the new data has been accepted. Bit 7 = 0: No new data Bit 7 = 1: New data has been accepted

Example of signal chart Example of a signal chart when writing data for two lines 1 and 2 1. Selecting the line with ABm + 1, bit 0 and bit 1. 2. Writing new data with ABm + 4...19. 3. Set request: New data for selected line ABm + 1, bit 7 4. Acknowledgment digital display EBm + 5, bit 7, via system. 5. Reset request Note The request must be reset before a new line is written!

6HOHFWLQJWKHOLQH

/LQH /LQH

:ULWLQJQHZGDWD

'DWDIRU /LQH

'DWDIRU /LQH

5HTXHVWQHZGDWD

E

E

D

D F

F G

G

$FNQRZOHGJHPHQWGLJLWDOGLVSOD\ D3/&VHWVVLJQDODQGZDLWVIRUDFNQRZOHGJHPHQW E6\VWHPVHWVDFNQRZOHGJHPHQW F8VHUUHVHWVUHTXHVW G6\VWHPUHVHWVDFNQRZOHGJHPHQW

Figure 17-17 HT2 signal characteristic example for writing data into the HT 2 display

Proceed in the same way for the selection of line 3 and line 4


405


ASCII code for digital display Representation of characters on specifying the corresponding bit pattern or hexadecimal format in the bytes ABm + 4...19. The characters from Hex 20 to Hex 7F are default values. 0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1010

1011

1100

1101

1110

1111

²← Bit 7... 4

20H

30H

40H

50H

60H

70H

A0H

B0H

C0H

D0H

E0H

F0H

Bit 3 0 ↓ 0000

21H

31H

41H

51H

61H

71H

A1H

B1H

C1H

D1H

E1H

F1H

22H

32H

42H

52H

62H

72H

A2H

B2H

C2H

D2H

E2H

F2H

23H

33H

43H

53H

63H

73H

A3H

B3H

C3H

D3H

E3H

F3H

24H

34H

44H

54H

64H

74H

A4H

B4H

C4H

D4H

E4H

F4H

25H

35H

45H

55H

65H

75H

A5H

B5H

C5H

D5H

E5H

F5H

26H

36H

46H

56H

66H

76H

A6H

B6H

C6H

D6H

E6H

F6H

27H

37H

47H

57H

67H

77H

A7H

B7H

C7H

D7H

E7H

F7H

28H

38H

48H

58H

68H

78H

A8H

B8H

C8H

D8H

E8H

F8H

29H

39H

49H

59H

69H

79H

A9H

B9H

C9H

D9H

E9H

F9H

2AH

3AH

4AH

5AH

6AH

7AH

AAH

BAH

CAH

DAH

EAH

FAH

2BH

3BH

4BH

5BH

6BH

7BH

ABH

BBH

CBH

DBH

EBH

FBH

406

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.5 Commissioning 2CH

3CH

4CH

5CH

6CH

7CH

ACH

BCH

CCH

DCH

ECH

FCH

2Dh

3DH

4DH

5DH

6DH

7DH

ADH

BDH

CDH

DDH

EDH

FDH

2EH

3EH

4EH

5EH

6EH

7EH

AEH

BEH

CEH

DEH

EEH

FEH

2FH

3FH

4FH

5FH

6FH

7FH

AFH

BFH

CFH

DFH

EFH

FFH


1100

1101

1110

1111

407

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.6 Dimension drawing

17.6

Dimension drawing

º

º

Figure 17-18 HT 2 - dimension drawing

408

(1)


(2)


(3)

Position for the type plate


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.7 Maintenance and Service

17.7

Maintenance and Service

Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing, display and operator control elements of the HT 2.

Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the HT 2, regularly check the device ● that all the housing screws are in place and tight ● for damage to the housing ● for damage to the cable cover or cable entry

Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the HT 2 against ● direct solar radiation and heat sources ● mechanical vibration and shock ● dust ● moisture, and ● strong magnetic fields

Checking the Emergency Stop button Check the Emergency Stop button at least once every six months to ensure that it is functioning correctly by pressing it and observing whether the machine shuts down. NOTICE Immediately check the functioning of the Emergency Stop button if the device was subject to significant shock (e.g. because it was dropped).


409

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.8 Technical data

17.8

Technical data

17.8.1


Handheld Terminal HT 2 Safety Protection class

III to EN 61131-2 / EN 50178

Degree of protection to EN 60529

IP65

Certifications

CE / cULus

Electrical data Input voltage Current carrying capacity

24 V DC (via HT 2 cable, via cable terminal box) Agreement button:

10 - 500 mA / 2-channel, 3-stage


10 - 1000 mA / 2-channel

Power consumption, max.

Approx. 2.5 W


Height (without operator control elements) 76.2

Weight

Width

Depth

100

255

0.69 kg

Fall height, max.

1.20 m


Operation


Vibratory load

10 – 58 Hz: 0.15 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 2g 3M6 according to EN 60068-2-6

5 – 9 Hz: 6,2 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 2g 2M3 according to EN 60068-2-6

Shock load

25g, 6ms, 18 shocks





Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Rate of temperature change Limits for relative humidity

410



EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

0 ... 50 ºC

-25 ... 60 ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 65% at +25°C

5 ... 95% at 25 °C


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.8 Technical data Permissible change in the relative air humidity

max. 0.1 % / min

Display Resolution

168 x 72 pixels

Emergency Stop button Rated voltage

24 V DC

Current magnitude, max.

1A

Current magnitude, min.

10 mA

Switching capacity

DC 13 to EN 60947-5-1

Conditional rated short-circuited current

1000 A, 6A gL/gG to EN 60947-5-1

Output type

Solid-state output

Rated voltage that can be switched

24 V DC (voltage tolerance 19.2 V DC up to 30 V DC to EN 61131-2)

Rated current that can be switched

500 mA (max.)

Agreement button

Switch-off current (max.) Circuit1

1.5 mA

Circuit2

0.8 mA

Inductive load ( max.) Circuit1 / circuit2

145 mJ / 1.16 H @ 24 V DC, 500 mA (comparable, DC 13 to EN 60947-5-1)

Reverse polarity protection Circuit1 / circuit2

Yes

Short-circuit and overload protection Circuit1

Yes (integrated in the output FET)

Circuit2

Yes (using a protective circuit)

Handwheel The handwheel of HT 2 is operated in the system as 3rd handwheel General machine data: MD 11350 $MN_HANDWHEEL_SEGMENT[0] = 7 MD 11351 $MN_HANDWHEEL_MODULE[0] = 1 MD 11352 $MN_HANDWHEEL_INPUT[0] = 5


411


17.8.2

Connection module Basic PN Safety Safety class

III according to IEC 60536

Degree of protection according to EN 60529

IP54


CE / cULus


Max. power consumption

24 VDC (via X3 connector) Enabling button contacts (X20 connector)

Max. 0.5 A each / 2-channel

Emergency stop button contacts (X21 connector)


Connection module without external loading 0.3 A Panel (HT 2)

0.12 A

5 status signals (X7 and X21)

2.5 A (0.5 A each)

Total:

2.92 A

Max. total power consumption

Approx. 70 W


Height (without holder for terminating connector) 66

Weight

0.75 kg

Fall height, max.

1.20 m


Width

Length

165

166


Operation

Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 500 Hz: 10 m/s2 3M3 according to EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing

150 m/s2, 11 ms 18 shocks according to EN 60068-2-27







412

EN 60721-3-3

Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

0 ... 55º C

-40 ... 70º C

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 20 K/h

5 ... 90%

5 ... 95% max. 0.1 % / min


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.9 Spare parts

17.9

Spare parts The following spare parts are available for the HT 2:

Designation Service pack Terminal box Terminator

Remark

Number

Dummy plugs for cable compartment

1

Cable glands for terminal box

2

1 set of screws for terminal box cover

1

Terminal strips for terminal box

2

for HT 2 connection

1


Order No.

6XV6574-1AA04-4AA0 A5E004444884

413

Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.10 Accessories

17.10

Accessories

17.10.1

Overview The following accessories are available for the HT 2:

Designation

Remark

Number

Order No.


without automatic Emergency Stop override for mounting in the system

1

6AV6671-5AE01-0AX0


with automatic Emergency Stop override for mounting in the system

1

6AV6671-5AE11-0AX0


without automatic Emergency Stop override for mounting in the system

Connecting cable

Length: 2 m

1

6XV1440-4BH20

Length: 5 m

1

6XV1440-4BH50

Length: 8 m

1

6XV1440-4BH80

Length: 10 m

1

6XV1440-4BN10

Length: 15 m

1

6XV1440-4BN15

Length: 20 m

1

6XV1440-4BN20

Length: 25 m

1

6XV1440-4BN25

Spiral connecting cable

Length: 1.5 m, can be expanded to 3.5 m

Set of keys

Set of 5

Retaining magnet for HT 2 Holder for HT 2

for safekeeping, also suitable for stationary operation

Slide-in label

Can be labeled (3 films, DIN A4)

414

6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0

1

6FC5348-0AA08-3AA0

1 set

6AV6574-1AG04-4AA0

1

6FC5348-0AA08-0AA0

1

6FC5348-0AA08-1AA0

1 set

6FC5348-0AA08-2AA0



17.10.2

Mount The HT 2 can be retained using the mounting rack.

Figure 17-19 HT 2 mounting bracket

The mounting bracket is mounted the same way as the retaining magnets. A description about this can be found in the section: "Retaining magnet". Note Please ensure that the HT can be ergonomically mounted. Therefore, choose a suitable mounting height.

Dimension drawing

º

$

$

º

0

$$

Figure 17-20 Dimension drawing of the HT 2 mounting bracket


415


17.10.3

Retaining magnet The HT 2 can be mounted onto all sheet metal parts using the retaining magnets.

Figure 17-21 HT 2 retaining magnet

NOTICE The retaining magnet is not intended for permanently securing the HT 2 to the vertical sheet metal parts.

Mounting the retaining magnets 1.

Open the cable duct cover by unscrewing the 6 PT screws approximately 1 cm. To do this, use a slotted size 2 screw driver.

416

(1)


(2)


(3)

PT screws (4 x 20 mm)

(4)

Cable duct cover



2.

Locate the retaining magnets under the cable duct cover and retain them from the rear using the screw. To do this, use a slotted size 4 screwdriver.

3.

Re-attach the cable duct cover of the HT 2.

Ensure that the tightening torque does not exceed max. 0.4 - 0.5 Nm.

(1)

Retaining magnet with retaining screw

(2)

Retaining magnet mounted at the standard position

Working with retaining magnets WARNING Do not install the magnets in hazardous locations as they can cause arcing and sparking. CAUTION Even at a considerable distance apart, magnets can be attracted to one another, repel one another or splitter when they collide. This involves strong forces. This is the reason that you should avoid that magnets collide and work with the appropriate protection in order to prevent the skin being injured and other injuries. Strong magnetic fields can destroy electronic or mechanical elements and devices. This also applies to heart pacemakers. Therefore observe the necessary safety clearances. Information on this is provided in the documentation of the corresponding devices. Carefully observe the appropriate packing regulations when shipping by air.


417


17.10.4

Slide-in label

17.10.4.1 Labeling the slide-in labels In the factory, the Handheld Terminal HT 2 is supplied with five horizontal slide-in labels. With the exception of the slide-in label for the first row of keys, standard symbols for the machine control are printed on the slide-in labels.

Figure 17-22 HT2 slide-in labels

When requested, an accessory package with three blank slide-in labels can be ordered, so that these strips can be printed with the key symbols according to your specifications (see Section: "Accessories" → "Overview").

Files for printing the blank film

Figure 17-23 Blank film HT 2 [printing direction (1)]

418


Handheld Terminal HT 2 17.10 Accessories The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: ● Template_HT2_13.doc ● Symbols_OP08T_13.doc The file "Template_HT2_13.doc" is a template for the exact positioning of the symbols on the printable film.

Figure 17-24 Template_HT2_13.doc (blank template for the film)

The file "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" contains a broad range of key symbols. An overview of these is given in the Appendix of this Manual.

Preparing slide-in labels 1. Open the files "Template_HT2_13.doc" and "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" in MS Word. 2. Select a key symbol from the file "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" by left-clicking. 3. Copy the desired symbol to the clipboard via "Edit" → "Copy" or "Ctrl + C" 4. Return to the template file "Template_HT2_13.doc" 5. Position the cursor before the insertion point in the desired table cell. 6. Insert the key symbol via "Edit" → "Paste" or "Ctrl + V".


419


7. To format the graphics, double click on the inserted symbol with the lefthand mouse key. – Select the "size" tab and set the symbol height to 1.1 cm. – Click on to accept the change. 8. Repeat steps 2. to 7. until you have inserted all the key symbols.

Printing the slide-in labels 1. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see Fig.: "Blank film HT 2"). 2. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 3. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note For labeling the slide-in labels, HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 4. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (see Fig.: "Template_HT2_13.doc"). 5. Round off the corners of the slide-in labels approx. 3 mm to facilitate insertion.

420



Dimension drawings

Figure 17-25 Dimensions for slide-in labels

Creating your own symbols ● Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): – Draw a 13 x 13 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. – Place the symbol in the center of this square. – Group the square and symbol together and add this group in the MS Word document Template_HT2_13.doc. ● Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint) – Draw a square 13x13 mm (37x37 pixel), filled with the color white. – Draw the symbol in the center of this square. – Copy the symbol and the square together and add the group in the MS Word document Template_HT2_13.doc.


421


17.10.4.2 Replacing the slide-in labels The slots to insert the slide-in labels are located under a cover on the lefthand side of the HT 2 that is integrated into the device design.

Figure 17-26 Cover of the slide-in labels (1)

The retaining screws of the cover are accessible from the rear of the HT 2. 1.

Release the three slotted screws M4. Each of the screws (1) has a marking (2).

2.

Remove the cover.

3.

Withdraw the required slidein label.

4.

Insert the new slide-in labels.

5.

Re-attach the cover and screw it into place.

422

(1)

Slide-in labels inserted

(2)

Slide-in labels withdrawn


18

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.1

Description The SINUMERIK HT 8 is an handheld operating and programming device that combines the functions of an operator panel front and a machine control panel. It enables direct plant and machine operation from any location. The HT 8 therefore operates according to the Thin Client principle (mobile Thin client, see also Section: "Thin Client Unit"). The HT 8 has a 7.5" TFT color display and is operated via a touch screen and membrane keys. It is equipped with an Emergency Stop button and two 3-stage agreement buttons for left and right-handed people. Its safety concept allows working in the danger zone of the machine, which is needed for teaching. The HT 8 is hot-plug capable. This allows trouble-free connecting and disconnecting of the connector during operation, without triggering an Emergency Stop. The HT 8 can be safely kept and operated in a stationary manner in the wall holder. The wall holder is available as an accessory (s. Chapter: "Accessories"). The HT 8 is available in two variants: ● with agreement button, Emergency Stop button, override rotary switch ● with agreement button, Emergency Stop button, rotary override switch, and handwheel

Validity The following description applies to the following components: Designation

Features

HT 8

Agreement button, Emergency Stop button, override rotary switch

6FC5403-0AA20-0AA0

HT 8

Agreement button, Emergency Stop button, override rotary switch, handwheel

6FC5403-0AA20-1AA0


Order number

423

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.1 Description

Function blocks In the unit: ● PCB with CPU, memory ● Ethernet Controller Device front: ● LC display as a Touch Screen – 640 x 480 (VGA) Color TFT – Inverter on board ● 52-key membrane keyboard – 24 machine control keys – 28 control keys (number block keys, cursor pad, function keys) ● Emergency Stop button ● Rotary override switch (19 positions) ● Handwheel (optional) Device rear side: ● 2 agreement buttons (2-channel, 3-stage) ● Serial interfaces: – HT 8 connecting cable to terminal box / connection module – USB interface (with dummy plugs) ● CF Card interface ● Power supply (+24 V)

424


Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.2 Operator controls and indicators

18.2


18.2.1

View

Front

Figure 18-1

Operator interface of the HT8

(1)

Emergency stop button

(2)

Handwheel

(3)

Rotary override switch

(4)

Protective collar

(5)

Display / Touch screen

(6)

Function keys machine control panel

(7)

HMI control keys

(8)

Connecting cables


425


Rear side Rear side of unit HT 8

USB 1.1 connection

(1)

Enabling buttons (one left and one right, under the handhold)

(2)

Cable duct cover

(3)

Second cable entry (connector with integrated USB 1.1 connection)

(4)

Sleeve for connecting cable

(5)

Connecting cable

(1)

Connector with integrated USB 1.1 connection

(2)

USB protective cap

Bottom The HT 8 consists of a double-walled housing (upper and lower shells). On the lower shell, the HT 8 has three small drill-holes (2). These drill-holes are attached for the purpose of diverting the liquid that can penetrate into the space between the doublewalled housing if the malleable protective shroud on the upper shell is pushed through.

Figure 18-2 (1)

426

Lower shell HT 8

Upper shell

(2)

Holes

(3)

Lower shell



18.2.2

Description

Display / Touch screen The display is a backlit CCFL unit. Its service life can be prolonged if the brightness is reduced by dimming. All the application-specific functions are displayed on the touch-sensitive display. One touch of a finger on the corresponding key, triggers the respective function. CAUTION Do not touch the operating elements of the display with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives. In order to achieve precise assignment by pixels, the touch-sensor must be calibrated and adjusted to the touch screen. Information on calibrating the touch screen of the HT8 can be found under: ● IM5 / Commissioning TCU and HT 8

Note Calibration of the touch sensor may also become necessary during operation, because the resistance values of the touch membrane change when there is a temperature change.

Membrane keyboard On the front side of the HT8, 52 keys are arranged in several key blocks (see Section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Function keys machine control panel ● links: START, STOP, RESET, AUTO, JOG, TEACH, ALARM CANCEL ● Bottom: U (User button) ● right: 2 x 6 traversing keys, 4 user keys (can be freely assigned) HMI operating keys ● The number block contains the numbers 1-9, the decimal point and the minus sign ● The cursor pad is used to navigate on the screen. ● 7 keys for – Input – Menu change – Switch-over of the softkey bars – Help function


427


Emergency Stop button The red mushroom-shaped head of the EMERGENCY STOP button is provided with a yellow ring. Directly under the mushroom-shaped head, there is also a black ring which identifies the position status of the EMERGENCY STOP button. State Ring (black)

visible

not visible


Not pressed

Pressed

If an EMERGENY STOP is triggered, the button locks into place. If the button is locked in place, it can be unlocked by rotating it to the right. Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when ∎

people are at risk,

∎


As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions The signals are sent via the the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring.

Rotary override switch The rotary override switch of the HT 8 has 19 positions. The evaluation scale (0 to max.) is specified by the machine's manufacture in the form of machine data.

Agreement button The HT 8 has two enabling buttons that are logically grouped. This allows the enabling function to be triggered by either the left or the right hand during normal operation. The enabling buttons are configured as 2-channel, 3-position switches for the following button positions: ● Released (no activation) ● Enabling (center position) - enabling for channel 1 and 2 is on the same switch. ● Panic (completely pushed through) The signals are sent via the the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring in the control cabinet.

428



Handwheel The HT 8 is available with a handwheel The handwheel operates with 50 pulses/revolution. For information about connecting the handwheel, refer to: /IM5/ Commissioning Manual: "Thin client configuration"

Interface USB 1.1 For connecting the keyboard and mouse, there is a USB 1.1 interface. It is integrated in the connector, which closes off one of the two cable inlets on the rear side of the HT 8 (see Section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") NOTICE The service life of the USB connector is a max. of 1,300 connection cycles. After this period, it should be replaced. Note Replace the USB connector if its protective cap is torn, because in this case, the connector is no longer protected from dirt. Only plug a USB FlashDrive into this port for service purposes. NOTICE A plugged-in USB FlashDrive can be damaged or broken off if the device falls.

18.2.3

Screen brightness control If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screen brightness control must be activated (screen switched dark) in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: Operator's Guide HMI Advanced /IAM/: IM4 Start-up of HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen brightness control is not activated.


429

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.3 Interfaces

18.3

Interfaces

18.3.1

Overview The following figure shows the connection of the individual function units to the interfaces of the HT 8.

$JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ ZLWK/RJLF

(PHUJHQF\ 6WRSEXWWRQ

2YHUULGHVZLWFK

+DQGZKHHO

7RXFK 0HPEUDQHNH\E 0DWUL[NH\VDQG GLUHFWNH\V

&&)/ %DFNOLJKW

7)7'LVSOD\

+70DLQERDUG

;

9HPHUJHQF\ VWRSSXVKEXWWRQ $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ

;

;

(WKHUQHW

86%VRFNHW

033+7&

Figure 18-3

Block diagram of HT8 interfaces

18.3.2

Description

&RQQHFWLQJPRGXOH %DVLF31 FDELQHWPRXQWLQJ

&RQQHFWLQJER[,3 %DVLF31 3OXV31

Signal type

430

B

Bi-directional signal

O

Signal output

V

Power supply

I

Signal input

VI

Voltage input

VO

Voltage output

K

Contact



X3: Ethernet Connector designation:

X3

Connector type:

8-pole RJ45-socket with interlock (above)

Table 18-1


Pin

Signal

Signal type

1

TD+

2

TD-

3

RD+

I

Receive data +

4

-

-

Unassigned

5

-

-

Unassigned

6

RD-

I

Receive data -

7

-

-

Unassigned

8

-

-

Unassigned

O

Meaning Transmit data + Transmit data -

X5: USB 1.1 connection Connector designation:

X5

Connector type:

6-pole plug connector

Table 18-2


Pin

Signal

Signal type

Meaning

1

Shield

V

Shield connection

2

+5 V

VO

Power supply for external devices

3

USB-DN

4

USB-DP

B

5

0V

VO

Ground

6

Shield

V

Shield connection


USB data channel 1 USB data+, channel 1

431


X51: Supply 2

$

$

$

$

$

SLQ$

%

Figure 18-4

(1)

%

%

%

%

%

X51: Supply 2

Recess


X 51

Connector type:

12-pole connector plug with coding and locking

Pin

Signal

Signal type

Meaning

Pin

Signal

Signal type

Meaning

A1

N.C.

-

Unassigned

B1

N.C.

-

Unassigned

A2

Enable 2+

O

Enabling button Channel 2, digital

B2

ENABLE 2-

O


A3

Enable 1+


B3

ENABLE 1-

A4

STOP -13

EMERGENCY STOP circuit 2

B4

STOP -14

A5

STOP -23

EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1

B5

STOP -24

A6

P24

+24V power supply

B6

M24

432

K

VI

Enabling button Channel 1, digital K

EMERGENCY STOP circuit 2 EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1

VI

External ground


Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.4 Ports

18.4

Ports

18.4.1

Overview The HT 8 is connected via Ethernet (see Section: "Interfaces" → "Overview."). For a connection via Ethernet the individual bus participants communicate via ● terminal box Basic PN / terminal box Plus PN ● Connection module Basic PN (for control cabinet installation) or ● MPP 483HTC HT 8 with

Terminal box Basic PN / Plus PN


(WKHUQHW

MPP 483HTC

(WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW

(WKHUQHW

6DIHW\ VLJQDOV

(WKHUQHW 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV

(WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV

(WKHUQHW

The connection via the terminal box Plus PN allows quick connecting and disconnecting while the machine is operating without the EMER STOP being triggered. If no HT 8 is connected, observe: DANGER Emergency stop switches that are inactive • may not be recognizable as such • may not be accessible. This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP switch from being used inadvertently.


433


18.4.2

Terminal Box PN

18.4.2.1

Features

Figure 18-5

Terminal Box PN

(1)

LEDs

(2)

Screwed joint for power supply cable and shield

(3)

Screwed joint for cable with supplementary Stop and enabling button signals and for PLC-accompanying signals

(4)

Connecting socket for the connector plug of the connecting cable (covered with dummy cap)

(5)

Screwed joint for process data line (Ethernet)

Note Protection class IP65 at the terminal box is ensured with plugged-in HT 8 or plugged-in dummy cap. The terminal box PN is available in two variants. ● Terminal box Basic PN ● Terminal box Plus PN Note The exterior of the terminal box PN variants differ only in the printing on the side.

434



Terminal box Plus PN The terminal box PN is not capable of acting as a hot-plug. This means that it is possible to connect and disconnect during operation without any disruption. The EMER STOP circuit is automatically maintained during the switching of connectors. The Terminal box Plus PN is available under order no.6AV6671-5AE11-0AX0.

Terminal box Basic PN The terminal box Basic PN can be used if no hot plug-capability is required. The EMER STOP circuit can be overridden here by external mechanisms. The Terminal box Basic PN is available under order no.6AV6671-5AE01-0AX0.

Clearance

The following clearances are required around the Terminal Box PN:


435


18.4.2.2

Terminal box Plus PN The Terminal Box Plus PN differs from a Terminal Box Basic PN due to four relays that are mounted on the board.

Figure 18-6

(1)

Board

(2)

Relay


Switching statuses of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit ● with HT 8 connectedwith emergency stop button and terminal box Plus PN HT 8


connected

Not pressed

connected

Pressed

not connected

-

Switch status, Emergency Stop circuit Emergency stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. The EMER STOP circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. Emergency stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed.

WARNING disconnect HT 8 If you disconnect the HT 8 from the terminal box Plus PN, the EMER STOP circuit is closed and the stop state of the system to be monitored is cleared. This occurs irrespective of whether the EMER STOP button has been pressed on the HT 8.

436



18.4.2.3

Terminal box Basic PN In contrast to the Terminal Box Plus PN, the "Stop loop through" function is not implemented in the Terminal Box Basic PN. Relays are therefore not required.

Figure 18-7


CAUTION The EMER STOP circuit is controlled via the EMER STOP button when the HT 8 is connected. If the connecting cable of the HT 8 is disconnected from the terminal box Basic PN, the EMER STOP circuit is interrupted. This leads to a reliable machine stop or an EMER STOP of the system to be monitored.

Switching statuses of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit ● with HT 8 connectedwith emergency stop button and terminal box Basic PN HT 8

EMERGENCY STOP key

Switch status EMERGENCY STOP circuit

connected

Not pressed

connected

Pressed

The EMER STOP circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped.

-

The EMER STOP circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped.

not connected

Emergency stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed.

WARNING If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the EMER STOP button or place the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the EMER STOP function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out.


437


18.4.2.4

Interface assignments Information for interface assignment of the terminal box PN can be found under ● SIMATIC HMI/Operating unit Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible) ● www.siemens.de\simatic-doku

18.4.3

Connecting module Basic PN

18.4.3.1

Features The connection module Basic PN was specially developed for installation in the control cabinet. The terminating connector protrudes through the panel of the control cabinet so that the HT 8 can be connected from the outside. The Connection module box Basic PN is available under order no.6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0.

2SHUDWRU3DQHO +0, 6\VWHPQHWZRUN

0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO +7

(PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWV

&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH31 3

&RPELFDEOH +7

3

3 &RQWUROOHUV 1&8 1&8 1&8

6WDWXVVLJQDOV (PHUJ6WRS 3DQHOSUHVHQW

6DIHW\ &RPELQDWLRQ 7.

Figure 18-8

438

)DFWRU\QHWZRUN

Block diagram - control cabinet installation



The connection module Basic PN is not hot plug-capable. The EMER STOP lines of the HT 8 are not monitored, but are placed directly on the EMER STOP circuit For overriding the EMER STOP circuit during connecting or disconnecting the HT 8, there is a button or key-operated switch (see Section: "Connecting/disconnecting during operation"). The HT 8 can either be connected directly to the NCU or to the PCU 50.3 as a Thin Client.


439


18.4.3.2

Dimension drawing

6 6

;

;

;

;

0 *URXQG

;

;

;

ท

ท

0

0

ท

ท

)L[LQJKROHV

O

QD

WLR

RS

0

(ORQJDWHGKROHVWREHXVHGLIPRGXOHVDUHWREHVFUHZPRXQWHGWRWKHLQVLGHRIWKHFDELQHW

Figure 18-9

440

HT8 connection module Basic PN - dimension drawing for control cabinet installation



18.4.3.3

interfaces The HT 8 is connected to the connection module Basic PN via a round connector. The interfaces of the connection module are located on the rear side (see figure). 6 6 6 6

;

;

;

;

;

; ;

S1 / S2

DIP Fix switches (rotary coding switch)

(1)

Interfaces with attached connectors

Information on setting the bus addresses can be found under: ● IM5 / Commissioning TCU and HT 8

PN pin assignments of the connectors Signal type: I

Input (Input)

O

Output (Output)

B


P

Potential

X3: Power supply For the pin assignments of the power supply interface X3, refer to Section: "Connection conditions" →"Secondary electrical conditions" → "Pin assignments of the interfaces".


441

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.4 Ports X7: Panel Present Connector designation:

X7

Connector type:


Table 18-3

Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7

Pin

Signal name

Signal type

Meaning

1

PRES

O

"High": Panel (HT 8) plugged in

2

XCTL

O

"Low": EMER STOP button pressed 1)

3

XFAULT

O

"Low": Error in EMER STOP electronics 1)

4

N.C.

-

Unassigned

5

N.C.

-

Unassigned

6

M (GND)

P

Ground

1) Function

not implemented in Basic PN variant, output is not switched to "High"

X8: Emergency Stop wiring terminal Connector designation:

X8

Connector type:


Table 18-4

Assignment of the EMER STOP wiring terminal X8

Pin

Protective circuit

1


2 3 4


Note Use this terminal for simple routing of the emergency stop cables, optional. The connector is only used to assist looping through. The connected pins 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 have no additional function on the connection module.

442


Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.4 Ports X20: Enabling buttons Connector designation:

X20

Connector type:


Table 18-5

Assignment of the interface enabling buttons X20

Pin

Signal name

Signal type

Meaning

1

ZUST1P

I

Electronic enabling button 1 P

2

ZUST1M

O

Electronic enabling button 1 M

3

ZUST2P

I

Electronic enabling button 2 P

4

ZUST2M

O

Electronic enabling button 2 M

5

N.C.

-

Unassigned

6

N.C.

-

Unassigned

7

N.C.

-

Unassigned

8

N.C.

-

Unassigned

X21: EMER STOP and keyswitch Connector designation:

X21

Connector type:


Table 18-6

Assignment of the interface EMER STOP and keyswitch X21

Pin

Signal name

1

STOP23

2

STOP24

3

STOP13

Signal type

Emergency Stop circuit B

4

STOP14

5

M (GND)

P

6

N.C.

-

7

IN_E9

8

P24_FILT

9

IN_E9_EXT

10

IN_E12_EXT


Meaning Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit Ground P24 switched by keyswitches

P

Filtered 24V module power supply

O

"High": Terminating connector plugged in

"High": Key-operated switch actuated

443


18.4.3.4

Installing the terminating connector

Procedure

(1) Retaining nuts

1. Unscrew the retaining nuts.

2. Attach the bracket for the terminating connector.

3. Tighten the retaining nut and insert the terminating connector into the bracket.

444



Note If you never remove the HT8 from the connection module, it is not necessary to attach the terminating connector.

18.4.4

MPP 483HTC The MPP 483HTC variant of the machine control panel MPP 483 has an integrated connection module thereby providing a connection option for the HT 8.

Emergency Stop override For the MPP 483HTC, the EMER STOP circuit is overridden by a keyswitch. The activation of the keyswitch is sent to the PLC, which generates a message after a certain period of time if the keyswitch was held for too long or remains activated due to a defect.

18.4.5

Connecting cables The connecting cable is an industrial cable and, thus, resistant to many solvents and lubricants. The flexural strength is geared to the actual usage conditions. The connecting cable is available in different lengths. You will find detailed information in Section: "Accessories."

Figure 18-10 Connecting cable of the HT 8 (1)

Metallic push-pull circular connector (ODU connector)

(2)

Strain relief and kink protection for connecting cable

(3)

RJ45 connector (Ethernet connection)

(4)

Plug-in connector for (Enabling button, EMER STOP, 24V and safety signals)


445

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.4 Ports The connecting cable is connected to the HT8 via the RJ45 connector (3) and the plug-in connector (4). The ODU connector (1) serves to connect the connecting cable to the terminal box PN or the connection module PN (control cabinet installation). The tightening torque for the nut of the ODU socket is 6.5 Nm. The HT 8 has two cable inlets on its rear side for connecting the cable. This makes it possible to attach the connecting cable on either the right or left side. One of the cable inlets is closed at the factory by a connector in which an IP65-capable USB 1.1-connection is integrated.

Figure 18-11 Rear side of the HT 8 with cable inlets

(1)

Cable inlet without connecter plug

(2)

Cable inlet with connector plug

Laying the connecting cable 1. Open the cable duct cover by unscrewing the six PT screws (4 x 20 mm) approximately 1 cm. Use a size 2 Phillips screwdriver Ensure that you do not exceed the tightening torque of max. 0.4 - 0.5 Nm.

446


Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.4 Ports Cable duct cover open

2. Insert the connecting cable into the cable inlet that suits your intended application (left or right). Press the cable downward slightly until it rests completely on the fastening burls (2) . Put a plug in the cable inlet that you do not intend to use.

3. Press the plug connector firmly into the power supply socket (1).

NOTICE When plugging in the connector plug, ensure that all cables are lying straight in the cable guide. Otherwise, crushed wires can negatively impact the functionality. Check to ensure that all wires are aligned and straight and check the firm seating of the plug-in connector before you carry out the next step.


447

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.4 Ports 4. Connect the RJ-45 connector to the Ethernet socket.

Correctly laid connecting cable HT 8 left rear side

HT 8 right rear side

5. Put the cable duct cover on and secure it by tightening the six screws.

NOTICE The housing of the HT 8 is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. Therefore, do not exceed 0.4 to 0.5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws (also for protecting the connecting cable). If you use electric screwdrivers, ensure the max. speed of 600 RPM is adhered to (torque: 1 Nm). The screws of the cable duct cover may only be loosened or tightened a maximum of 20 times. Otherwise, there is the danger that the threads might become damaged and the seal of the housing will be compromised which could lead to failure of the device.

448



18.4.6

Power Supply The HT 8 is supplied with power via the connecting cable of the terminal box PN or of the connecting module PN. The input voltage range is designed for +24 V DC.


449


18.5

Commissioning

18.5.1

HMI sl

18.5.1.1

Configuring the traversing keys of the HT 8 For the HT 8, the traversing key menu comprises two vertical rows of keys each with 8 keys. You can configure up to 16 texts. The traversing keys are labeled using the file "sljkconfig.xml".

Proceed as follows 1. Copy the file "sljkconfig.xml" from the directory: CF-Card/Siemens/sinumerik/hmi/appl. 2. Paste the copy of the file into the following directory: CF-Card/OEM/sinumerik/hmi/cfg or CF-Card/User/sinumerik/hmi/cfg. 3. Open the copy in the Editor and define the traversing key labeling.

Sample structure of the file "sljkconfig.xml"

450



Entries

Meaning

Label_x_y

Parameters x and y are assigned each traversing key. You specify the position of the key in the menu as follows: x = position of the key within the row, 1 to 8. y = specify the key row, 1 or 2.

ParamText

Text on the button: • The text is entered after the "value" attribute. 2-line labeling is possible, max. 5 characters per line. • Attribute "type=" contains the fixed value "QString".

%n

Sets a line break.

"%m1" to "%m6"

Machine axis name of an axis is referenced and built into the text. The current, active axis number is read-out of the table in DB10. The name from the machine data is determined using this index.

Picture

Symbol on the key: • The file name of the symbol to be displayed is entered after the attribute "value". The files with the symbols are stored in the directory CFCard/OEM/sinumerik/hmi and depending on the resolution in subdirectories /ico/ico640, /ico/ico800, etc. • Attribute "type=" contains the fixed value "QString".

See also: You will find additional information on the HT 8 in: ● Function Manual Basic Functions, basic PLC program (P3 sl) ● Equipment Manual, Operator Components and Networking (IM5) ● Operating Manual, HMI sl Universal


451


18.5.1.2

Activating/deactivating the virtual keyboard The virtual keyboard is configured in the file "slgfw.ini".

Proceed as follows 1. Copy the "slgfw.ini" file from the directory CF-Card/Siemens/sinumerik/hmi/cfg. 2. Paste the copy of the file into the following directory: CF-Card/OEM/sinumerik/hmi/cfg or CF-Card/User/sinumerik/hmi/cfg. 3. Open the file in the editor. 4. To activate or deactivate the keyboard, make the following settings: – Activating the virtual keyboard: In the section [TouchPanel], EnableTouch = true In the section [Keyboard], EnableVirtualKeyBoard = true – Deactivating the virtual keyboard: In the section [TouchPanel], EnableTouch = true In the section [Keyboard], EnableVirtualKeyBoard = false 5. Double click in the input field to display the keyboard.

18.5.2

HMI Advanced

18.5.2.1

Configuring the traversing keys of the HT 8

Prerequisite In order to display or skip the labeling of the traversing keys, the HT 8 must have user authorization.

Parameterizing the MCP signals of the HT 8 in the PLC HT 8-relevant blocks in the PLC program are FB 1 for HT 8/PLC communication and FC 26 for NCK/PLC communication.

Display/skip the labeling of traversing keys on HT 8 In order to inscribe the traversing keys, the names of the first 6 axes are established from the machine data 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB (indexed using DB 10, bytes 8 to 13). The LED image of HT 8 serves as the interface for displaying the labeling by the PLC. The PLC sets a bit in the LED image of the HT 8 to display or skip the traversing keys: Signal AB n+6 bit 7 = 1 for displaying Signal AB n+6 bit 7 = 0 for skipping

452



NOTICE To ensure that the labeling of the traversing keys is displayed correctly, the names of the axes must not exceed 10 characters. Example with labeling of traversing axes displayed:

Figure 18-12 Traversing axes displayed

CAUTION The EMERGENCY STOP circuit is controlled via the EMERGENCY STOP button when the HT 8 is connected. If the connecting cable of the HT 8 is disconnected from the terminal box Basic PN, the EMERGENCY STOP circuit is interrupted. This leads to a reliable machine stop or an EMERGENCY STOP of the system to be monitored. The EMERGENCY STOP lines of the HT 8 are not monitored, but are placed directly on the EMERGENCY STOP circuit. For overriding the EMERGENY STOP circuit when connecting or disconnecting the HT 8, there is a button or key-operated switch.


453


Acknowledging display/skipping by HMI on PLC The HMI communicates to the PLC whether the traversing keys are displayed or hidden. This is done using bit 7 in byte 72 of DB 10: Displayed:

DB10.DBX72.7 = 1

Skipped:

DB10.DBX72.7 = 0

Customer keys The user keys (the 2 keys at the top and bottom) can be assigned in any way. User keys, which can be used to trigger a wide range of machine functions, are evaluated directly by the PLC program.

HT 8 operated with the handwheel An HT 8 with a handwheel responds like an MCP 483C IE with a handwheel. The handwheel pulses are sent from the MCP image to the NCK. CAUTION The increments per revolution for a handwheel on a mobile HT 8 amount to 50 increments/revolution; for a stationary unit, it is 100 increments/revolution. A different length of the traverse path results from this difference.

See also: You will find additional information on the HT 8 in: ● Function Manual Basic Functions, basic PLC program (P3 sl) ● You will find a description of the machine data in: Detailed Machine Data Description ● Operating Manual HMI-Advanced

18.5.2.2

Configuring user-specific key labeling

Labeling the keys for the HT 8 The texts of the CPF menu (CPF: Control Panel Function) for the HT 8 and the traversing keys can be labeled by the user with his own texts in his specific language. A language-dependent file ht8_xx.ini is provided in directory \mmc2\language for this purpose. Only edit a copy of this original file and place this copy in one of the following directories: ● user\language ● oem\language ● addon\language

454


Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.5 Commissioning There are two sections in file ht8_xx.ini; one for the CPF menu ( [CPFSoftkeyText] ) and one for a maximum of 31 traversing keys ( [AxiskeyText] ). With no entry (e.g. U2="") or for the value (e.g. U2=) no labeling text is displayed on a softkey or on a traversing key (-/+). ● The entries for the CPF keys are pre-assigned as standard with U1 ... U16. ● The texts for the traversing keys are not activated as default setting for the following reason: If no traversing key text is read, the name is determined from the machine data – with the axis number as index – and correspondingly output: ("/ACC/NC_TEA/$MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[" & chAxisNbr(k%) & "]", chAxisName(k%) Note It is not possible to combine the labeling texts – e.g. a part of the name from the INI file and another part from the machine data.

Configuration file Example of a key labeling (ht8_xx.ini): [CPFSoftkeyText] U1 = "User%nKey 1" U2 = "UserKey 2" U3 = "UserKey 3" U4 = "UserKey 4" U5 = "UserKey 5" U6 = "UserKey 6" U7 = "UserKey 7" U8 = "UserKey 8" U9 = "ETC-UKey 9" U10 = "ETC-UKey 10" U11 = "ETC-UKey 11" U12 = "ETC-UKey 12"

; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;

2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10

→ Text is two lines due to %n characters characters characters characters characters characters characters characters characters characters characters

U13 U14 U15 U16

; ; ; ;

2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10

characters characters characters characters

= = = =

"ETC-UKey "ETC-UKey "ETC-UKey "ETC-UKey

[AxiskeyText] AX1 = AX2 = AX3 =

"Wx" "Xx"

AX4 = AX5 = AX6 =

"Yx" "Zx"


13" 14" 15" 16"

; here, a line break is obtained with 2 blanks. ; 2*5 characters ; 2*5 characters ; 2*5 No text is displayed on the traversing key (-/+). ; 2*5 characters ; 2*5 characters ; 2*5 characters

455


Traversing keys U13 to U16 Traversing keys U13 to U16 are selected using the CPF menu: As standard, keys for axes 1 to 6 are displayed. If the 2nd vertical softkey is pressed in the CPF menu (change over traversing keys), then the next time that the traversing keys are displayed, keys 7 to 12 are displayed; after pressing the 2nd vertical softkey in the CPF menu, then axis keys 1 to 6 are displayed again, etc.

456



18.6

Unplugging/plugging during operation Trouble-free disconnection and connection of the HT 8 during machine operation requires the following: ● Release or override the HT 8 Emergency Stop ● Inserting the terminating connector after withdrawing the HT 8

DANGER Emergency Stop switches that are inactive • may not be recognizable as such or • may not be accessible This is to prevent the Emergency Stop switch from being used inadvertently.


457


(PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWV\VWHPHPHUJVWRS

.H\VZLWFK ZLWKSRVLWLYHDFWLRQFRQWDFWV

.H\VZLWFK 21 (PHUJHQF\6WRSRYHUULGHSDVVLYH +7SOXJJHGLQ

;

6LJQDOWR3/&

(OHFWU VZLWFK


*1' ;

9

;

)LOWHU &XUUHQWOLPLW

9 0 6KLHOG

*1'

+7

(PHUJVWRSEXWWRQ

.H\VZLWFKFRQVLVWLQJRI ಴VZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6%$DQG ಴RSHUDWRUFRQWUROHOHPHQW6%RU6% DSSURSULDWHVDIHW\ORFNDVUHTXLUHG &DWDORJ6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHVDQGV\VWHPV16. DW$ '&'

7ULJJHUVDWLPHU ,IWKHVLJQDOOHYHOLVVWLOOORZDIWHUWKHPRQLWRULQJSHULRG DSSUR[PLQ WKH3/&HPHUJHQF\VWRS PXVWEHWULJJHUHG 7RHQVXUHWKH+,*+/2:WUDQVLWLRQRIWKHOHYHO LWPD\EHQHFHVVDU\WRXVHDSXOOGRZQUHVLVWRU

Figure 18-13 Connection module 6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0: Recommended circuit for Emergency Stop override (illustration shows key-operated switch set to "ON" with HT 8 connected)

458



(PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWV\VWHPHPHUJVWRS

.H\VZLWFK ZLWKSRVLWLYHDFWLRQFRQWDFWV

.H\VZLWFK 21 HPHUJVWRSRYHUULGHSDVVLYH 6KRUWLQJSOXJSOXJJHGLQ

;

6WDWXVVLJQDO

9

(OHFWU VZLWFK


*1'

*1' ;

6KRUWLQJSOXJ

.H\VZLWFKFRQVLVWLQJRI ಴VZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6%$DQG ಴RSHUDWRUFRQWUROHOHPHQW6%RU6% DSSURSULDWHVDIHW\ORFNDVUHTXLUHG &DWDORJ6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHVDQGV\VWHPV16. DW$ '&'

9VLJQDO LQGLFDWHVZLWKDಮKLJKಯOHYHOWKDWWKHVKRUWLQJ SOXJLVSUHVHQW

7RHQVXUHWKH+,*+/2:WUDQVLWLRQRIWKHOHYHO LWPD\EHQHFHVVDU\WRXVHDSXOOGRZQUHVLVWRU

Figure 18-14 Connection module 6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0: Emergency Stop override (illustration shows key-operated switch set to "ON" with shorting plug connected)

Disconnecting the HT 8 Key-operated switch is set to "ON" position, HT 8 connection at distributor is active (incl. Emergency Stop) 1. With the key-operated switch in the "OFF" position, the Emergency Stop circuits of the HT 8 are jumpered. 2. At the same time, the HT 8 supply voltage is disconnected and a monitoring signal to the PLC is set to the low level (provide a pull-down resistor if necessary). This HIGH-LOW transition starts a timer in the PLC, which opens the Emergency Stop circuit via the relevant PLC outputs and series-connected relays after the changeover period (approx. 5 min.) if the key-operated switch is not reset to its initial position within this period.


459

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.6 Unplugging/plugging during operation 3. The HT 8 must be removed within the changeover period and the Emergency Stop circuit overridden using a terminating connector.

Connecting the HT 8 Changeover from the terminating connector to HT 8 connection is carried out in the reverse sequence.

The ability to detect a connected HT 8 in the PLC 1. HW solution: The X7 interface of the connection module Basic PN signals "HT 8 Present" at pin 1 for the "active" connection module (see Section: "Connections" → "Connection module Basic PN" → "Interfaces"). If the connection module is "inactive", this signal is not set. This makes the "active" connection module detectable in the PLC by wiring the abovementioned pins of all connection modules to digital I/Os on PLC I/O modules. 2. Permanently configured MCPs / HT 8 on one control: If there are only permanently configured MCPs / HT 8 on a control, removal of the MCP or HT 8 triggers the PLC alarm "400260 Machine Control Panel failed". Based on this, an "active" or "inactive" MCP / HT 8 in the PLC can be detected. The failure of an MCP / HT 8 is, however, only detected in the PLC if max. 2 MCP / HT 8 are permanently configured and no MCP changeover by means of FB9 (e.g. triggered by HMI when operator focus is switched).

Note Removing an HT 8 where the integrated machine control panel is active Depending at which interface in the PLC (FB1: MCP1 or MCP2) the HT 8 is configured, before removing the HT 8, the transfer of the machine control panel signals must be stopped. This is possible as direct axis via data block DB7 (instance of the FB1). To do this, set the corresponding interface signal to "true": • 1. Interface: DB7.DBX62.1 (MCP1Stop) • 2. Interface: DB7.DBX62.2 (MCP2Stop) If the machine control panel signals are not stopped, then the message "400260 machine control panel x failed" is displayed at the HMI: Transfer of the machine control panel signals can be restarted after inserting the HT 8. To do this, set the PLC interface signal DB.DBX62.1 (MCP1Stop) to "false".

460



18.7

Technical data

18.7.1

Handheld Terminal HT 8 Security Safety class



IP 65

Approvals

CE / cULus

Electrical specifications Input voltage Current carrying capacity

24 V DC (via HT 8 cable, via cable connection box) Enabling button:

10 - 400 mA / 2-channel, 3-stage

EMERGENCY STOP button:

10 - 1000 mA / 2-channel

Max. current carrying capacity USB 1.1 interface: Power consumption, max.

100 mA Approx. 13 W


Diameter approx. 290

Height (without operating elements) approx. 65

Weight

1,730 g

Fall height, max.

1.20 m


Operation


Vibratory load

10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -500 Hz: 10 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing

150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks according to EN 60068-2-27


Climatic ambient conditions Cooling







EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

0 ... 45 ºC

-20 ... 60ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 85%

5 ... 95% max. 0.1 % /min

461

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.7 Technical data Display Size

462

7.5" TFT

Resolution

640 x 480 pixels

Service life

At ambient temperatures of > 40ºC and long periods of non-use, it is advisable to activate the screen saver function (via the display machine data DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME).



18.7.2

Connection module Basic PN Safety Safety class


Degree of protection according to EN 60529

IP54


CE / cULus


Max. power consumption

24 VDC (via X3 connector) Enabling button contacts (X20 connector)


Emergency stop button contacts (X21 connector)


Connection module without external loading

0.3 A

Panel (HT 8)

1.6 A

5 status signals (X7 and X21)

2.5 A (0.5 A each)

Total:

4.4 A

Max. total power consumption

105.6 W


Height (without holder for terminating connector) 66

Weight

0.75 kg

Fall height, max.

1.20 m


Width

Length

165

166


Operation

Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 500 Hz: 10 m/s2 3M3 according to EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing










EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4

0 ... 55º C

-40 ... 70º C

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 20 K/h

5 ... 90%

5 ... 95% max. 0.1 % / min

463

Handheld Terminal HT 8 18.8 Spare parts

18.8

Spare parts The following spare parts are available for the HT 8:

Designation Service pack Connection box Terminating connector

464

Remark

Quantity

Dummy plugs for cable compartment

1

Cable glands for connection box

2

1 set of screws for connection box cover

1

Terminal strips for connection box

2

for HT 8 connection

1

Order No.

6XV6574-1AA04-4AA0 A5E00444884



18.9

Accessories

18.9.1

Overview The following accessories are available for the HT 8:

Description

Note

Number

Order No.:

Connection box Plus PN

with automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system

1

6AV6671-5AE11-0AX0

Connection box Basic PN

without automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system

1

6AV6671-5AE01-0AX0

Connecting module Basic PN

without automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system

Wall holder

for safekeeping, also suitable for stationary operation

1

6AV6574-1AF04-4AA0

Length: 2 m

1

6XV1440-4BH20

Length: 5 m

1

6XV1440-4BH50

Length: 8 m

1

6XV1440-4BH80

Length: 10 m

1

6XV1440-4BN10

Length: 15 m

1

6XV1440-4BN15

Length: 20 m

1

6XV1440-4BN20

Length: 25 m

1

6XV1440-4BN25

Connecting cable

18.9.2

6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0

Wall holder The HT 8 can be safely kept and operated in a stationary manner in the wall holder. (1) Hook for the grip on the handheld unit

(2) Drill holes for screw fixing


465


Ensure that you position the wall holder in such a manner that ● the display of the hung-in HT 8 is not exposed directly to the sun's rays. ● the HT can be hung in based on ergonomic considerations. Therefore, choose a suitable mounting height.

Dimension drawing

Figure 18-15 HT8 wall holder - dimension drawing

466


Mini-handheld unit 19.1

19

Description The mini handheld unit (Mini HHU) is a small easy-to-handle unit for setting up and operating simple machines in the JobShop area or similar applications. Special attention has been paid to ergonomics and logical operating in the design of the housing and the arrangement of the control elements.


467

Mini-handheld unit 19.2 Operating and display elements

19.2


19.2.1

View

Figure 19-1

468

83.5

Mini handheld unit

(1)

Emergency Stop button, two channels

(2)

Handwheel

(3)

Rapid traverse key for high-speed travel with traversing keys or handwheel

(4)

Magnetic clamps for securing to metal components

(5)

Enabling button, two channels, 3-positions

(6)

Connecting cable 1.5 m ... 3.5 m

(7)

Selection switch for 5 axes and neutral position

(8)

Function keys F1, F2, F3

(9)

Traversing keys + direction / - direction


Mini-handheld unit 19.2 Operating and display elements

19.2.2

Description

Emergency Stop button The emergency stop button must be pressed in an emergency 1. when a person is at risk, 2. When there is a danger of the machine or workpiece being damaged.

Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 3-way switch. This must be held in its central position for movements to be triggered.

Axis selection switch You can select up to 5 axes with the axis selector switch. It is gray-coded (see Section: "Configuration").

Function keys The function keys can be used to trigger machine-specific functions.

Traversing keys The + and - traversing keys can be used to trigger traversing movements on the axis selected via the axis selection switch.

Handwheel The handwheel can be used to initiate movements at the selected axis using the axis selection switch. The handwheel supplies two guide signals with 100 I/U.

Rapid traverse key The rapid traverse key increases the traversing speed of the selected axis with the axis selector switch. The rapid traverse button is active both for traversing commands issued via the +/- keys and for handwheel signals.


469

Mini-handheld unit 19.3 Connections

19.3

Connections

Connection kit A connection kit that must be ordered separately is required for connection of the mini HHU. This connection kit contains a flange socket made of metal for installation at the machine and a dummy plug for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit when the HHU is not connected. You will find the order number in section: "Accessories."

0LQL++8

IUHHO\ZLUHG

QRWXVHG

ZD\3KRHQL[ WHUPLQDOEORFN

..[

ZD\3KRHQL[ WHUPLQDOEORFN;

0&3

; ZD\'8ER[VRFNHW

;

..[

ZD\'8ER[VRFNHW )ODQJHGFRQQHFWRU

; ZD\'8ER[VRFNHW

;

..[

ZD\68%'IHPDOHFRQQHFWRU

&RQQHFWLRQNLWIRUPLQL%+*DQ0&3

$VVLJQPHQWRIWKH'(ER[FRQQHFWRU ;;;

&DEOHOHQJWK P

Figure 19-2

470

9LHZRIWKHSOXJVLGH

Connection kit for mini HHU



Mounting the flange socket on the control housing

Figure 19-3

Hole pattern for mounting

1. Use the hole pattern for the wall of the control housing. 2. Route the connecting cable through the large drill hole into the control housing. 3. Mount the flange socket (with seal) onto the control housing. 4. Plug the connecting cable into the mating connector according to the connector labeling. 5. Connect the connectors (on the machine) of the emergency stop and enable key on terminal strip -X1 (see Fig.: "Circuit diagram and sample connection").

Angle box The angle box cannot be used in conjunction with connection kit for mini HHUs on machine control panels with Industrial Ethernet.

Adapter plate To install the metal flange sockets made of metal in the installation location for plastic flange sockets, an adapter plate is available for enabling installation in the existing holes / threads of the plastic flange socket.

You will find the order number in section: "Accessories."

Figure 19-4

Dimension drawing of the adapter plate


471


Mini HHU connection The mini HHU is connected to the PLC or the connector for handwheels via a flange socket. The flange socket is part of the the connection kit. The signals are sent to the NC in parallel (without MPI). There is no need for an additional distributor

É

9LEUDWLRQSURWHFWLRQ

2ULQJ

Figure 19-5

Flange socket

1. Plug the connecting plug of the mini-HHU (or the jumper connector) into the detent lugs / guideways of the flange socket. 2. Use the twist lock to fasten it. Note If the plug is connected incorrectly, the twist lock will be damaged!

472



Circuit diagram and sample connection

(PHUJVWRS

(QDEOLQJEXWWRQ

$ &

$[LVVHOHFWLRQ

&

$

6

6

6

)XQFWLRQNH\V 6

6

6

%

60

*

6HUYRKDQGZKHHO

..[

EQEXPP ZKUGPP

..[ [PP 6KLHOGHG

6KLHOG

;

EXPP

ZKEXPP

9 J\EQPP

;

ZKJ\PP

EN

0LQL++8

0LQL++8 &RQQHFWLRQKRXVLQJ HJRQWKHUHDURI WKHFRQWUROSHQGDQW

ZK\HPP

JQ

&RQQHFWRURQWKHPDFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO0&3

EQJQPP

\H

;

ZKJQPP

J\

6

UGEXPP

SN

J\UGPP

EX

;

..[ [PP ..[ [PP

\HEQPP

UG

&RQQHFWLRQNLWIRUPLQL%+*DQ0&3 $VVLJQPHQWRIWKH'8%R[FRQQHFWRU ;;;

9LHZRIWKHSOXJVLGH

YWPP

YW

6

ENPP

EU

UGPP

ZK

EXPP

EX

SNPP

SN

6

J\PP

J\

7HUPLQDOEORFNLQWKHRSHUDWLQJSHQGDQWKRXVLQJ

;

\HPP

\H

473


JQPP

JQ

% % $ $

UGEQPP

EX SN \H JQ

EQPP

EU

9 9

9'&ZKUGPP

EU ZK

ZKPP

ZK

Mini-handheld unit 19.4 Configuring

19.4

Configuring The FC76 module supplied in the toolbox supports configuration of the mini HHU. It is located in the toolbox in the BSP_PROG directory in the file Minibhg.zip. This module is included in the toolbox in version 5.1 and later only. For example in toolbox 5.1.x(8x0d\050104\disk1\Bsp_prog\Minibhg.zip or in toolbox 6.1.2(8x0d\060102\bsp_prog\Minibhg.zip. The FC76 contains a standard program for the mini HHU and is valid for use with SINUMERIK 840D/810D. The program is generally valid and therefore requires several input and output signals when called. To avoid collisions (caused by simultaneous access to one and the same signal), the FC2 (NCK-PLC interface) that occurs in the basic program must be processed before the FC76.

Mini HHU connection The mini BHG is connected to connectors X51, X52, and X55 or an MCP xxx IE. Standard + 2 handwheels The specifications for assigning input and output bytes listed in the tables can be changed in the PLC via parameter assignment. If a mini HHU is connected, the result is the function assignment for customer keys KT1 to KT9 (byte 10 and byte 11) as shown in Table "Example:Process input image MCP 483C IE". The customer keys (inputs) are then not available for other applications. Table 19-1

Example MCP 483C IE input image

Byte

Bit7

Bit6

IB 0

D

C

IB 1

REPOS

REF.

IB 2

Keyswitch

Keyswitch

position 0

position 2

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

B

A

JOG

TEACH IN

MDI

AUTO

var. INC

10000 INC

1000 INC

100 INC

10 INC

1 INC

Spindle Start

*Spindle Stop

Feed Start

*Feed Stop

NC start

*NC Stop

B

A

Spindle override

Mode Machine function

Keyswitch IB 3

RESET

position 1

Single block

Feed override E

D

Keyswitch

Arrow keys IB 4

+ R15

R13

Rapid traverse R14

IB 5

Y R2

Z R3

5. Axis R5

position 3

C

Axis selection X R1

4. Axis R4

7. Axis R7

R10

9. Axis R9

8. Axis R8

6. Axis R6

T14

T15

-

Axis selection Motion command in MCS/WCS

R11

Unassigned customer keys IB 6

T9

T10

T11

T12

T13

Unassigned customer keys

474


Mini-handheld unit 19.4 Configuring Byte

Bit7

Bit6

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

IB 7

T1

T2

T3

T4

T5

T6

T7

T8

IB 8

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

IB 9

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

IB 10

Axis selection switch KT8

KT7

F2 X55.2

F1 X55.1

IB 11

-

IB 12 IB 13

KT6

KT5

KT4

KT3

KT2

KT1

23

X51.3

22

X51.2

21 X51.1

X52.3

X52.2

X52.1

-

-

-

-

-

-

KT9 F3 X55.3

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Override spindle16

Override spindle8

Override spindle4

Override spindle2

Override spindle1

Signals marked with * are inverse signals.

Table 19-2

Table 19-3 Byte

Assignment of axis selector switch on mini HHU to process input image (gray code X1):

21 IB10 Bit 0

22 IB10 Bit 1

23 IB10 Bit 2

0

0

1

1

0

Switch position

Axis selection

0

-

Mini HHU not connected

0

0

No axis selected

1

0

Z

Z axis selected

0

1

1

X

X axis selected

1

1

1

Y

Y axis selected

1

0

1

4

Axis 4 selected

0

0

1

5

Axis 5 selected

Input image for handwheel data Bit7

Bit6

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

Handwheel 1 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte n+14)

IB 14 IB 15

Handwheel 2 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte n+16)

IB 16 IB 17

Within the SINUMERIK controller, the handwheel data are processed directly by the NCK and are not available to the PLC.


475

Mini-handheld unit 19.5 Technical data

19.5

Technical data Table 19-4

Handheld unit

Operator controls Enabling button

1 x: floating

two channels, 3positions

NO


1 x: floating

two-channel

NC contact, locked by twisting

Selection switch

5 axes: X, Y, Z. 4. 5 and neutral position

Jog key +

Positive traverse direction

Jog key -

Negative traverse direction

Jog key

Rapid traverse for jog keys and handwheel

Function keys

3 x: F1, F2, F3

Handwheel

100 I/U

Electrical data Operating voltage for switching signals

24 V

Operating voltage for handwheel

5V

Power consumption 5 V

approx. 90mA

Handwheel signals

RS 422


24 V

2A

NC

Enabling buttons

24 V

2A

NO

General data Enclosure

ergonomically optimized housing made from polyamide 6, control elements arranged by sense of touch

Mounting

2 magnetic clamps

Connecting cables

Spiral cable 1.5 m; can be stretched to beyond 3.5m; connector with pin contacts

CE conformity

yes

Mechanical data Dimensions approx.

Height: 250 mm

Weight

approx. 0.8 kg without connection cable

Width: 110 mm

Depth: 90 mm

Ambient conditions Temperature ranges

Application/operation Storage/transport 0 ... 55 °C

Temperature change

-20 ... 60 °C

within 1 minute max. 0.2 K

Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5 Within 1 minute Safety class

Max. 0.1% IP65

Connection kit

476

Flange socket

made of metal with femal contacts and dummy plug

Dummy plug

for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit


Mini-handheld unit 19.6 Spare parts

19.6

Spare parts The following spare parts are available:

Item name

Order number

Can be used with 6FX20071AD00

1AD10

2 x ZST PVC connectors

1AD01

1AD11

3 x ZST PVC connectors

1AD02

1AD12

3 x ZST Metal connectors

Servo handwheel (5 VDC, A / B - push-pull, without dial)

1009439

X

X

X

X

X

X

Rotary selector switch (6 positions, without dial)

1009219

X

X

X

X

X

X

EMERGENCY STOP button (complete with keyset, label and switching element)

1009221

X

X

X

X

X

X

Enabling button, 2 stages (complete)

1009233

X

X

Enabling button, 3 stages (complete)

1009561

X

X

X

X

Set of operator buttons (for servo handwheel, rotary selector, enable key)

1009227

X

X

X

X

X

Connection cable (coiled, wired on PVC connector, connection end preassembled)

1009081

X

Connection cable (coiled, wired on metal connector, connection end preassembled)

1009700

Connection cable (straight, wired on PVC connector, connection end preassembled)

1009279

Connection cable (straight, wired on metal connector, connection end preassembled)

1009710

Flange-mounting socket-outlet, PVC (complete with seals and contacts)

1009084

Flange-mounting socket-outlet, metal (complete with seals and contacts)

1009714

Jumper connector, PVC (with jumpered EMERGENCY STOP contacts)

1009046

Jumper connector, metal (with jumpered EMERGENCY STOP contacts)

1009713

Connector housing PVC (without contacts)

1009040

Connector housing metal (without contacts, with anti-kink protection)

1009694


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

477

Mini-handheld unit 19.6 Spare parts Can be used with 6FX2007Coupling ring connector (for PVC connector mini HHU)

1009518

X

X

X

X

Set of crimp contact sockets for PVC connector (consisting of: 10 x 0.12-0.25mm2, 30 x 0.20-0.56 mm2)

1009222

X

X

X

X

Set of crimp contact sockets for metal connector (consisting of: 30 x 0.14-1.00 mm2)

1009723

Set of crimp contact pins for PVC connector (consisting of: 10 x 0.12-0.25 mm2, 30 x 0.20-0.56 mm2)

1009223

Set of crimp contact pins for metal connector (consisting of: 30 x 0.14-1.00 mm2)

1009724

Crimp contacts:

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Tool: Ejector for crimp socket and pin contacts, PVC connector

0080811

X

X

X

X

Assembly tools for EMERGENCY STOP button

1009224

X

X

X

X

Pressure-cap remover for enable key

1009217

X

X

Extraction tool for contact insulator, metal connector

1009725

Order address R & D Steuerungstechnik GmbH + Co KG Service department Hocksteiner Weg 87-95 D-41189 Mönchengladbach Tel. +49 (0) 2166–5506–34 Fax +49 (0) 2166–5506–55

478


Mini-handheld unit 19.7 Accessories

19.7

Accessories The following components are available as accessories for the mini handheld unit: Component

Order number:

Remarks

Connection kit

6FX2006-1BG10

Flange socket made of metal with socket contacts and dummy plug for overriding the emergency stop circuit

Adapter plate

6FX2006-1BG44

Adapter plate for installing the metal flange socket in the plastic flange socket installlation location


479

Mini-handheld unit 19.7 Accessories

480


Handheld unit / distributor box 20.1

20

Description The handheld unit and the distributor box are offered in two wiring variants. 1. in the variant with a 2-channel enable key and 3-core connection of these keys, 2. in the variant with a 2-channel enable key and 4-core connection of these keys. In this version, monitoring for cross short-circuit in the enable circuit is possible. Due to modified connector design, these HHUs can only be operated on the distributor box designed for the corresponding mode. In the version with 4-core connection of the enable keys, the connector insert of the connector is arranged coded at an angle of 45° to avoid destruction of the unit by accidental wrong connection. A retaining shell is available as an accessory for B-MPI and A-MPC type HHUs. The HHU can therefore also be securely fastened to non-magnetic surfaces (see section: "Accessories"). Note The handheld unit is designed for operation with SINUMERIK. It cannot be used with SIMATIC.


481

Handheld unit / distributor box 20.2 Operating and display elements

20.2


20.2.1

View

Handheld unit

(1)

482

1 enabling button designed as a 3-position switch, two channels

(2)

Emergency Stop button, two channels

(3)

Two-line digital display 2 x 16 characters

(4)

20 keys freely assignable by user

(5)

16 LEDs freely controllable by user

(6)

Override switch with 12 positions

(7)

Key-switch with On/Off position

(8)

Electronic handwheel

(9)

Connecting cable, 10 m, or max. 3.5 m as a coiled cable

(10)

Suspension lug

(11)

Magnetic clamp



Key symbols The key symbols are on a slide-in label that can be changed as necessary. The labeling strip is located between the PCB and the front of the housing and can be accessed from the right.

Replacing labeling strips To change the labeling strip, proceed as follows: ● Remove the labeling strip carefully to approx. halfway using flat pliers. ● Slide half of the new labeling strip under the old one. ● Remove the old labeling strip and slide the new one in to its final position.

Magnetic clamp The magnetic clamp is not intended for permanent securing the HHU to the perpendicular sheet metal parts. CAUTION The HHU cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX 2002-4EA04-IAF0 (or other lengths) since the bus terminators are integral components of this cable. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalog Literature: /Z/ Catalog NCZ If the connection between the HHU and the distributor box is interrupted (HHU cable pulled out), an emergency stop is triggered. There is no automatic EMERGENCY STOP overriding function.


483


20.2.2

Description

Emergency stop button, NC contact, 24V/2A contact load Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when ∎

people are at risk,

∎


As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions

Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 3-position switch and is located at the left of the handheld unit. The buttons are NO contacts. They are two-channel keys. The connection is 3- or 4-core, depending on type. A 4-core connection allows cross short-circuit monitoring in the enable circuit. 24V/2A contact load.

Handwheel The electronic handwheel supplies two tracks with rectangular signals. The signals can be tapped from the distributor box and taken to the NCU connector X121 via the cable distributor.

Keylock switch Keyswitch with two positions is transmitted to the PLC.

Override switch Switch with 12 positions is transmitted to the PLC.

Keys 20 keys are transmitted to the PLC and are freely assignable by the user. The labeling symbols can be changed (unscrew HHU).

LED 16 LEDs in the keys, freely controllable via the PLC.

Digital display 2-tier digital display, each with 16 characters controlled via the PLC

484



Internal circuit of HHU and distributor box with 3-core connection for enabling button (PHUJHQF\6WRSEXWWRQ

+DQGZKHHO

(QDEOLQJEXWWRQ 7

++8

;

'LVWULEXWRUER[

;

$ $ % % =6 =6 9 9 &20

(0(5*(1& "Rear side"). NOTICE Make sure that all cables are routed so that they do not come into contact with chafing edges.

530


Machine control panel: MCP 483C IE 21.6 Technical data

21.6




Front: IP54

Mounting frame: IP65

Approvals

Rear side: IP00

CE / cULus

Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption, max.

24 V DC Board

Handwheels

Lamps

Total

5W

2 x 0.9 W

43.2 W (6x 7.2 W) *)

50 W


Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm

Depth: 106 mm Mounting depth: 54.5 mm


approx. 2 kg Operation


Vibratory load

10 - 58 Hz: 0.15 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 2g 3M6 according to EN 60721-3-3

5 –9 Hz: 6.2 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 2g 2M3 according to EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing

15 g, 11 ms 18 shocks 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

15 g, 6 ms 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2





Permissible change in the relative air humidity



EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-25 ... 55 ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 65% (annual mean) and max. 85% over max. 2 months / year

5 ... 95% at 25°C

≤. 6% /h

*) If the outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) are loaded with the max. permissible current of 0.3 A, this results in additional power consumption of 36 W. The total power consumption is then 50 W.


531

Machine control panel: MCP 483C IE 21.7 Spare parts

21.7

Spare parts

21.7.1

Overview Table 21-16 Spare part kits for machine control panel MCP 483C IE

21.7.2

Name

Description

EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton

22 mm actuating element, 40mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protection, latching, red, with holder, unlit

Qua Order number ntity 1

3SB3000-1HA20

Switching element with 2 contact pairs (1 NO + 1 NC), 2-pin, screw terminal (3rd contact pair can be connected additionally)

1

3SB3400-0A

Set of keys

Set of keys for machine control panel

10

6FC5148–0AA03–0AA0

Rapid traverse dial

for 16-stage rotary switch MCP 483C

20

6FC5248–0AF30–0AA0

Rotary switch for spindle

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, override spindle / rapid traverse, electronic rotary switch 1x 16G, T=24, cap, knob, pointer, dials for spindle and rapid traverse

1

6FC5247–0AF12–1AA0

Rotary switch for feed

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, override feed / rapid traverse, electronic rotary switch 1x 23G, T=32, cap, knob, pointer, dials for feed and rapid traverse

1

6FC5247–0AF13–1AA0

Set of tension jacks

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, tension jack set for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm

9

6FC5248–0AF14–0AA0

Replacing the rotary switch Note For the MCP 483C IE, use only electronic rotary switches.

Removing the rotary switch 1. Lever the cover (3) off of the rotary button (2) (snap-on connection!). 2. Remove the nut of the collet (1) with a wrench (width 10). 3. Remove the entire rotary button (2). 4. Remove the lock nut (5) on the shaft of the rotary switch (4) with a wrench (width 14). 5. Remove the connector on the end of the rotary switch cable from the socket. 6. Remove the rotary switch

532



Figure 21-12 Removal of rotary switch

(1)

Nut of the collet

(2)

Rotary knob

(3)

Cap

(4)

Rotary switch shaft

(5)

Lock nut

(6)

Scale

Installing the rotary switch 1. Push the O-ring (1) onto the shaft of the new rotary switch as a seal. 2. Insert the rotary switch into the front cutout so that pressure is applied to the O-ring. 3. Screw the lock nut (4) on the shaft of the rotary switch from the front with a wrench (width 14) (tightening torque: 3 Nm). 4. Connect arrow ring (3) and rotary button (5). 5. Slide both parts onto the shaft of the rotary switch. 6. Align the arrow point on the ring with position "0" on the scale. 7. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary knob by hand and using a torque spanner with 2 Nm torque. 8. Place the cover (2) on the rotary button and snap it into position. 9. Fold and fasten the connecting cable (6) as shown in the figure on the right.


533


Figure 21-13 Installation of rotary switch

(1)

O-ring

Detail diagram of the connector

(2)

Cap

(3)

Arrow ring

(4)

Lock nut

(5)

Rotary knob

(6)

Connector (see detail diagram)

(7)

Connecting cable

(8)

Terminal board

For information about the pin assignment of the interfaces X30 / X31, see section: "Interfaces" Proceed in the same way to install the second rotary switch. NOTICE It is essential to use the correct tightening torques.

534


Machine control panel: MCP 483C IE 21.8 Accessories

21.8

Accessories Accessories pack (for delivery ex works) Keyset

9

Key covers for turning (labeled)

30

Ergo grey key covers (for labeling)

30

Clear key covers (for labeling)

Table 21-17 Accessories available for order Component

Description

Number

Order number

Quadratic key cover (for labeling)

1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each of red / green / yellow / medium gray

1

6FC5248–0AF12–0AA0


1 set of 90, clear

1

6FC5248–0AF21–0AA0

Cable set

For additional MCP control devices, length 500 mm

60

6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0

Handwheel connection

Handwheel cable, max. length: 5 m

1

6FX8002-2CP00-1xxx *)

*) XXX is the length code: A = 0, B = 1 etc.

3LQ

/HQJWKsDFFRUGLQJWROHQJWKFRGH

s

/DEHOLQJ0/)%OHQJWKLQP PDQXIDFWXUHU PRQWK\HDURISURGXFWLRQ

6KLHOG

*1 *( 25 57 %/ 9, %5 6:

3 0 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 3 0 6KLHOG

*1 "Rear side"). NOTICE Make sure that all cables are routed so that they do not come into contact with chafing edges.

558


Machine control panel: MCP 483 IE 22.6 Technical data

22.6

Technical data Safety Safety class


Degree of protection acc. to DIN IEC 529

Front: IP54

Mounting frame: IP65


Rear side: IP00

CE / cULus


24 V DC Board

Handwheels

Lamps

Total

5W

2 x 0.9 W

43.2 W (6x 7.2 W) *)

50 W



Depth: 106.7 mm Mounting depth: 53.9 mm

Weight

Approx. 1.6 kg


Operation

Transport (in product packaging)

Vibration stressing

10–58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58–200 Hz: 1g 3M4 per DIN EN 60068-2-6

10-9 Hz: 3.1 mm 9–200 Hz: 1g 2M2 according to EN 60068-2-6

Shock stressing

5g, 30 ms 100 shocks 3M4 per DIN EN 60068-2-27

15g, 11 ms 1000 shocks 2M1 per DIN IEC 60068-2-27








EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-25 ... 55 ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 65% (annual mean) and max. 85% over max. 2 months / year

5 ... 95% at 25°C

≤ 6% /h



559

Machine control panel: MCP 483 IE 22.7 Replacement parts

22.7

Replacement parts

22.7.1

Overview Table 22-20 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 483 IE

22.7.2

Name

Description

Qua Order number ntity

22 mm actuating element, 40 mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protection, latching, red, with holder, unlit

1

3SB3000-1HA20


Contact block with 2 contacts 1 NO + 1 NC, 2-pole screw terminal

1

3SB3400-0A

Keylock switch

Keyswitch with key

1

6FC5247–0AF02–0AA0

Sets of keys

Set of keys (10 sets) for machine control panel

1 set

6FC5148–0AA03–0AA0


Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm

1 set

6FC5248–0AF14–0AA0

Override for rotary spindle switch

Spindle/rapid traverse override, solid-state rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle and rapid-traverse dials

1

6FC5247–0AF12–1AA0

Rotary feed override switch

Feed rate/rapid traverse, override solid-state rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials

1

6FC5247–0AF13–1AA0

Replacing the rotary switch


560



Figure 22-11 Removal of rotary switch

(1)

Nut of the collet

(2)

Rotary knob

(3)

Cap

(4)

Rotary switch shaft

(5)

Lock nut

(6)

Scale



561



(1)

O-ring


(2)

Cap

(3)

Arrow ring

(4)

Lock nut

(5)

Rotary knob

(6)


(7)

Connecting cables

(8)

Terminal board

For information about the pin assignment of the interfaces X30 / X31, see section: "Interfaces" → "Description". Proceed in the same way to install the second rotary switch. NOTICE It is essential to use the correct tightening torques.

562


Machine control panel: MCP 483 IE 22.8 Accessories

22.8

Accessories

22.8.1

Overview

Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 483 IE Component

Description

Quantity

Order No.:

Slide-in labels-

Slide-in label, (3 films, A4)

1 set

6FC5248–0AF22–1AA1

Cable set for additional control devices

Cable set (60 units) for additional control devices for the machine control panels Length: 500 mm

1 set

6FC5247–0AA35–0AA0

Cable for handwheel connection *)

Cable for handwheel connection max. cable length: 5 m

1

6FX8002–2CP00–1xxx

*) see Figure

'LPHQVLRQVLQPP

3LQ

/HQJWKDFFRUGLQJWROHQJWKFRGH ¢

¢

6KLHOG

3 0 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 3 0

*1 *1 "Rear side").

Overview ● X10: Power supply interface 3-pin Phoenix terminal block ● X20: Operator panel interface (PROFIBUS DP) 9-pin Sub-D socket connector ● X30: Interface for connecting rotary feed override switch (23 graduations) 2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock ● X31: Interface for connecting rotary spindle override switch (16 graduations) 2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock ● X50: Interface to 4-way keyswitch 1 x 6-pin plug connector ● X51-X54: Interface for additional control devices (buttons incl. 24V lamps) each 1 x 4-pin plug connector ● X60/X61: Connection for 2 handwheels (TTL/DTTL) 15-pin sub-D socket each ● X70: Connection of direct keys (16 digital inputs; opto-decoupled)) 2 x 10-pin plug connector ● Equipotential bonding The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw.

Interfaces for additional control devices Connector designation:

X51, ..., X54

Type:

4-pin plug connector

X51 / X52 Only switches (passive inputs) may be connected to the inputs X51 / X52. Table 23-1

Pin assignment for connectors X51/X52

Pin

Name

Meaning

1

KT-IN 1/4 *)

Customer key 1/4

2

KT-IN 2/5 *)

Customer key 2/5

3

KT-IN 3/6 *)

Customer key 3/6

4

M

Chassis ground

Type

I V

*) KT-IN 1/2/3: X51; KT-IN 4/5/6: X52


575

Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.3 Interfaces

3,3V 10K 1

3,3V

X51 KT-IN1

2

KT-IN2

3

KT-IN3

4

M 3,3V

M

10K 1

3,3V

X52 KT-IN4

2

KT-IN5

3

KT-IN6

4

M M

Figure 23-4

Circuit for inputs X51 / X52

Outputs X53 / X54 The outputs X53 / X54 are intended to activate lamps in the buttons. We would recommend using 1.2 W lamps with max. 0.3 A per output. High-side switches which limit the current during short circuits are used as output drivers. CAUTION Do not connect any relays, valves or other inductive loads.

Table 23-2 Pin

Pin assignment for connectors X53/X54 Name

Meaning

Type

1

KT-OUT 1/4 *)

Customer key 1/4 lamp

2

KT–OUT 2/5 *)


3

KT–OUT 3/6 *)


4

M24

Ground 24V

O V

*) KT–OUT 1/2/3: X53; KT–OUT 4/5/6: X54

576



High Side Switch P24 KT-OUT1

X53

1

KT-OUT2

2

KT-OUT3

3

M24

4

M24 P24 KT-OUT4

X54

1

KT-OUT5

2

KT-OUT6

3

M24

4

M24

Figure 23-5

Circuit for outputs X53 / X54

Interfaces for override rotary switch Connector designation:

X30 / X31

Type:

2 x 5-pin plug connector, acc. to IEC603-13 with coding

Table 23-3


Pin

Name

Type

Meaning

1

N.C.

-

not used

2

N.C.

-

not used

3

M

V

Chassis ground

4

N.C.

-

not used

5

P5

V

5 V supply

6

OV_VS16

Rotary override switch, position/value 16

7

OV_VS8


8

OV_VS4

9

OV_VS2


10

OV_VS1



I


577


Interfaces for 2 handwheels Connector designation:

X60, X61

Type:

15-pin D-sub female connector

Table 23-4

Pin assignment for connectors X60/X61 *)

Pin

Name

Meaning

1

PV5

Supply voltage 5V

Type

2

M

Chassis ground

3

HWi_A *)

Handwheel pulses track A

4

Hwi_XA

Handwheel pulses track A (negated)

I

5

N.C.

not used

-

V

6

HWi_B

Handwheel pulses track B

7

HWi_XB

Handwheel pulses track B (negated)

8

N.C.

not used

-

9

PV5

Supply voltage 5V

V

10

N.C.

not used

-

11

M

Chassis ground

V

12 - 15

N.C.

not used

-

I

*) I = 1: X60; i = 2: X61

Interface for direct control keys Connector designation:

X70

Type:

2 x 10-pin male connector, 2.54 mm grid

Table 23-5

578

Pin assignment for connector X70

Pin

Name

Meaning

Type

i = 1, ..., 16

DT_i

Direct control key i

I

17, 18

P5V_TACO

P5 keyboard controller

19, 20

M_TACO

M keyboard controller

V



Power supply interface Connector designation:

X10

Type:

3-pin Phoenix terminal block, straight

Table 23-6

X10 pin assignments


Pin

Name

Meaning

Type

1

P24

24V potential

2

M24

Ground 24V

3

SHIELD

Shield connection

V power supply

579

Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.4 Mounting

23.4

Mounting

Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483 482.6

155

53.5 52.8

20.2

A

95.9 Rz 120

95.8

132.4

15.3

132.6

1,5mm-6mm

37

A

164.6

114.7

37 A-A 2:1

580

(1)

In the sealing area

(2)

Mounting frame

(3)

Tension jack (9 parts) tightening torque 0.8 Nm

(4)

Mounting frame


Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.4 Mounting

Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached by means of 9 tension jacks (tightening torque 0.8 Nm; see dimension drawing).

Figure 23-6

Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483

Mounting position Max. 60° to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60°, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 °C.


581

Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.5 Settings via DIP switch S3

23.5

Settings via DIP switch S3

Delivery condition Table 23-7

Delivery condition setting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Meaning / value

on

off

on

off

on

on

off

off

off

off Series

Note The delivery condition setting MUST be changed in accordance with the "Assignment of the DIP switch S3" table (below).

Connection type: PROFIBUS DP For PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 10: Table 23-8 1

Assignment of DIP switch S3 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Meaning / value PROFIBUS

582

off

off

off

off

off

off

off

–

on

on 0

on

off

off

off

off

off

off

–

on

on 1

off

on

off

off

off

off

off

–

on

on 2

on

on

off

off

off

off

off

–

on

on 3

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

–

–

on

off

on

on

on

on

on

–

on

on 125

off

on

on

on

on

on

on

–

on

on 126

–

: (etc.)


Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

23.6

Connection via PROFIBUS DP

23.6.1

Overview This section describes: ● Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project. ● Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 "HW config." ● Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and user program (optional)

Note The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the special requirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about working with SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation or online help.

Note Both units can be linked up using the supplied 20-pin ribbon cable in order to transfer the direct control key signals of the operator panel front to the COM board of the machine control panel. The direct control key module therefore no longer needs to be connected.

23.6.2

Prerequisites The following components are needed as prerequisites for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration: ● SIMATIC STEP 7 ● GSD file of DP slave MCP ● Graphics files of DP slave MCP

SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later: ● SIMATIC STEP 7 version 5.2 or later, Service Pack 1


583


GSD file The GSD file of the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later: ● SI008109.GSD version 1.0 or later A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For each DP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DP slave can be found in the hardware catalog. The DP slave MCP is shown in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the hardware catalog of “HW Config” under the following path: ● Profile: Standard PROFIBUS–DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in "HW config" use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Before installing the GSD file, please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files.

Graphics files The graphics files belonging to the GSD file: ● SI8109_N.BMP ● SI8109_S.BMP are used to display the DP slave MCP in the "HW config" station window. They are automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed. They must be located in the same directory as the GSD file.

23.6.3

Functions of the machine control panel The machine control panel offers the following functions: ● Standard ● Handwheel ● Additional I/Os

Standard The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specific keys and outputs: ● Input data: 8 bytes ● Output data: 8 bytes The input/output data is compatible with the input/output data from the previous machine control panel: The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 483 is compatible with the input/output data from the previous machine control panel: ● Machine control panel (MCP), MPI ● 19’’ machine control panel

584



Handwheel The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can be connected to the machine control panel: Absolute value 1. Handwheel

Absolute value 2. Handwheel

Low byte

High byte

For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit absolute value relative to the starting value. The starting value for the sensor counter in the handwheel is 0. The absolute values are transferred in big endian format. The data for both handwheels is always transferred. The absolute value for a handwheel that is not connected is always 0.

Additional I/Os The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs: ● Direct control keys ● Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6) ● Rotary switch with the following distribution: ● Input data: 5 bytes Direct control keys

(OP 012)

User keys

1. Rotary switch

Low byte

2. Rotary switch High byte

● Output data: 2 bytes Reserved always 0

Customer LEDs

Low byte

23.6.4

High byte

Configuring the DP slave MCP This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in the figure by way of example. The hardware configuration has the following modules: ● SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP ● SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard, handwheel, extended


585


Procedure Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration (1) 2. Set the PROFIBUS address 3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functions required. (2) 4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots.

HW-Konfig - [SINUMERIK840D (Konfiguration) -- PROFIBUS-MCP] Station Bearbeiten Einfügen Zielsystem Ansicht Extras Fenster Hilfe

PROFIBUS(1): DP-Mastersystem (1)

(0) 810D/840D 2

PLC 317-2DP 2AJ10

X1 X2

MPI DP IM 360

3 4

Profil: Standard

I/O NC/RC MOTION CONTROL SINUMERIK MCP Universalmodul

(9) SINUME

S7 FM-NCU

standard

standard, handwheel standard, extended standard, handwheel, ex

PROFIBUS(1): DP-Mastersystem (1) Steckplatz 1 2 3

Figure 23-7

DP-Kennung 55 2EA 192

Bestellnummer / Bezeichnung

E-Adresse

A-Adresse

standard, handwheel, extended --> standard, handwheel, exten --> standard, handwheel, exten

0...7 258...261 8...12

0...7

Kom...

8...9

Configuration with DP slave MCP

Requirements: S7 project The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP is to be added: ● You have created the S7 project ● You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capable SINUMERIK controller

586



Adding a DP slave MCP To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog. The DP slave MCP can be found at: ● Profile: Standard PROFIBUS–DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol:

When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to the configuration.

Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes to a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration.

PROFIBUS parameters Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration, the "Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP" dialog box is displayed. The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: ● PROFIBUS address ● Data transfer rate ● Profile

Dialog Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP Tab card: parameters Address: Button: “Properties...” Dialog: Properties – PROFIBUS Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK


587


Note The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module (DIP switch S3) (see Section: "Settings via DIP switch S3" There is no automatic adjustment! The following data must agree: 1. SIMATIC S7 configuration of DP slave MCP PROFIBUS address 2. Machine control panel MCP 483 PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3)

Adding a module The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. The modules in the hardware catalog are positioned below the DP slave MCP. The following modules are available: ● Universal module (not applicable) ● standard ● standard, handwheel ● standard, extended ● standard, handwheel, extended Module: standard The module transfers the data for the "Standard" function: ● Input data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes)

● Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes)

588


Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Module: standard, handwheel The module transfers the data for the "Standard" and "Handwheel" functions: ● Input data: 12 bytes Standard data (8 bytes)

Absolute value 1st handwheel (2 bytes)

Absolute value 2nd handwheel (2 bytes)

Low byte

High byte


Module: standard, extended The module transfers the data for the "Standard" and "Additional I/Os" functions: ● Input data: 13 bytes Standard data (8 bytes)

Direct control keys (OP 012) (2 bytes)

Customer keys (1 byte)

1. Rotary switch (1 byte)

Low byte

2. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte


Reserved (1 byte)

Customer LEDs (1 byte)

Low byte

High byte

Module: standard, handwheel, extended The module transfers the data for the "Standard", "Handwheel" and "Additional I/Os" functions: ● Input data: 17 bytes Standard data (8 bytes)

Absolute value 1st handwheel (2 bytes)

Absolute value 2nd handwheel (2 bytes)

Direct control keys (OP 012) (2 bytes)

Low byte

Customer keys (1 byte)

1. Rotary switch (1 byte)

2. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte

● Output data: 10 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte


Reserved (1 byte)

Customer LEDs (1 byte) High byte

589


I/O addresses If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the input/output addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the "Properties - DP slave" dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be set here.

23.6.5

Linking the DP slave MCP This section describes how to link the DP slave MCP ● in the basic PLC program for transferring the standard input / output data in the VDI interface ● to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response to a module failure Note "Handwheel" function The "Handwheel" function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program. "Additional I/Os" function Processing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machine manufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program.

PLC basic program In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basic PLC program, the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the communication parameters for function block FB1. Function block FB1 The communications parameters of the MCP are called MCPx... (x = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels are supported by the basic PLC program. To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly. This is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility. To operate a machine control panel MCP 483 as a DP slave, only the following parameters are relevant: MCPNum:

INT

// see below: Note

MCP1In:

POINTER

// Address of input signals

MCP1Out:

POINTER

// Address of output signals

MCP2In:

POINTER

// Address of input signals

MCP2Out:

POINTER

// Address of output signals

The MCP2... parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition to the 1st MCP:

590


Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs: MCP1Stop:

BOOL

// Transfer of relevant operator components:

MCP2Stop:

BOOL

// FALSE = start; TRUE = stop

MCP1NotSend:

BOOL

// Send and receive mode of the relevant

MCP2NotSend:

BOOL

// operator components: // FALSE = Send and receive is active // TRUE = only receive is active

Note Parameter: MCPNum Up to and including basic PLC program, Version 7.1, for the parameter: MCPNum, 0 should always be specified. Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSend These parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP. References A detailed description of the basic PLC program and/or FB 1 function block can be found in: /FB1/

Function description of bases: Basic P3 PLC program Section: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section

VDI interface parameter assignment The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface: ● FC 19: Machine control panel MCP 483, version M (milling) ● FC 25: Machine control panel MCP 483, version T (turning)

Note Function blocks FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. It is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility to call the block correctly and/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters. References A detailed description of the function blocks for transferring the machine control panel signals to the VDI interface can be found in: /FB1/

Function description of bases: Basic P3 PLC program Section: FC 19: MCP_IFM ... Section: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 ... Section: FC 25: MCP_IFT ...


591

Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Example The following example shows the communication parameter settings for function block FB 1 for a machine control panel: MCPNum

:= 0

// Number of active MCP

MCP1In

:= P#E 0.0

// Address of input data (8 bytes)

MCP1Out

:= P#A 0.0

// Address of output data (8 bytes)

MCP1StatSend

:= P#A 0.0

// Presetting; no meaning

MCP1StatRec

:= P#A 0.0


MCP1BusAdr

:= 0


MCP1Timeout

:= S5T#700MS


MCP1Cycl

:= S5T#200MS


MCPMPI

:= FALSE

// MCP/HT 6 is operated on the “extended ” MPI bus

MCP1Stop

:= FALSE


MCP1NotSend

:= FALSE


MCPSDB210

:= FALSE


PLC user program If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does not check for module failure. In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave: ● PLC operating system ● PROFIBUS controller If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP.

Customized response The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MCP failure: ● OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt ● OB 86: Rack failure Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data. Note In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI, the following alarm is triggered by the basic PLC program: • Alarm "40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure"; with x = 0, 1 If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user (machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm.

592



23.6.6

Input/output image of DP slave MCP

Arrangement: Keys and LEDs A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit. The key and the LED have the same number. ● Key: Sxy = Key number xy ● LED: LEDxy = LED number xy The Fig. shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine control panel together with their internal designation. For the sake of clarity, the LED designations are not shown in full.

/(' /(' /(' /(' /(' /('

6

Figure 23-8

/(' /(' /('

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

/(' .H\

6

6

6

6

Designation of keys and LEDs


593


Input image Table 23-9

Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP Signals from machine control panel (keys)

Byte

Bit7

Bit6

D

C

REPOS S01

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

B

O

JOG S09

TEACH S10

MDA S11

AUTO S12

REF S02

var. INC S03

10000 INC S08

1000 INC S07

100 INC S06

10 INC S05

1 INC S04

Keyswitch

Keyswitch

Feed Start S47

*Feed Stop S49

*NC Stop

position 2

*Spindle Stop S47

NC Start

position 0

Spindle Start S48

S16

S15

RESET S13

Keyswitch

Single Block S14

I

D

B

O

Spindle override

EB n+0

EB n+1

EB n+2

EB n+3

Bit1

Bit0

Operating mode

Machine functions

EB n+4

position 1

Feed rate override Keyswitch

Direction keys R15 S46

R13 S44

R14 S45

position 3

R2 S33

R3 S34

R5 S36

R12 S43

T9 S25

T10 S256

T11 S27

T1 S17

T2 S18

T3 S19

EB n+5

C

Axis selection R1 S32

R4 S35

R7 S38

R10 S41

R9 S40

R8 S39

R6 S37

T14 S30

T15 S31

not used

T6 S22

T7 S23

T8 S24

Axis selection

EB n+6

R11 S42

Freely assignable customer keys

EB n+7

T12 S28

T13 S29

Freely assignable customer keys T4 S20

T5 S21

Signals marked with * are inverse signals

594



Output image Table 23-10 Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP Signals to machine control panel (LEDs) Byte

Bit7

Bit6

1000 INC LED07

100 INC LED06

Feed Start LED50

Feed Stop LED49

R13 LED44

R1 LED32

AB n+0

AB n+1

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

10 INC LED05

1 INC LED04

JOG LED09

TEACH LED10

NC Start

NC Stop LED15

REPOS LED01

REF LED02

var. INC LED03

10000 INC LED08

R7 LED38

R10 LED41

Single Block

Spindle Start

Spindle Stop

LED48

LED47

R6 LED37

R15 LED46

T14 LED30

T15 LED31

Axis selection R2 LED33

Machine function

AB n+2

MDA LED11

AUTO LED12

Machine functions

Axis selection

AB n+3

Bit0

Operating mode

LED16 R4 LED35

Bit1

LED14

Axis selection R3 LED34

R5 LED36

AB n+4

R12 LED43

R11 LED42

R9 LED40

R8 LED39

Freely assignable customer keys T9 LED25

T10 LED26

T11 LED27

AB n+5

T12 LED28

T13 LED29

Freely assignable customer keys T1 LED17

T2 LED18

T3 LED19

T4 LED20

T5 LED21

T6 LED22

T7 LED23

T8 LED24

AB n+6

not used

not used

not used

not used

not used

not used

RESET1) LED13

R141) LED45

AB n+7

not used

not used

not used

not used

not used

not used

not used

not used

1)

New signal for MCP 483


595

Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.7 Technical data

23.7



Degree of protection to EN 60529

Front: IP65

Keyswitch: IP54


Rear side: IP00

CE


24 V DC Board 7W

Lamps 7.2 W (6 x 1.2 W) *)

Handwheels 2 x 0.9 W

Total 16 W



Distance from NCU/PCU

Depth: 70 mm Mounting depth: 38 mm

PROFIBUS DP: 100 m

Weight

Approx. 1.6 kg


Operation


Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing









EN 60721-3-3

EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

3K5

1K3 / 2K4


-20 ... 60ºC

Max. 10 K/h

Max. 18 K/h

5 ... 80% at 25°C

5 ... 95% at 25°C max. 0.1% /min


596


Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.8 Spare parts

23.8

Spare parts

23.8.1

Overview Table 23-11 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 483

23.8.2

Name

Description

Quan- Order number tity 1

3SB3000-1HA20

EMERGENCY STOP key

22 mm actuating element, 40 mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protection, latching, red, with holder, unlit Contact block with 2 contacts 1 NO + 1 NC, 2pole screw terminal

1

3SB3400-0A

Keylock switch

Keyswitch with key

1

6FC5247–0AF02–0AA0

Sets of keys


1 set

6FC5148–0AA03–0AA0


Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm

1 set

6FC5248–0AF14–0AA0



1

6FC5247–0AF12–1AA0



1

6FC5247–0AF13–1AA0

Replacing the rotary switch



597


Figure 23-9

Removal of rotary switch

(1)

Nut of the collet

(2)

Rotary knob

(3)

Cap

(4)

Rotary switch shaft

(5)

Lock nut

(6)

Scale


598




(1)

O-ring

(2)

Cap

(3)

Arrow ring

(4)

Lock nut

(5)

Rotary knob

(6)


(7)

Connecting cables

(8)

Terminal board


For information about the pin assignment of the interfaces X30 / X31, see section: "Interfaces" Proceed in the same way to install the second rotary switch. NOTICE It is essential to use the correct tightening torques.


599

Machine control panel: MCP 483 23.9 Accessories

23.9

Accessories

23.9.1

Overview

Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 483 Component

Description

Slide-in labels-

SINUMERIK 810D/840D slide-in labels (3 A4 films)

Quantity

Order number

1 set

6FC5248–0AF22–1AA1

1 set

6FC5247–0AA35–0AA0

Cable set for SINUMERIK 810D/840D cable set (60 additional control pieces) for additional control devices of devices machine control panels Length: 500 mm

23.9.2

Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels

Figure 23-11 Machine control panel MCP 483

The machine control panel (MCP) shown above is the standard shipped variant. You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. A printable blank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. A spare parts kit containing three blank films is also available: MLFB: 6FC5248–0AF22–1AA1 (Item No. A5E00179123)

600



Figure 23-12 Blank film for MCP 483

Preparing slide-in labels Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on the supplied film or how to create your own individual film: The software on the DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) includes four files for the blank films: ● Template_M_MCP483.doc [default assignment for milling - standard; (A)] ● Template_T_MCP483.doc [defaults for turning; (B)] ● Template_MCP483.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579; (C)] ● Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, inscription on labels as jpg file (D) Files Template_M_MCP483.doc, Template_T_MCP483.doc and Template_MCP483.doc include a table function showing the corresponding keyboard positions. An example of each of the MCP files (milling and turning) is given below:


601


(A)

"Rear side"). NOTICE Make sure that all cables are routed so that they do not come into contact with chafing edges.

626


Machine control panel: MCP 310C IE 24.6 Technical data

24.6



Degree of protection acc. to DIN IEC 529

Front: IP54


Rear side: IP00 CE / cULus


24 V DC Board 5W

Lamps 43.2 W (6 x 7.2 W) *)

Handwheels 2 x 0.9 W

Total 50 W



Depth: 85.2 mm Mounting depth (with cables): 53.9 mm Mounting depth (without cables): 29.1 mm

Weight

Approx. 1.2 kg


Operation

Transport (in product packaging)

Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.15 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 2g acc. to EN 60068-2-6 (test Fc)

5 – 9 Hz: 3,5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g according to EN 60068-2-6

Shock stressing

15g, 11 ms 18 shocks (3 in each direction) acc. to EN 60068-1

15g, 11 ms 18 shocks (3 in each direction) acc. to EN 60068-2-27




Not permitted

Supply air

Applicable standards Climate class

Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation

Storage

Transport (in transport packing)

DIN EN 60721-3-3

DIN EN 60721-3-1

DIN EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

-25 °C ... 55 °C

-40 ... 70 ºC

3K3

Temperature limits

0 ... 45 ºC (at the front) 0 ... 55 °C (at the rear)

Temperature change

max. perm.: ≤ 0.5 K/min (as average over 5 min corr. to 30 K/h)

Limits for relative humidity

5 ... 90%


≤ 6% /h

max. perm.: -40 °C / +30 °C 70 °C / 15 °C 5 ... 95%



627


24.7

Spare parts

24.7.1

Overview Table 24-18 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 310C IE

24.7.2

Name

Description

Quantity

Order number

EMERGENCY STOP latching pushbutton

22 mm actuating element, 40mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protection, latching, red, with holder, unlit

1

3SB3000-1HA20

Contact block

with 2 contact pairs (1 NO + 1 NC), 2-pin, screw terminal (3rd contact pair can be connected additionally)

1

3SB3400-0A

Sets of keys


1 set

6FC5148–0AA03–0AA0


Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm

1 set

6FC5248–0AF14–0AA0



1

6FC5247–0AF12–1AA0



1

6FC5247–0AF13–1AA0

Replacement Replacement of the rotary switch is described in chapter: "Machine control panel: MCP 483 IE" → "Spare parts" → "Replacement".

628


Machine control panel: MCP 310C IE 24.8 Accessories

24.8

Accessories Table 24-19 Accessories pack (for delivery ex works) 9

Key covers for turning (labeled)

30

Ergo grey key covers (for labeling)

30

Clear key covers (for labeling)

1

Keyset

1

Yellow backing plate for emergency stop

Table 24-20 Accessories available for order Component

Description


1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each of red / green / yellow / medium gray

Number 1

6FC5248–0AF12–0AA0

Order number


1 set of 90, clear

1

6FC5248–0AF21–0AA0

Cable set

For additional MCP control devices, length 500 mm

60

6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0

Handwheel connection

Handwheel cable, max. length: 5 m

1

6FX8002-2CP00-1xxx *)

*) XXX is the length code: A = 0, B = 1 etc.

3LQ

/HQJWKsDFFRUGLQJWROHQJWKFRGH

s

/DEHOLQJ0/)%OHQJWKLQP PDQXIDFWXUHU PRQWK\HDURISURGXFWLRQ

6KLHOG

*1 *( 25 57 %/ 9, %5 6:

3 0 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 3 0 6KLHOG

*1 2 A

Switching capacity at 24V with resistive load

10 A

Switching capacity at 24V with inductive load

6A

Rated values for arc-free switching at 24 V


0.3 A

0.22 A

751

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 IE 27.8 Technical data

Emergency stop button S13 SR mushroom-head button S61 Selector switch S11 Table 27-33 Contacts with floating outputs Usage category (EN 60947-5-1) Rated operating voltage

Switching capacity

AC

DC 24 V

Ue

24 V

AC–12

le

10 A 6A

AC–15

le

DC–12

le

10 A

DC–13

le

3A

Imin

1 mA

Min. rated operating current at 5 V

For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3

Inputs The inputs are opto-decoupled. Table 27-34 Extension keys S14, S15, S51 ... S62 emergency stop input S13 Status Number

H signal L signal

15

+ 24V DC

Signal level

+15 V to +30 V

Rated value

0 V or open

Signal level

–3 V to +5 V

1

Cable length

max. 50 m AWG 16

Remark Input characteristics curve following IEC61131, type 1

Rated value

In a group of

Encoder power supply

752

Voltage switched

)

18.5 V to 30 V


Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 IE 27.8 Technical data

LED outputs Table 27-35 LED-S51 ... LED S61 LED-S14 ... LED-S15 LED emergency stop HS13 Status Number

Voltage switched

Current switched

14

Load voltage 2P24

20.4 V ... 28.8 V

Rated value

+24V DC

0.5 A

H signal

Signal level min.

Ue - 0.16V

max. 0.7A / output

L signal

Max. signal level

2V (idling)

0.3 mA

Short-circuit protection

Yes

Typ. activation threshold

1.1 A

Eff. short circuit current

0.5 A

Electrical isolation

no

In a group of

1

Output total current Cable length

max. 3 A max. 50 m AWG 16

Handheld unit connection XS12 The currents depend on the connected handheld unit. The internal connecting cables of the handheld unit connection HT 8 are designed for a rated voltage of 24V DC and 0.5 A.


753

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 IE 27.9 Spare parts

27.9

Spare parts Contact your Siemens service center to order replacement parts.

754


Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 IE 27.10 Accessories

27.10

Accessories

27.10.1

Overview Numerous accessories are available for the MPP 483 IE. Contact your Siemens service center to order accessories.

27.10.2

Labeling the slide-in labels NC

Stop

NC

Start

Machine on

Initial state

Start

Machine off

Stop after end of cycle

Immediate Stop

Acknowledge fault

Next-

Axes

Lock/release protective doors

50 30

70 80

10

90

6

100 110

2

120

0

%

Figure 27-24 MPP 483 IE pushbutton panel

The figure shows the standard version of the MPP 483 IE. The same slide-in labels can be used for the MPP 483 IE A. You can create your own slide-in labels in order to change the key labels. A printable blank film (DIN A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. A spare parts kit containing 3 blank films is also available (Item no.: A5E00414151).

Figure 27-25 Blank film for MCP 483 IE membrane keyboard

1) Print direction


755

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 IE 27.10 Accessories

Files for printing the blank film The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: ● Template_MPP483.doc [assignment for standard variants of MPP 483 IE - (A)] ● SymbolsMPP483.doc [key symbols as Word file - (B)]

7H[W

7H[W 7H[W

7H[W 7H[W

7H[W

7H[W

7H[W

76

7H[W

76

(A)

7H[W

/DEHOLQJVWULSIRU033033$ 033+ /DEHOLQJVWULSRIWKHNH\URZVWKHULJKWWH[WILHOG LVRQO\XVHGIRUWKH033/DQGFDQEHFXWWR WKHQHFHVVDU\OHQJWK

7H[W

7H[W

7H[W

7H[W

7H[W

7H[W

(6

1& 6WDUW

1& 6WRS WUDQVSDUHQW

1H[W $[HV

6LQJOH PRGH

;

1 W close to the equipment (< 1.5 m), malfunctions may occur!

29.1.2

System features ● Industrial Ethernet (transfer rate: 10/100 MBit/s) ● Function keyboard with 5 x 5 key matrix, can be freely projected and labeled ● 8 long-stroke keys with LEDs, ● Interfaces for 2 handwheels (D-Sub) (velocity input and contour handwheel are only possible when connecting through the handwheel connection module 6FC5303-0AA02-0AA0.) ● Emergency stop button (4-wire), latching, tamper-proof ● Emergency stop override button or emergency stop override through 2-position keyoperated switch left and right probing (right position: customer-specific) ● Direct key connection for OP 012 ● 2 override switches ● Handheld device connection for HT 8 ● EKS identification system ● 4 extension keys with LEDs

846


Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 310 IE H 29.1 Description

System configuration The figures show how the MPP 310 IE H is integrated into the control system.

;

90

80

; ;

;

+*$+7 70

100

60

110

50

120

; &20 ERDUG,(

;

+*$+7 80

90

70

6,1$0,&6ZLWK1&8

100

60

(WKHUQHW

&20 ERDUG,(

;

(WKHUQHW

;

23b7RSHUDWRUSDQHO

(WKHUQHW

(WKHUQHW

23b7RSHUDWRUSDQHO

110

50

120

%

% 30 50 30

50

70 80

10

70

90

80

10

6

90

2

100

2

100

6

0

110 120

0

110

%

120

%

(WKHUQHW

033,(+

033,(+

;

+7

6,180(5,.FRQQHFWLRQ

Figure 29-1

+7

31

3&8ZLWK +0,VOVRIWZDUH

;

352),1(7 6,0$7,&

6,0$7,&FRQQHFWLRQ

System configuration of the MPP 310 IE H

Note The connection cables are not part of the scope of supply.


847

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 310 IE H 29.1 Description

29.1.3

Mechanical design The machine control panel MCP 310 IE H consists of ● Control panel ● Handheld unit connection board (PCB HT 8) ● Customer keys board (PCB KT 310) ● COM board (PCB COM IE)

,Q2XW

,QGLYLGXDOZLULQJ &XVWRPHUNH\V

;

LE

4XHU\ 4XHU\ ,OOXPLQDWHG (PHUJVWRS 7HUPLQDWLQJ SXVKEXWWRQ RYHUULGH FRQQHFWRU PRGHVHOHFWLRQ +7

;

'LUHFWNH\V

;

(PHUJVWRS %XWWRQ

;

;

(WKHUQHW

3&

%

X31

&2

0

,(

;

+DQGZKHHO

;

(WKHUQHW ;

3&

%

;

; ;

;

; ; ;

;

; ; ;

;

%

;

; ;

;

+7

;

;

;

;

;

3&

+DQGZKHHO

;

.7

9'

;

&L

;

QWH

UQD

O

2YHUULGH 6SHHG 9'&

(QDEOLQJEXWWRQV (PHUJHQF\VWRS (PHUJHQF\VWRSRYHUULGH

0RGH $XWKRUL]DWLRQ 2YHUULGH VHOHFWRUVZLWFK 5DSLGWUDYHUVH NH\ VZLWFK EB VK

RU

ES 10

ER

5 3 2 1 0

20 30 40

50

,Q ,OOXPLQDWHG SXVKEXWWRQ

2YHUULGH )HHGUDWH

2

60 70 80 90 100

1

3

LE 0

(.6 %ODQNLQJSODWH

Figure 29-2

2SWLRQ RQO\RQUHTXHVW %ODQNLQJSODWH ZLWKORQJHOHPHQW/( DQGODEHOKROGHU

2SWLRQ RQO\RQUHTXHVW

Mechanical structure of the MPP 310 IE H

*) Contour and velocity specification via handwheel are not supported.

848


Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 310 IE H 29.2 Operator controls and indicators

29.2


29.2.1

Overview

Panel structure

80

90

70

100

60

110

50

120

% 50 30

70 80

10

90

6

100 110

2

120

0

%

Figure 29-3

Panel of the MPP 310 IE H

(1)

Spindle override

(2)

Feedrate override

(3)

8 customer keys with LEDs (Schlegel keys), slide-in labels

(4)

EKS Ethernet

(5)

Blanking plate

(6)

25 function keys with LEDs (membrane keys), slide-in labels

(7)

Handheld unit connection HT 8

(8)

Emergency stop override button

(9)


(10)

4 extension keys with LEDs (3SB3 keys), slide-in labels


849


Assignment of slots

80

6

6

6

6

6

6

90

70

100

60

110

:6 +6

+6

6

6

+6

+6

+6

50

+6

120

% 6

6

6

6

50 30

70 80

10

+6

+6

+6

+6

+6

+6

6

90 100

:6

2

110 120

0

% +) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

+) )

6

6

Figure 29-4

850

;6

Slots on the MPP 310 IE H

(1)


(2)

Emergency stop override

(3)

Handheld unit connection HT 8

(4)

4 extension elements, 22.5 mm

(5)

Function keys

(6)

Customer keys (long-stroke keys)

(7)

EKS identification system

(8)

Feedrate override

(9)

Spindle override



29.2.2

Description

29.2.2.1

Device front

Emergency stop chain Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when ∎

people are at risk,

∎

there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.

An emergency stop generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possible braking torque in a controlled manner. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. When the emergency stop button is activated, the emergency stop chain of the MPP 310 H will ensure personal safety and protect the machine in hazardous situations. The emergency stop chain is also active if the handheld units are removed. To prevent the emergency stop chain from being interrupted while you plug in or pull out the handheld unit, press the override selector switch S11. This overrides the emergency stop button on the handheld unit. DANGER To effectively deal with a malfunction of the S11 override selector switch (e.g. jamming), the user PLC program must generate an emergency stop when a monitoring time (approximately 5 min) expires (see figure in Section: "Connections" → "Connection for handheld units." The emergency stop chain of the MPP 310 IE H should be integrated in the system emergency stop by the user.

Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions!

Actuation elements Actuation elements S1 to S4 and S7 to S10 are activated by the control. They also have electrically isolated contacts (common roots) for user-specific wiring. The following spaces can be connected to control devices corresponding to the table in section: "Accessories" → "Retrofit operation elements": ● S1 to S4 ● S7 to S10 ● S51 to S54


851


Lamps Lamps HS1 to HS4 and HS7 to HS10 are connected to the control via Ethernet. Alternatively, HS1 to HS4 and HS7 to HS10 can also be activated by externally non-isolated via X20 of the Customer keys PCB KT 310.

29.2.2.2

Device rear side

COM board IE S1 (jumper)

Setting the handwheel signal type S1 open:

TTL interface

S1 closed:

differential interface

S2

Setting of the MPP address (see Section: "Interfaces" → "Description" → "COM board")

Diagnostic LEDs

LED1 (H1)

POWER OK (green) hardware test running.

LED2 (H2)

Without function

LED3 (H3)

Without function

LED1 (H1)

Voltage monitoring of customer keys

LED2 (H2)


LED3 (H3)


Customer keys KT 310 Diagnostic LEDs

852



HGA board HT 8

&20ERDUG,( + 6 ;

+ 6

+

+

6

+ ;

+

+

; 6 + + + + ;

;

;

;

;

+

6 ;

; + + +

Figure 29-5

6

;

&XVWRPHUNH\V.7

;6 ;

;

;

KDQGKHOGGHYLFH FRQQHFWLRQ +7

;

Rear of MPP 310 IE H with LEDs

Diagnostic LEDs LEDs

Color

for

Meaning

LED1 (H1)

LNK

Green

X1 RJ45

Connection established

LED2 (H2)

ACT

Yellow

X1 RJ45

Transmission active

LED3 (H3)

LNK

Green

X2 RJ45

Connection established

LED4 (H4)

ACT

Yellow

X2 RJ45

Transmission active

LED5 (H5)

LNK

Green

HT 8 transmission

LED6 (H6)

ACT

Yellow

HT 8 transmission

LED7 (H7)

Power OK

Green

LED8 (H8)

FAULT STAT1

Red

Error

LED9 (H9)

FAULT STAT2

Red

Error

Table 29-1

Coding switches

S1

Module address bit 4 … 7

S2

Module address bit 0 … 3


853

Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 310 IE H 29.3 Interfaces

29.3

Interfaces

29.3.1

Overview

;

;

;

;

;

;

;

;

6

6

6

6

:6

;

:6

; 6 + +

+

;

+

+ + +

+ + + + +

; ; ; ; ;

(.6

;

;

;

;

;

; ;

;

Figure 29-6

6

;6 ;

;

Rear of the MPP 310 IE H with interfaces

Control panel (5)

Protective Ground Connection S13

854


S11

Emergency Stop override

S51 to S54

Extension keys

WS2

Feed override



(2)

WS3

Spindle override

EKS

Identification system

COM board X10

Power supply

X20

Ethernet / Port 1

X21

Ethernet / Port 2

X60

Handwheel 1

X61

Handwheel 2

X70

Direct keys

(3) (1)

(4)

Strain relief for Ethernet cable Customer keys X11

Power supply

X20

Individual wiring

X25

extension

X30

Feed override

X31

Spindle override

Connection for handheld units X1 / X2

Ethernet

X7

Panel Present

X20

Enable

X21

Emergency Stop override

XS12

Connection for handheld units

WARNING Any manipulation found on safety-related circuitry parts such as - emergency stop chain, - override circuit, - enabling, etc. must be reported immediately to the department responsible for safety.

Signal type O

Outputs

I

Inputs

B


V

Power supply


855


29.3.2

Description

29.3.2.1

Control panel

PE connection Pin

Signal PE

Connection

Connection crosssection

M5 x 2.5 cable lug

2.5 mm2

Emergency stop button S13 Key designation:

S13

Key type:

Mushroom, push-pull key 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder 3SB3901-0AB and 1 x NO 3SB3400-0B (internal use)

Table 29-2 Pin 14

856

Emergency stop contact block Signal

Type

BZ_S13.14

Signal name

Function

Reference potential S1, S13

13

S_S13.13

NO contact S1, S13

31

OE_S13.31

NC contact Ö1, S13

32

BZ_S13.32

I/O

Reference potential Ö1, S13

21

OE_S13.21

NC contact Ö2, S13

22

BZ_S13.22




Emergency Stop override S11 Key designation:

S11

Key type:

left probing, right probing, safety lock with actuation element acc. to catalog: Switching devices and systems (NSK) at A&D CD carrier 3SB3901-0AC with pressure pieces 1 x NO contact 3SB3400-0B 2 x 3SB3400-0A switching element 1Ö/1S elements positive-action

Table 29-3

Emergency stop override contact block

Pin

29.3.2.2

Signal

Type

Signal name

14

BZ_S11.14


13

S_S11.13

NO contact S1, S11

21

OE_S11.21

NC contact Ö1, S11

22

BZ_S11.22


44

BZ_S11.44


43

S_S11.43

31

OE_S11.31

32

BZ_S11.32


54

BZ_S11.54


53

S_S11.53

NO contact S3, S11

Function

NO contact S2, S11

I/O

NC contact Ö2, S11

61

OE_S11.61

NC contact Ö3, S11

62

BZ_S11.62


COM board

Power supply: X10 Connector designation:

X10

Connector type:

3-pin Phoenix terminal block

Cable length (max.):

10 m

Table 29-4

Interface power supply

Pin

Signal name

1

1P24

2

M24

3

Shield


Type

Meaning 24V potential

V

Ground 24V Shield connection

857


Ethernet interfaces: X20/X21 Connector designation:

X20/X21

Connector type:

RJ-45 socket with integrated magnetics and LEDs

Connector assignment:

Downlink (switch)

Table 29-5

Ethernet interfaces X20 / X21

Pin

Signal name

Type

Meaning

1

RX+

I

Receive +

2

RX-

I

Receive -

3

TX+

O

Transmit +

4

-

-

Terminating device

5

-

-

Terminating device

6

TX-

O

Transmit -

7

-

-

Terminating device

8

-

-

Terminating device

Note Connection only on LAN not on telecommunication networks!

Handwheel 1: X60 Connector designation:

X60

Connector type:

15-pin Sub-D socket

Table 29-6

858

Interface for handwheel 1:

Pin

Signal name

1

P5V

2

M

Type

Meaning Supply voltage 5 V

V

Ground

3

HW1_A

4

HW1_XA

I

Handwheel pulse track A (negated)

Handwheel pulse track A

5

N.C.

-

Not connected

6

HW1_B

7

HW1_XB

8 9 10 11

Handwheel pulse track B

I

Handwheel pulse track B (negated)

N.C.

-

Not connected

P5V

V

Supply voltage 5 V

N.C.

-

Not connected

M

V

Ground

12

N.C.

-

Not connected

13

N.C.

-

Not connected


Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 310 IE H 29.3 Interfaces Pin

Signal name

Type

Meaning

14

N.C.

-

Not connected

15

N.C.

-

Not connected

Note The handwheels can either be operated with TTL or differential signals. You set the signal type using S1 (wire bridge) on the COM board. The cable length (max.) for handwheels is 5 m: The handwheels are supplied with 5 V ± 5% and 100 mA via the interface. Contour and velocity specification via handwheel are not supported.

Handwheel 2: X61 Connector designation:

X61

Connector type:

15-pin Sub-D socket

Table 29-7

Interface for handwheel 2:

Pin

Signal name

1

P5V

2

M

Type

Meaning Supply voltage 5 V

V

Ground

3

HW2_A

4

HW2_XA

I

Handwheel pulse track A (negated)

Handwheel pulse track A

5

N.C.

-

Not connected

6

HW2_B

7

HW2_XB

8 9 10 11

Handwheel pulse track B

I

Handwheel pulse track B (negated)

N.C.

-

Not connected

P5V

V

Supply voltage 5 V

N.C.

-

Not connected

M

V

Ground

12

N.C.

-

Not connected

13

N.C.

-

Not connected

14

N.C.

-

Not connected

15

N.C.

-

Not connected

Direct key interface: X70 The interface is used to connect the direct keys of the operator panel front OP 012 by means of a 20-pin ribbon cable (< 0.6 m). 16 digital inputs (5V) can be interrogated by the X70 connector.


859



X70

Connector type:

2 x 10-pin male connector, 2.54 mm pattern

Table 29-8

Interface for direct keys

Pin

Signal name

1

DT 1

2

DT 2

Type

Meaning Direct key 1

I

Direct key 2

3

DT 3

4

DT 4

Direct key 4

5

DT 5

Direct key 5

6

DT 6

7

DT 7

8

DT 8

Direct key 8

9

DT 9

Direct key 9

10

DT 10

I

I

Direct key 3

Direct key 6 Direct key 7

Direct key 10

11

DT 11

12

DT 12

Direct key 12

13

DT 13

Direct key 13

14

DT 14

15

DT 15

I

Direct key 14 Direct key 15 Direct key 16

16

DT 16

17

P5V_TACO

18

P5V_TACO

19

M_TACO

20

M_TACO

Table 29-9

Direct key 11

V V

P5 keyboard controller P5 keyboard controller M keyboard controller M keyboard controller

Electrical properties:

Input voltage:

HIGH level: 5V or open LOW level :@ 9>PK@ 7>.@

Means of heat dissipation

Note If the convection service area A [m2] is insufficient for "Heat dissipation by natural convection", then "Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence" or "Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling or ventilation" should be used. For hot spots and heat concentration in narrow casings, "Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence" is recommended. The total power loss PVtotal can also be calculated as follows for applications of critical temperatures: - current measurement at 24 V power supply - power loss when PVtotal [W] = U (24 V) * | (measured in amps)

974


Heat dissipation 40.2 Sample calculation of thermal power loss

40.2

Sample calculation of thermal power loss

Calculating the PCU thermal power loss of The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unit is to be dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The volumetric flow V required for this should be calculated at a difference in temperature of T2 - T1 = ΔT ≥ 10K.

([DPSOHIRUKHDWGLVVLSDWLRQ ZLWKRSHQFLUFXLWYHQWLODWLRQ 3&8ZLWK23 &DOFXODWLQJWKHWKHUPDOSRZHUORVV LQFOXGLQJLQWHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\XQLW 23: 3&8: 39WRWDO : PD[: 7

7

2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW

3&8

39WRWDO>:@ 9 >PK@ 7>.@

([WHUQDOWHPSHUDWXUH 7 GHJUHHV ,QWHUQDOWHPSHUDWXUH 7 GHJUHHV

Figure 40-2

7 .

Calculating heat dissipation for PCU with OP


975

Heat dissipation 40.2 Sample calculation of thermal power loss

976


Networking 41.1

Commissioning a system network

41.1.1

Introduction

41.1.1.1

Settings for SINUMERIK solution line

41

Area of application This description applies to NCU 7x0 with software V2.5 and PCU 50.3 with PCU base software V8.2 , as well as for PCU 321 with software V2.5. All statements concerning NCU 7x0 likewise apply for PCU 321, deviations are explicitly specified.

Introduction This manual describes the structure and commissioning of the system network with SINUMERIK solution line control and operator components with Ethernet-based communication. The fundamentals of the system network are described first, details and special cases are described in subsequent chapters.

Fundamentals The system network for SINUMERIK solution line is structured as a star topology with a central Ethernet switch, to which all Ethernet-based components of the system are connected. For an NCU the connection is executed via the X120 Ethernet socket, for PCU50.3 it is executed via the "Ethernet 2" connection. There is no default for all other components with two Ethernet connections. These components have an internal 2-port switch and may be used to connect an additional operator component. Thus in this case there can be deviation from the strict star topology.

System network In the system network the IP address 192.168.214.xxx with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 is pre-selected. Here there is precisely one DHCP server with DNS that can run on one NCU or one PCU50.3. The server ensures assignment of IP addresses to the Ethernet components in the system network (DHCP clients) from a specified address band.


977

Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network The following rules apply for assignment of IP addresses in the system network: ● For all NCUs and PCUs the commissioning engineer assigns fixed IP addresses in the associated address bands, as well as appropriate computer names (host names). All other (operator) components are automatically assigned an IP address from the DHCP server. Its name is generated automatically (for MCP, MPP, HT 8), or is entered at commissioning (TCU). ● If there are multiple NCUs and/or PCUs in the system network the system automatically (depending on the start-up sequence) specifies the DHCP server and automatically ensures synchronization of all necessary data so that the next time the system boots any other NCU or PCU could take on the role of DHCP server. However it is a good idea to specify a DHCP master. This is an NCU or PCU in the system network that is available at each system boot and which regularly takes over the task of the DHCP server and DNS server. Synchronization of data takes place in any event so that any other NCU or PCU can take over this task. All non-master NCUs / PCUs wait in the system boot an adjustable length of time for availability of the master.

Connection to a company network Each NCU 7x0 can be connected via X130, and each PCU50.3 can be connected via "Ethernet 1" to the company network. The company network is used to exchange HMI software data with servers or to execute part-programs directly from servers in the company network. Company network and system network should always be logically and also physically separated.

Service interface X127 The service interface X127 of the NCU 7x0 is used for direct connection of a programming device/PC for service purposes. Here access with STEP 7 to the PLC, (and with NCU 730PN to PROFINET as well) is possible.

41.1.1.2

System boot with system network

System behavior at boot As of NCU Systemsoftware V2.4 SP1 and PCU Basesoftware V8.1 system boot behavior is based on the following principle: ● For configuration of an NCU 7x0 (or PCU 321) with one CPU 50.3 the default for a network configuration is as follows: The NCU keeps the default IP address 192.168.214.1 on X120, the PCU 50.3 keeps the default IP address 192.168.214.241 on Eth2. ● For configuration of more than 1 NCU 7x0 (or PCU 321) without PCU, with one or more PCU 50.3, there are two cases to differentiate: – At boot automatically all address conflicts and DHCP conflicts are resolved and the system is ready for operation. In this configuration there is no guarantee that all NCUs and PCUs will always receive the same IP address at each system boot. – If in the user's view there is a requirement that all NCUs, and possibly also the PCUs, get a defined constant IP address at each boot, for example because the IP address is entered in the respective PLC program, then the user must configure a fixed IP address for each NCU 7x0 (PCU 321) / PCU 50.3 in question, in the basesys.ini file.

978


Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network ● The user can specify a DHCP master in the basesys.ini file. ● Assigning names: – The user should assign meaningful names for all NCUs in the basesys.ini file; if not the names will be generated automatically. – A PCU 50.3 always has a computer name that can be changed as needed. ● The IP addresses of TCUs and MCPs are freely assigned within the specified address band at each boot. The MCPs are identified in the PLC via their DIP switch setting.

Using DNS name service Availability of the DNS (Domain Name System) name service offers the following advantages for system network administration: ● The name service enables easier configuration with names instead of IP addresses for management of operating units: All components in the system network can be addressed via a symbolic computer name. This name can to some extent be freely assigned, to some extent it is derived automatically from a DIP switch setting (MCP, MPP, EKS, HT 8, HT 2). ● A computer node in the system network (NCU, PCU, TCU, MCP, HT 8, etc.) can be addressed solely through assignment of the IP address, either via a freely selectable name or via an internally generated name in the system network, and thus becomes independent from its network address in the system network. Thus a change in the network address does not necessarily necessitate a series of additional setting changes. ● In addition, the name service is used by the system for address resolution for MCP/MPP, direct keys, and EKS when changing the user authorization.

41.1.1.3

System configuration workflow

Configuration sequence Perform the following steps to operate the TCU: 1. NCU on the system network: IP address is pre-selected. (declare the PCUs on the NCU if required under the path: /user/common/tcu//common/tcu/config.ini) 2. PCU on the system network: IP address is pre-selected. – DHCP servers synchronize themselves automatically at boot (IP addresses not defined) – Set fixed IP addresses: If more than two PCUs or one NCU – Set fixed IP addresses of the PCU: If more than two PCUs 3. Configure the system network – TCU on the system network: IP address is assigned automatically. – Assign a name for the TCU. – Configure displacement (optional)


979

Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network – Define DNS server (optional) – In the event of a service call: Connect the programming device to the system network. Note Depending on the structure of your system and the number of available TCUs, PCUs, and NCUs, there are a number of commissioning particularities, in other words before you start the commissioning process read the chapter "Network configuration".

41.1.1.4

Factory default settings

Meaning of the symbols: ○

Eth 1 as a DHCP client

●

Eth 2 as a DHCP server

■

Eth 2 with fixed IP address

Preconfiguration of the TCU The TCU is configured as a DHCP client and primarily accepts IP addresses from SINUMERIK components, from the DHCP server of such components that are inherent to SINUMERIK, for example NCU on X120 or PCU50.3 on the system network, or from a default DHCP server. The behavior of the TCU cannot be modified here. A TCU is a SINUMERIK DHCP client. The TCU has a single Ethernet connection.

7&8

A TCU executes a boot via the network. The boot server is the computer node from which the TCU also obtains its IP address.

Preconfiguration of the PCU 50.3 A PCU 50.3 has two Ethernet interfaces with default settings suitable for use with SINUMERIK solution line: Eth 1 is pre-selected as a default DHCP client for connection to a company network.

3&8 (WK

(WK

Eth 2 is pre-selected as a SINUMERIK DHCP server for connection to a system network. On Eth 2 the fixed IP address 192.168.214.241 is pre-selected.

A PCU 50.3 with PCU Basesoftware V8.0 or higher already contains the "PCU Basesoftware Thin Client" when delivered. For retrofitting, the software is available in the D:\Update directory on the hard disk.

980


Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network

Preconfiguration of the NCU On the X120, the NCU is preconfigured for the SINUMERIK DHCP protocol. The NCU is preselected here as a SINUMERIK DHCP server. On X120, the NCU occupies the fixed IP address 192.168.214.1 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0in its capacity as a DHCP server. The DHCP server of the NCU assigns IP addresses from the range 192.168.214.10 to 192.168.214.239. The behavior of the NCU on X120 cannot be modified. Restricting the available address band that is managed by the DHCP server of the NCU frees up IP addresses 192.168.214.2 to 192.168.214.9 as well as addresses 192.168.214.241 to 192.168.214.254 for network nodes with fixed IP addresses. The NCU has three Ethernet connections. ;

;

1&8 ;

- X120 to connect to the system network with an active DHCP server (IE1/OP) - X130 to connect to the company network as a default DHCP client (IE2/NET) - X127 as a service connection with an active DHCP server

On X130, the NCU is set as a default DHCP client for the address reference from a company network. The IP address received here is specified by the DHCP server from the company network. On X127, an NCU is a standard DHCP server (in contrast to the SINUMERIK DHCP server). On X127, the NCU has the fixed IP address 192.168.215.1 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.224). The range 192.168.215.2 to 192.168.215.9 is reserved and can be used by network stations with a fixed IP address from this range. On X127, IP addresses in the range 192.168.215.10 to 192.168.215.30 are assigned via DHCP; e.g. to connect a programming device.

Reserved IP addresses for NCU and PCU The following defaults apply on delivery: ● Connection to the system network with subnet mask 255.255.255.0: IP address

Network station

Remark

192.168.214.1

NCU on X120

Default

192.168.214.2 – 9

For additional NCUs with a fixed IP address on the system network

Unassigned

192.168.214.10 – 239

For additional TCUs, then for PCUs, NCUs, MCPs, MPPs

DHCP clients

192.168.214.240

Reserved for EKS (Electronic Key System)

Default

192.168.214.241

Fixed IP address of PCU 50.3 on Eth 2

Default

192.168.214.242 – 249

For additional PCUs with a fixed IP address

Unassigned

192.168.214.250 – 254

For PGs with a fixed IP address (service connection)

Unassigned


981


● Service connection with subnet mask 255.255.255.224: IP address

Network station

Remark

192.168.215.1

NCU on X127

Default

192.168.215.2 – 9

For programming devices with a fixed IP address

Unassigned

192.168.215.10 – 30

E.g., for programming device

DHCP clients

41.1.2

Comissioning NCU

41.1.2.1

Synchronize DHCP server

Synchronization in the system network Synchronization of the DHCP servers makes it very easy to commission the system network: The complete system network consisting of NCU7x0, PCU 50.3, PCU 321, TCU, HT 8, MCP, MPP, is configured dynamically at boot via the DHCP protocol and thus can be booted without prior configuration processes. Only one DHCP server may be active in a computer network. Each of the components NCU7x0, PCU 50.3 and PCU 321 is shipped with the DHCP server switched to active. With this setting simple systems as well as system networks are immediately ready for operation.

Configuration with 1 NCU and 1 PCU To operate a PCU 50.3 which has V8.0 SP2 or higher of the PCU basic software installed on an NCU, the DHCP server on the NCU must be activated (NCU service command: "sc enable DHCPSvr -x120") and deactivated on the 50.3 PCU. To deactivate services DHCP, TFTP and FTP and activate service VNC on its own, proceed as follows: ● Start the "System Network Center" in the service mode of the PCU 50.3 and set the default configuration in the "TCU support" tab to "No boot support". ● For MCP IE operation the entry "addrmode" in the mcp_client.ini file of the NCU must be set to (HWS). This is the default setting (see /card/siemens/sinumerik/mcp_client). ● When TCUs / HT 8 are available in the system and must be switched to the PCU 50.3 (with HMI Advanced) after boot, a "config" file (not config.ini!) must be created on the NCU for each TCU / HT 8 under /user/common/tcu//common/tcu with the following contents: VNCServer=192.168.214.241:0:password This is the IP address of the PCU 50.3 to which the TCU / HT 8 must connect during boot.

982



System redundancy With the available redundancy of DHCP servers in the system, continued operation of the system is ensured in the following cases: ● Particularly when commissioning, the situation can occur that the computer node that takes on the role of DCHP server fails in operation or is switched off. In this case an additional NCU 7x0, PCU 50.3 or PCU 321 can take over the role of the DHCP server. ● Mobile components such as HT 8 and HT 2, that are accepted during system operation can be properly supplied by the system and execute their boot process. ● Because the DHCP server has also integrated the DNS name service necessary for operation of the MCPs, MPPs, and EKS systems, it is also possible to continue to operate these components on the system even if the original server should fail.

41.1.2.2

How to determine the IP address of the NCU

Connecting the NCU in the system network (X120) On X120, the NCU is pre-selected as required: No settings are necessary.

Determining the IP address of the NCU on the company network (X130) On X130, the NCU is set to the address reference via DHCP. If the company network has a DHCP server no further settings are required. There are several possibilities for determining the address that the NCU obtained on the company network, and these possibilities are listed below: ● If the NCU boots in switch position 8, it shows the IP address on X130 on the 7-segment display. ● Once the NCU has booted successfully, open a service shell on the TCU and execute the following command to obtain the desired information: SC SHOW IP

Changing the IP address: If the company network has no available DHCP server or if this cannot be used, you are given the option to set a fixed address for the NCU on X130 (in accordance with the addresses already used on the company network). Example: The following command results in an IP address 157.163.245.105 with a subnet mask 255.255.255.0. SC SET IP 157.163.245.105 255.255.255.0 -X130


983


Note Additional information on the service commands can be found by executing the sc help command or in the /IM7/NCU Commissioning Manual.

41.1.2.3

Settings in the "basesys.ini" file

Use Settings are made in the basesys.ini file that specify the behavior of the system in the network. NOTICE Only the entries in the file basesys.ini described in this chapter can be changed.

Storage path In the current version note the following storage paths: ● For a Linux basic system, the original file can be found on the CF card at /system/usr/etc; OEM versions are stored under /oem/system/etc as well as /oem_i/system/etc and user versions under /user/system/etc. ● On the PCU 50.3 the file is located at E:\Siemens\system\etc; OEM versions are located at F:\oem\system\etc and user versions are stored at F:\user\system\etc. In this basesys.ini file only the section [InternalInterface] is available.

Editing instructions To edit the basesys.ini file: ● Comments are introduced by ';' or '#' at the beginning of the line, and span the width of the line. Empty lines are also handled as comments. ● The sections that start with a "[NAME]" line are ignored by the basic system itself, but are sometimes used by the HMI. ● Variable definitions are written in the form "NAME=VALUE". Blanks are permitted around the '=' character. The value may also be enclosed in double quotation marks, but this is optional.

984



41.1.2.4

Section [ExternalInterface]

Description In this section, the parameters and settings for the external Ethernet interface are defined. For an NCU7x0, this is X130 (Eth1). If the external interface is in DHCP mode, i.e. the value of ExternalIP is empty or not defined, then all parameters listed here, with the exception of "DHCPClientID", are accepted by the DHCP server as long as the server provides a value for the parameter.

ExternalIP If ExternalIP is not empty, the fixed IP address specified there is used on the company network interface. The ExternalNetMask then also needs to be set, as well as the gateway, name servers, host name, and domain if required. If ExternalIP is not set or is empty, a DHCP client is started on the interface. Value:

IP address

Default:

Empty

ExternalNetMask ExternalNetMask must be set together with ExternalIP, in order to define the size of the network. Value:

Subnet mask

Default:

Empty

Gateway If the value of gateway is not empty, the host specified there is used as the default gateway, which means that all IP packages that cannot be directly assigned are sent here for routing. If no gateway is specified, only the networks that are directly connected are accessible. Value:

IP address

Default:

Empty

Nameservers If DNS name servers are specified here, then these must be used to resolve symbolic host names, i.e. at most of the points where an IP address is expected, a computer name can also be used instead. The name server setting is also sent to your DHCP client (TCU, PG) via the DHCP server of the NCU, so that this can also work with symbolic names. Value:

List of IP addresses (separated by a blank)

Default:

Empty


985


Timeservers Here you can specify a list of NTP servers (UDP/123) that can be used by the NTPD on the NCU for time synchronization. Value:

List of IP addresses (separated by a blank)

Default:

Empty

Hostname Here you can define a name for the local host. This manually assigned name takes priority over all other names. The host name is determined in the following order: ● Host name from the basesys.ini file, if set ● A name received from the DHCP server (if DHCP client mode and a name have been supplied), the result of a reverse DNS lookup, i.e. which name belongs to the IP received (if nameservers are defined) ● A default name ("NONAME_...") Because the host name is also used as DNS name it must satisfy the corresponding requirements of the RFC: ● ASCII letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9) and '-' ● max. 63 characters Value:

Name

Default:

Empty

Domain These variables can be used to configure the DNS domain. The effect is that names in this domain can be resolved without qualification (e.g. if the domain is "test.local", you can also specify the name "computer1.test.local" as "computer1"). Value:

Name

Default:

Empty

DHCPClientID With these variables, you can influence which ClientID the DHCP client presents to its server. This ID can be used by the server to assign certain parameters to the client, for example a static IP address. Usually, the MAC address of the Ethernet interface is used for this purpose. This is also the default setting. Alternatively, you can also use the host name ("@NAME"), which must then be defined in the basesys.ini, in order to be recognized before the DHCP request. It is also possible to use an arbitrary string for ClientID.

986

Value:

@MAC, @CFID, @NAME or any string

Default:

@MAC



41.1.2.5

Section [InternalInterface]

Description In the section [InternalInterface] the data is specified for synchronization of the DHCP server in the system network. Note This section of the basesys.ini file is on Linux systems (e.g. NCU, PCU 321) and, from PCU base software V8.1, also on Windows systems (e.g. PCU 50.3).

InternalIP Use this variable to set the (actually fixed) IP address in the system network. InternalIP should always be used together with InternalNetMask. Value:

IP address

Default:

192.168.214.1

InternalNetMask Specifies the subnet mask for InternallP and should always be used together with it. Value:

Subnet mask

Default:

255.255.255.0

InternalIP_Alias Use this variable to define an additional alias IP address for the interface of the system network (X120); this is practical in certain application cases. Value:

IP address

Default:

Empty

InternalIP_Alias should always be used together with InternalNetMask_Alias.

InternalNetMask_Alias This variable specifies the subnet mask for InternallP_Alias and should always be used together with it. Value:

Subnet mask

Default:

Empty


987


SyncModeDHCPD_SysNet If this variable is not set on "OFF" then the DHCP servers synchronize themselves in the system network (X120) so that only one of them actively assigns addresses. This makes it possible to operate multiple NCUs or PCUs 50.3concurrently without having to adjust the network settings. Value:

ON_MASTER, ON_HIGH (= ON), ON_LOW, or OFF

Default:

ON_HIGH

The DHCP servers that are not active go into "standby" mode; in this mode they regularly get the current address data and TCU data from the active server so that if the active server fails a standby server can take over the active role without data loss. ● With the ON_MASTER setting instead of ON_HIGH you can influence the synchronization in such a manner that the server with the "Master" setting is always the active server (for this it must be active on the network). This means that in the normal situation deterministically the same controller is always the DHCP server and you can find the actual address data (/var/etc/udhcp-eth0.leases) and the TCU data /user/common/tcu/etc.) there. ON_MASTER should only be set for a single DHCP server in the system network; there should not be multiple masters. ● The ON_LOW setting assigns the DHCP server a lower priority than normal. It then becomes the active server if no server with ON_HIGH or ON_MASTER is found in the network. Note Compatibility with earlier versions The priority level "ON_LOW" is used automatically if the DHCP server was previously switched off with the no longer available variable DisableDHCPDeth0=1. Such an NCU then indeed does have a (standby) DHCP server and keeps a backup of the lease data, however normally it does not become an active server.

InternalDynRangeStart With the two variables InternalDynRangeStart and InternalDynRangeEnd, you can explicitly specify the range of IP address assigned by the DHCP server. The number band of the presetting should normally suffice. Value:

IP address

Default:

First address in the system network + 10 or +2 (if ≤ 16 addresses)

InternalDynRangeEnd

988

Value:

IP address

Default:

Last address in the system network - 15 or -1 (if ≤ 16 addresses)



DHCPDNoMasterWait If a synchronizing DHCP server has once seen a master server in the past, then it waits for synchronization until the time specified here elapses before it becomes the active server. This additional pause makes it possible for the intended DHCP master to become the active DHCP server without displacement even if it is shortly switched on thereafter, or takes longer to boot than other controllers. Value:

Time in seconds

Default:

120

InternalDNSDomain This is used to specify the Top Level Domain (TLD) name that is used in the system network. The DNS server of the NCU assigns names to the devices in the system network in this zone. Name requests for all other zones are forwarded to an external name server in the company network. As presetting the "local" recommended by the RFC1035 is used for local networks, to avoid conflicts with globally defined domain names. Recommendation: The preset should be maintained.

41.1.2.6

Value:

Domain name (letters, numbers, '-', '_', max. 63 characters)

Default:

local

Section [IBNInterface]

Description The settings in this section affect interface X127.

EnableDHCP_IBNNet If this variable is set to 0 then this prevents the start of the DHCP server on the commissioning interface (X127). Value:

Empty, 0 or 1

Default:

Empty


989


41.1.2.7

Section [LinuxBase]

Description Additional setting possibilities of the Linux system are combined in this section.

Synchronizing the time There are two different cases: ● If there is an external NTP server to act as a time server (entered in the basesys.ini file or via DHCP), then the PLC clock is synchronized via the Linux clock. ● If there is no external time server, the PLC clock will be the master for the Linux clock: NOTICE Power on the PLC in switch setting 3: "MRES" With "memory reset" the time of the PLC clock remains intact and is not reset. If the PLC is switched on in switch position 3 "MRES" then the time will be reset. In this case the valid time is taken over from the Linux system and does not need to be reset.

Timezone The time zone set here is used by the system to convert UTC time into local time. The time zone is also sent to all applications via the environment variable TZ, and is taken into account by the libc function localtime(). The time zone influences all time entries in the basic system, particularly for the command "date", for "ls -l", and in the system log file (on the CF card under /var/log/messages). Value:

Time zone description

Default:

UTC

Some selected time zone descriptions are listed in the comments of the supplied example file "basesys.ini":

DisableNTPTimeSync If this variable is set to 1, the time synchronization server NTPD will not be started and no more time synchronizations will be executed.

990

Value:

0 or 1

Default:

0



DisablePLCTimeSync If this variable is set to 1, synchronization of the system time with the PLC time (in both directions) will not be executed. Value:

0 or 1

Default:

0

EnableCoreDumps If this variable is set as equal to 1, a log file for processes is created and stored under /var/tmp. The protocol file contains a memory print of the process that has crashed or that has terminated.

41.1.2.8

Value:

Empty, 0 or 1

Default:

0

Example: Configuration file 'basesys.ini'

Configuration file basesys.ini The following defaults are applied to the template_basesys.ini file which is supplied in the directory /siemens/system/etc.: ; -----------------------------------------------------------------; Default Linux basesystem configuration ; -----------------------------------------------------------------; ; section ID is for Windows compatibility and is ignored [ExternalInterface] ; If ExternalIP is set, you can force the external Ethernet ; interface to use a fixed IP addr. etc instead of using DHCP ; if a Hostname is set, it even overrides one received by DHCP ;ExternalIP=210.210.210.210 ;ExternalNetMask=255.255.255.0 ;Gateway=210.210.210.1 ;Nameservers=210.210.210.1 210.210.210.2 ;Timeservers=210.210.210.3 ;Hostname=somename ;Domain=example.com ; if ExternalIP is empty (default), DHCP is used with the following ; ClientID. The default is "@MAC" to use the MAC address, ; alternatives are "@NAME" to use the hostname (Hostname above) ; or any other arbitrary string. ;DHCPClientID=@MAC


991


[InternalInterface] ; With InternalIP and InternalNetMask (both must be set together), ; you can change the address on the internal/TCU/automation net. ; This should not be needed normally. ;InternalIP=192.168.214.1 ;InternalNetMask=255.255.255.0 ; Setting EnableDHCPD_SysNet to 0 suppresses that a DHCP server ; is started on that interface ;EnableDHCPD_SysNet=0 ; Set synchronization of all DHCP servers in the system/TCU network ; (X120). Possible values are: ; OFF, ON_LOW (low priority), ; ON or ON_HIGH (normal priority), or ON_MASTER (highest priority). ; ON_MASTER is used to make this machine deterministically ; the DHCP master server, but should be used only for one server ; in the network. ;SyncModeDHCPD_SysNet=ON ; This is the range of dynamic IPs given out by the DHCP server ; Defaults should be sensible ;InternalDynRangeStart=192.168.214.10 ;InternalDynRangeEnd=192.168.214.239 ; If once a DHCP master was seen, the DHCP server waits this many ; seconds for the master to show up before trying to become the ; active server. ;DHCPDNoMasterWait=120 ; DNS domain name used for names in system/TCU network ; (default is "local" to conform with RFC) InternalDNSDomain=local ; FixedDomain and FixedNameservers can be used to define a DNS ; domain and nameservers, if the DHCP/DNS server on system network ; is disabled. ;FixedDomain=local ;FixedNameservers=192.168.214.1 ; If DisableNATRouting is set to 1, the NCU won't forward from TCU ; or IBN net (X120 and X127, resp.) to external net (X130). ; If set to "X120" or "X127", forwarding will only be disabled ; from that interface. ;DisableNATRouting=1

992



[IBNInterface] ; Setting EnableDHCPD_IBNNet to 0 suppresses that a DHCP server ; is started on that interface. ;EnableDHCPD_IBNNet=0 ; If DisableIBNForwarding is set to 1, the NCU won't do NAT routing ; from IBN network (X127) to system network (X120). ;DisableIBNForwarding=1 [LinuxBase] ; Keep size of /var/log/messages around this value (not followed ; exactly for performance reasons) LogfileLimit=102400 ; Protocol/Port pairs to open in the firewall ; (e.g., TCP/5900, UDP/514, ...) ;FirewallOpenPorts=TCP/5900 ; If there is only one Ethernet interface, it's used by default as ; an external(company) network. Alternatively, usage as automation ; net (TCU boot support etc.) is possible by setting NetworkModel ; to "automation". (Only NCU, Service and PCU20A variants!) ;NetworkModel=automation ; DisableSubsystems can be used to skip certain CFSes (= subsystems) ; a list of multiple names (separated by spaces) is possible ; a simple name means all CFSes with this name, an absolute path ; (e.g., /siemens/sinumerik/nck) exactly this one CFS ; with the special value "ALL", all subsystems can be disabled ;DisableSubsystems=nck ; Directory for OEM netboot files (served by tftp to diskless clients) NetbootDirectory=/oem/common/netboot ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;

Properties of local time zone: names, offset, start and end day Some examples: Europe: WET0WEST,M3.5.0,M10.5.0 CET-1CEST,M3.5.0,M10.5.0 EET-2EEST,M3.5.0,M10.5.0 USA: EST5EDT,M4.1.0,M10.5.0 CST6CDT,M4.1.0,M10.5.0 MST7MDT,M4.1.0,M10.5.0 PST8PDT,M4.1.0,M10.5.0


993

Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network ; China: CST-8 ; Japan: JST-9 Timezone=UTC ; If DisablePLCTimeSync is set, no time synchronization ; with PLC will happen. ;DisablePLCTimeSync=1 ; Set to 1 to enable coredumps in /var/tmp EnableCoreDumps=0

41.1.3

Commissioning TCU

41.1.3.1


TCU overview The Thin Client Unit (TCU) for the distributed configuration permits spatial separation of the SINUMERIK operator panel front (OP/TP) and the SINUMERIK PCU or NCU. On the SINUMERIK solution line, the TCU is used to display the user interface of the PCU50.3 or the NCU. It is possible to connect one TCU to several PCUs. All TCUs and PCUs that are connected to one another via a switch form the "system network". The user interface of a PCU is copied to several OPs with one TCU each. In other words, all of the TCUs display the same screen. Operator actions can only be performed on one TCU at a time. This TCU then has user authorization. The PCU can also have its own OP connected directly to it. An example of a configuration with HMI Advanced for a distributed configuration is shown below: 7&8

7&8

7&8

+7

3&8

6,180(5,.'bVO

0&3 6ZLWFK

The mobile SINUMERIK HT 8 handheld terminal works on the thin client principle and combines the functions of an operator panel with a machine control panel.

994


Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network The configuration and cabling of the whole plant system based on a permissible configuration is described in the chapter 'Network configurations".

Supplementary conditions For operation of a TCU: ● In the system network the number of active TCUs is limited: – NCU 710.1: no more than 2 TCUs – NCU 720.1 / 730.1 / 730.2 PN: no more than 4 TCUs – PCU 50.3: no more than 4 TCUs Any number of TCUs can be operated in the system network. ● CF cards cannot be used on the TCU. ● A 16 bit or 32 bit depth of color setting may be selected. ● If a PC keyboard is connected to the TCU, it is not possible to ensure that all special keys, e.g., multi-media keys, will be transferred to the software of the NCU / PCU. ● Machine control panels connected via a PROFIBUS network are not supported for switchover. ● Distributed memory media that are connected to the TCU via USB can be used.

41.1.3.2

How to register a TCU on the system network

Conditions The boot server (NCU or PCU 50.3) defined in the system network as a DHCP master, must be switched on and be available in the network.

General sequence 1. Connect TCU, or connect HT 8 to a connection module and calibrate the touch panel. 2. Restart the TCU to apply the new settings. Assign a name for the TCU. The name for the HT 8 is taken from the rotary coding switches S1 and S2. – After switch-on, the dialog box "New TCU" opens on the TCU. The prompt "Please enter name of this TCU: TCU1" appears. – After the HT 8 is calibrated, the dialog box "New TCU" opens. The setting for the rotary coding switches is detected and adopted as the name for the HT 8. The following message is output for this: "New TCU 'DIP 6' registered." 3. For an HT 8, confirm the "DIP..." name proposed by the system or adapt the name. You can select any other characters. Press the key to apply the following values as default settings for the HT 8:


995

Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network TCU settings MCP address: TCU index: Enable direct keys: Select HT 8 mode

6 0 No No

1. Select address of machine control panel 2. Select HT 8 mode. Note Additional softkeys are available for convenient touch panel operation: • "OK" has the same effect as the key • Select "DEF" to save the "Default" settings. • "Edit" has the same effect as the or key. 3. Change the proposed name if applicable and accept the entry using the key. 4. Press the key or . Then you will receive the following input prompt: TCU settings MCP address: TCU index: Enable direct keys: Select HT 8 mode

__ __ No No

Note The TCU index is used to evaluate the direct keys. Direct keys can only be activated by appropriate devices. For an HT 8, the TCU index has no function. 1. Select HT 8 mode The default setting for an HT 8 is that "individual" is deselected with "No", i.e. the "auto" mode is activated for automatic detection in the system network. The HT 8 is automatically detected based on its name "DIP_". If "individual" is activated with "Yes", the HT 8 is identified by its MAC address on the system network.

Activate direct keys The signals from pressing the direct keys are sent directly to the PLC. In the PLC, the keys appear as 16 digital inputs. Additional information on programming the PLC is provided in: References: Function manual basic functions, basic PLC program (P3 sl)

996



Definition: Operator panel The term operator panel designates a unit that consists of an OP/TP, a TCU or PCU and a machine control panel (MCP), that are connected to each other via Ethernet. All TCUs and PCU 50.3 can be used along with OP/TP with "integrated TCU", e.g.: OP 08T, OP 015T, TP 015AT.

Specifying settings without machine control panel If a PCU or a TCU has no Machine Control Panel (MCP), you must set one of the two following options: ● MCP address = 0 or no entry After the change of user authorization, there is no switchover of the machine control panel; the previously active MCP remains active. ● MCP address = 255 If the user authorization is transferred to this PCU or TCU, the previous machine control panel is deactivated and there is no active machine control panel from this point on.

Connecting a replacement TCU If a TCU is faulty and has to be replaced, you should proceed as follows: 1. Connect the new TCU. The new TCU lists the TCUs on the system network along with their status “active” or “inactive”. 2. Select the name previously assigned to the faulty TCU from the “Unknown/New TCU” dialog. As a result, the new TCU is recognized on the network and acquires all of the configuration settings from the TCU that has been replaced.

41.1.3.3

Settings in the "config.ini" file

Boot server The active boot server (DHCP server) is detected and displayed in the System Network Center (SNC). The boot server accesses this configuration file accordingly. Changes to the config.ini file do not become effective until the relevant TCU or PCU is next booted.


997


Configuration of the config.ini file The config.ini file has the following configuration: Range of values

Default

Meaning

mcpIndex = Number

0 ... 255

DIP | 0

for MCP

dckEnable = 0

0 or 1

0

for DCK

tcuIndex = Number

0 ... 255

DIP | 0

for TCU

eksIndex = Number

0 ... 255

DIP | 0

for EKS

[Station]

MaxHostIndex = Number

Number of subsequent PCUs or NCUs to which you can switch over.

[DEFAULT] SessionNumber = Number Password = String SuspendLock = Number

0 or 1

0

0: No displacement disable

SuspendPriority = Number

1 ... 10

1

1: Lowest priority

1: Displacement disable set 10: Highest priority StartupPrio = Number

Boot sequence: The lower the number the higher the priority

ScreenOnFocus = String | Number

Not relevant

ChannelOnFocus = Number

Not relevant

[host_1] Address = [hostname | IP-Adresse]

From data file structure

SessionNumber = NUMBER Password = STRING SuspendLock = NUMBER

0 or 1

0

0: No displacement disable

SuspendPriority = NUMBER

1 ... 10

1

1: Lowest priority

StartupActive = 0

0 or 1

Display screen after boot

StartupPrio = NUMBER

0 ... not too high

Boot sequence:

1: Displacement disable set 10: Highest priority

The lower the number the higher the priority

ScreenOnFocus = STRING | NUMBER

Not relevant

ChannelOnFocus = NUMBER

Not relevant

[host_2] ... [host_MaxHostIndex] [T2M2N] SK1 = ch_grp x

998

2 x 8 characters

Empty

Softkey inscription (2 lines)



Range of values

Default

Meaning

SK2 = ch_grp x

2 x 8 characters

Empty


SK3 = ch_grp y

2 x 8 characters

Empty


2 x 8 characters

Empty


... SK32 = ch_grp z ...

Note Compatibility of software versions If a "config" file is available for the TCU, the data file structures of older versions are transferred to the config.ini file and the data file structure is then deleted. Comment In the config.ini file comment lines are indicated by the # character preceding a line.

41.1.3.4

Settings in the "TCU.ini" file

Directories The tcu.ini files is created in the following directories: • NCU:

• PCU:


/siemens/system/etc/tcu.ini /user/system/etc/tcu.ini /oem/system/etc/tcu.ini /oem_i/system/etc/tcu.ini F:\addon_base\system\etc\tcu.ini F:\user_base\system\etc\tcu.ini F:\oem_base\system\etc\tcu.ini

999


NOTICE Only the following entries are evaluated by HMI sl: • VNCServer/VetoMode • VNCServer/AlarmBoxTimeOut • VNCServer/FocusTimeout • VNCServer/AdaptResolution • VNCServer/MaxActiveTCUs and VNCViewer/ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy

Structure and content In the tcu.ini file comment lines are indicated by the # character preceding a line. [VNCServer] # VETO MODE # VetoMode enabled: # VNC server notifies the HMI regie before another # panel gets the focus. # VetoMode disabled: # Focus timeout mode enabled (implicitly; see FOCUS TIMEOUT) # (0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE) VetoMode=1 # FOCUS TIMEOUT # Guaranteed time period (in sec) a panel can hold the # focus at least before another panel can get the focus. # The time period starts from the moment the panel has # gained the focus. FocusTimeout=10 # ALARMBOX TIMEOUT # The time period (in sec) a messagebox is shown (i.e. is # operable) in the case of VetoMode=1; no meaning else AlarmBoxTimeOut=5 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

1000

RESOLUTION = SYSTEM = AUTO_OP_1 (default) = AUTO_OP_2 = AUTO_MON_1 = AUTO_MON_2 = 640X480 = 800X600


Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network 7 = 1024X768 8 = 1280X1024 # RESOLUTION ADAPTION # AdaptResolution enabled: # At system runtime, the system resolution is automatically # adapted to the resolution of that panel which # currently owns the focus. # AdaptResolution disabled: # The system resolution is set at system startup phase. # At system runtime, system resolution remains unchanged # whichever resolution the currently focused panel owns. # (0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE) AdaptResolution=1 # COLOR DEPTH # The value the system color depth is set at system # startup phase # ColorDepth SYSTEM: # System color depth remains unchanged whichever value # the color depth is currently set to. # COlorDepth 16_BIT # System color depth is set to 16 bit. # COlorDepth 32_BIT # System color depth is set to 32 bit. # (0=SYSTEM, 1=16_BIT, 2=32_BIT) ColorDepth=1 # INIT TIMEOUT # Guaranteed time period (in sec) the HMI manager waits # for VNC server initialization. InitTimeout=300 # PCU STARTUP TIMEOUT # Attention: The parameter is only provided for a PCU # configuration with local attached OP ! # # The startup phase is completed if this timeout period has passed # and no registration of a TCU has been carried out at this time. PCUStartupTimeout = 45 # # # # #

TCU STARTUP STEP TIME The startup phase starts at the first TCU registration. The startup phase is completed if the TCUStartupStepTime period has passed and no registration of another TCU has been carried out at this time.


1001

Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network TCUStartupStepTime = 15 [VNCViewer] # ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy # The user rights, assigned to an external VNCViewer # ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy=1 : Guest Mode (View-Only) # ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy=2 : Administrator Mode # ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy=1 : [TCU_HWSService] # TCU CONNECT TIMEOUT # Guaranteed time period (in sec) the HMI manager waits # for TCUs recognized as connected TCUs by the TCU_HWS # service. TCUConnectTimeout=30 # TCU CONNECT TIMEOUT FOR HEADLESS STARTUP # Guaranteed time period (in sec) the HMI manager waits # for TCUs recognized as connected TCUs by the TCU_HWS # service, if a PCU panel doesn't exist and no TCUs are # connected till now. This time period is effective # additionally to the time period TCUConnectTimeout. HeadlessTCUConnectTimeout=30

41.1.3.5

Displacement mechanism for TCUs

Supplementary conditions The following supplementary conditions govern the operation of the TCU: 2 TCUs parallel on NCU 710 4 TCUs parallel on NCU 720, NCU 730, PCU 50.3 To operate a machine with more operating stations then the maximum number the displacement mechanism ensures that only the permitted number of TCUs are active in shadowing grouping. The remaining TCUs are switched to a passive mode, which means they no longer represent a load relative to the resources. Thus the number of TCUs that can be connected to one HMI is no longer limited, the limitation is the number of concurrently active TCUs.

Configuring There are two new entries in the config.ini file for a TCU for the displacement mechanism:

1002



● SUSPENDLOCK: controls whether the TCU can be displaced via the displacement mechanism. SUSPENDLOCK = 0 means that a displacement disable is not set (preset), i.e. the TCU may be displaced by any other TCU. SUSPENDLOCK=1 means that this TCU can never be displaced. ● SUSPENDPRIORITY: This entry specifies a priority for the displacement mechanism to the TCU. In a displacement process the TCUs among the active TCUs with the lowest priority that do not have a displacement disable will displaced. The priority is specified as numeric value in the range 1 - 10. The preset is 1 (lowest priority). Note If you set a displacement disable for a TCU then specification of a displacement priority is unnecessary because it never is used due to the displacement disable.

Displacement rules The TCU can assume the following states: ● The TCU is active and has permission; this is indicated if the TCU displays the HMI screen and the screen is bright. ● The TCU is active, however in observation mode (i.e. does not currently have permission); this is indicated if the TCU shows the HMI screen. however it is darkened compared to the TCU with user authorization. ● The TCU is passive. The TCU shows its selection menu of the possible connections instead of an HMI screen, and the softkey for selection of the last active connection of the TCU is shown in color. In power up of a TCU the TCU always attempts to establish the first connection specified in its CONFIG file. The TCUs from a shadowing group establish their specified connection one after the other as long as the maximum number of permissible active operator units is not exceeded. If a TCU encounters the situation that this number is already reached in its power up, then it attempts to obtain a connection via the displacement mechanism. If it can displace a formerly active operator unit then it takes on the active status itself, otherwise it transitions to passive status immediately after booting.

41.1.3.6

Disable switchover between TCUs via PLC

Overview The TCU switchover disable offers the option of dynamically disabling switchover from one TCU to the next when the system is running via the PLC. For the duration of the disable, a user authorization request to change user authorizations between TCUs will be ignored by the system and rejected.


1003

Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network The rejected user authorization request causes a message to be output in the dialog line of the HMI, in the form of a feedback message for the requester. The message disappears after five seconds.

HMI/PLC data interface The “switchover disable” function is always active and does not have to be switched on explicitly. The function is controlled by a data bit in the PLC. The HMI transfers the active OP to the PLC, thus forming the basis of the control function in the PLC. The control bits and control information for this function are stored in the m:n data interface of the PLC. In terms of m:n, this function can be operated separately for the currently overridden HMIs in both m:n online interfaces (DB19.DBW120 ff for HMI1 and DB19.DBW130 ff for HMI2). If a system is not running an m:n, only the first m:n online interface is used for this function. Switchover disable is controlled by a TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit, managed by the user, on each HMI in the PLC. The bit address for the first HMI is DB19.DBB126.6 and DB19.DBB136.6 for the second HMI. The PLC m:n online interface is expanded so that byte DB19.DBB118 is still added to the first interface and byte DB19.DBB119 to the second. These bytes acquire the index of the active TCU (of the active OP) for the appropriate HMI. The byte is called TCU_INDEX. The appropriate HMI uses the TCU index configured for the active TCU to describe the TCU_INDEX byte. The TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit is monitored by the appropriate HMI. A value = 1 triggers the switchover disable; switchover is enabled if the value returns to 0. The TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit can be set, for example, to the PLC by the user pressing a key or it can be managed by the PLC user program according to its own logic. The TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit is managed in the PLC exclusively by the user; the HMI only accesses this bit in read-only mode. The HMI assigns the configured index of the TCU or PCU whose OP currently possesses user authorization in the shadow grouping. If no OP is active, a value of 0 is entered in TCU_INDEX. If no TCU index is configured for the active TCU (active OP), the value 255 = undefined is presented as the TCU index. This means that the values 0 and 255 may not be configured as the TCU index.

Configuring The TCU index and machine control panel address (MCP address) are configured on the PCU. The TCU index is set in the "OP Properties" dialog of the "System Network Center" program.

Operating principle If the TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit is set for switchover disable, a user authorization request is not carried out independently of the mode set on the HMI for allocation of user authorizations (veto mode), i.e., a change of user authorization is rejected. This message appears on all OPs for approximately 5 seconds: "No switchover: Switchover disable set in current PLC." While this message is displayed, operations on the OP with the user authorization can still be carried out unaffected.

1004



Note The switchover disable only relates to changing the user authorization on the OPs in a shadowing grouping on a PCU. Active switching from one OP to another PCU is not prevented.

Special features The following special cases should be noted: ● Even if switchover disable is set, the TCU_INDEX field value may change in the PLC. This is the case if: – The OP in possession of the user authorization is actively switched to another PCU. Depending on whether another TCU takes on the user authorization or whether no TCU is currently active, either the index of the TCU or the PCU itself (if its directly connected OP becomes active) is entered. This can also be the value 255, if no TCU index is available for the OP. 0 is entered if an OP is no longer available in the shadow grouping. – An m:n switchover is in progress. The HMI of the incoming PCU deactivates the HMI, which is active on it. An OP from the shadow grouping of the new (incoming) PCU must receive the user authorization. The TCU index of this OP is entered in the TCU_INDEX field. – A PCU is disconnected from a NCK/PLC in the context of m:n. No HMI and, therefore, no OP with user authorization is then available on the exited NCK/PLC. This is signaled independently of a switchover disable by entering the value 0 into the TCU_INDEX field. ● If a TCU is actively switched over to another PCU, it can be deactivated there, i.e., it does not obtain the user authorization, if a switchover disable is set for the destination PCU. ● With an m:n PCU switchover, i.e., the PCU is switched to another NCK and, therefore, to another PLC, the PCU takes on the switchover disable settings of that PLC. ● The m:n interlock options on the PLC side have priority over the TCU switchover disable, so that a set TCU switchover disable cannot prevent an m:n switchover. If necessary, the m:n interference options should be synchronized here with those for the TCU in the PLC. It may, for example, be practical to set or remove the m:n displacement disable simultaneously with the TCU switchover disable.


1005


41.1.3.7

Example: How to select the behavior of the TCUs during boot up

Example: Splitting boot support on two PCUs To split boot support over two PCUs, "Boot support runtime and configuration only (TFTP/FTP)" must be selected on PCU_1 and "Boot support IP address only (DHCP)" must be selected on PCU_2. The "No boot support" configuration must be selected on PCU_3: Table 41-1

"TCU support" settings

TCU_1

TCU_2

TCU_3

TCU_4

192.168.214.10

192.168.214.11

192.168.214.12

192.168.214.13

VNC connections: 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.242 192.168.214.243

VNC connections: 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.243

VNC connections: 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.243

VNC connections: 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.242

Switch to system network PCU_1

PCU_2

PCU_3

192.168.214.241

192.168.214.242

192.168.214.243

Services:

Services:

Services:

X DHCP

✔ DHCP

X DHCP

✔ TFTP

X TFTP

X TFTP

✔ FTP

X FTP

X FTP

✔ VNC

✔ VNC

✔ VNC Company network

In this case, PCU_2 serves as the DHCP server which provides the IP addresses for the connected TCUs. PCU_3 is not involved in booting the TCUs, it is however displayed by the TCUs using VNC.

41.1.4

System Network Center (SNC)

41.1.4.1

Overview of System Network Center (SNC) functions

Overview Use the "Settings Network Center" program to configure the stations in the system network. Use this link on the PCU's Service Desktop to start the "System Network Center" program.

1006



System Network Center functions The following tasks can be undertaken on the individual tabs: Tab

Function

Adapter

The active network adapter (default: Ethernet 2) for the system network is displayed and can be switched over. To do this, the TCU should be connected to Ethernet interface 1.

OPs

A list of the declared TCUs is displayed and their codes specified: Status, name, IP address, resolution ,and depth of color, MAC address, the assigned MCP address and TCU index. The VNC connections available and the associated IP address of the boot server, displacement disable, and displacement priority are listed for each TCU.

TCU support

This tab is only active and available in a PCU 50.3. The services needed to operate a TCU can be started, stopped, and activated or deactivated.

TCU mode

Configuration of "Veto mode", resolution adjustment, and the waiting times when booting.

DHCP settings

Configuration of the DHCP parameters and synchronization settings: The IP address and the boot server (TFTP) are predefined.


1007


41.1.4.2

How to select the network connection

"Adapter" tab The status in which the PCU is delivered is the default: Ethernet 2 for system network.

Figure 41-1

"Adapter" tab (default)

The following slave states are displayed: The connection is selected and active. The connection is selected and not active because the TCU is not switched on for example. The connection is not selected and cannot be accessed because e.g. no network cables are plugged in. If the user selects another adapter, acceptance of the new adapter must be confirmed by pressing . The corresponding entries are then executed in the configuration files. The associated services are restarted and the result displayed. Information on operation: The data belonging to a TCU is reloaded in the display by pressing . Press to accept the changed settings. Select to discard the changes. Press to exit the dialog.

1008



41.1.4.3

How to configure a TCU

Distribution The "OPs" tab is divided into two areas:

Figure 41-2

"OPs" tab

①

In the top portion select an OP that you want to configure in the list of "Available OPs".

②

In the lower portion select a VNC connection that you want to configure in the list of "VNC connections".

③

It is necessary to reboot all active TCUs for the changed data to become effective. To do this use the "Apply" button. Use the "Discard changes" button to discard the changes.

What will be displayed? The "Available OPs" list contains all OPs that either have configuration data on the CPU or that are registered with the TCU hardware service. This produces the following states ("State" column) for an OP: State PCU

Meaning The local OP is switched on (or registered with the TCU hardware service) and configuration data is present on the CPU. Within this state all columns of the list are filled out.


1009

Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network State

Meaning The TCU is switched on (or registered with the TCU hardware service) and configuration data is present on the PCU. Within this state all columns of the list are filled out. The TCU is switched on (or registered with the TCU hardware service) however no configuration data is present on the PCU. Within this state the MAC address, the MCP address, the index, and all VNC connection data are not available. Moreover this TCU cannot be edited because the appropriate configuration data are not available. The TCU is not switched on (or not registered with the TCU hardware service) however configuration data is present on the PCU. Within this state the IP address and the resolution are not available because these values cannot be determined for the TCU.

Configuring the TCU Use the following procedure: 1. To configure a TCU that has not yet been connected to the system, use "Add". 2. A TCU that presumably is no longer operated on this system can be deleted. To do this click on the "Remove" button. Deleting the configuration data is only possible if the TCU is not connected. 3. If you click on the "Properties" button the dialog box opens for configuring the settings of the selected components.

Figure 41-3

1010

"OP Properties" dialog


Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network Parameters

Range of values

Meaning

Name

The name of the TCU can be changed.

MAC

Displays the MAC address.

Related MCP

0 ... 255

DIP switch setting will be transferred.

DCK enable

Direct key not activated (default)

☑

Direct key activated (only useful for appropriate devices).

TCU index

0 ... 255

The TCU index is used to evaluate the direct keys (only practical for appropriate devices).

EKS idex

0 ... 255

DIP switch setting will be transferred.

Configuration of T:M:N Softkey text


References: HMI Advanced Commissioning Manual (IM4), t:m:n Configuration

41.1.4.4

How to configure a VNC connection

Configuring a VNC connection The "OPs" tab is divided into two areas: All the connections that the selected TCU can make with VNC servers are shown under "VNC connections". The servers are specified using their IP address. NOTICE The defaults for VNC connections cannot be deleted. If a TCU or an HT 8 is operated via a PCU using direct keys or MCP, the IP address of the PCU and the IP address of the NCU must be entered under "VNC connections". Use the following procedure: 1. To add a new connection use "Add". 2. If the selected TCU can no longer establish a connection to the selected VNC server, then delete the connection by clicking on the "Remove" button. 3. If you click on the "Properties" button the dialog box opens for configuring the VNC connection:


1011


Figure 41-4

Dialog box "Edit VNC connection"

Parameters

Range of values Meaning

Server

IP address or name of a VNC server (NCU or PCU) consisting of a character string in accordance with the rules for hostname.

Session

0

Reserved

Password

password

Session password, always "password"

Suspend lock

0 or 1

0: No displacement disable 1: Displacement disable set

Suspend priority

1 ... 10

1: Lowest priority 10: Highest priority

Start active

0 or 1

After power up a screen is displayed.

Start priority

0 ... not too high Boot sequence: The lower the number the higher the priority

Screen on focus Channel on focus

1 ... 8

CAUTION If the operator panels have been set up in such a way that several operator panels are connected to the same HMI after booting, it is not possible to predict which operator panel will be active after booting. This may occur under the following conditions: • No assignment has taken place in the config.ini. • The config.ini file specifies that several operator panels are connected to the same HMI.

1012



41.1.4.5

Procedure for configuring the TCU Support services

"TCU support" tab On the "TCU support" tab select which services will be started on the TCU at power up: The preset is the configuration "Complete TCU support".

Figure 41-5

"TCU support" tab

Selecting a configuration The following configurations are available under "Default configuration": ● Complete TCU support: Complete TCU support is activated in these configurations and all the services listed below are carried out. ● No boot support: The services for booting connected TCUs are deactivated in these configurations. The TCU hardware service and the VNC service are executed. The TCUs can only be booted from another PCU or NCU. ● Boot support runtime and configuration only (TFTP/FTP): DHCP services are deactivated in this configuration. The remaining services are carried out. The IP addresses of the connected TCUs must come from another PCU or NCU. Booting is however executed from this PCU. To do this, the PCU or NCU supplying the IP addresses must use this PCU as "boot server".


1013


● Boot support IP addresses only (DHCP): TFTP and FTP services are deactivated in this configuration. The remaining services are executed. The PCU provides the TCUs with IP addresses but the TCU must be booted by another PCU or NCU. A corresponding boot server must be specified for this purpose on the "DHCP settings" tab. ● Manual configuration: With the manual configuration, each service can be started or stopped and activated or deactivated individually. The current status of the corresponding service is displayed in the status bar.

41.1.4.6

Procedure for setting the TCU Support modes

Setting Veto mode Set the following parameters on the "TCU mode" tab of the "System Network Center" program:

Figure 41-6

"TCU mode" tab

1. Activate "Veto mode" on the TCU that loses the user authorization, a message will be output in this regard. The VNC service reports to HMI sequence control before another operating device receives user authorization. Enter a time in seconds (alarm box timeout) during which change of user authorization to a different TCU can be rejected.

1014


Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network 2. If veto mode is activated, no message will be output. Enter a time in seconds (TCU focus timeout) during which the TCU at least keeps the user authorization. 3. If "Resolution Adaption" is activated (default) then during runtime the screen resolution is always adapted to the currently displayed operator panel. If "Resolution Adaption" is deactivated then screen resolution will be set again during the power up phase and not adapted at switchover of the operator panel. 4. Color depth is determined by the system or it is set to 32 bits per default. NOTICE Important configuration information If the PCU has a directly connected panel, its resolution must be ≥ the resolution of all panels on the TCUs. This applies with and without "Resolution adaptation": If a PCU does not have a directly connected panel, the greatest resolution of the active (switched on) TCUs/panels is determined and set during booting.

Advanced settings Use the "Advanced Settings" button to display additional setting possibilities: For an external VNC viewer on a PG/PC or PCU 50.3: External viewer security policy ● Guest mode (view only): The user can only view ● Administrator mode (operation mode): The user can also operate. The changes made are saved in the file tcu.ini under /user/tcu.ini:

See also Settings in file "tcu.ini" (Page 999)


1015


41.1.4.7

How to set the DHCP parameters

DHCP settings on the PCU Set the following PCU parameters on the "DHCP settings" tab:

Figure 41-7

"DHCP settings" tab

1. Specify the address range under "IP address allocation" from which the clients of the DHCP server are supplied with IP addresses. The default range is sufficient for most cases. [See basesys.ini: Parameters InternalDynRangeStart and InternalDynRangeEnd] 2. The "Subnet type" range is set according to the IP address specified on the "Adapter" tab. [See basesys.ini: Parameters InternalIP and InternalNetMask] 3. As default synchronization of the DHCP server is activated. Only if a certain server should preferably take over the role of the active server, does it need to be activated as "Master". Under "Timeout for waiting for master DHCP" set the time period that the system must wait so that the intended DHCP master becomes the active DHCP server, even if it is shortly thereafter switched off, or takes longer to boot than other controllers. [See basesys.ini: Parameters SyncModeDHCPD_SysNet and DHCPDNoMasterWait] 4. The default for the DNS service is ".local" and should be maintained. [See basesys.ini: Parameter InternalDNSDomain]

1016


Networking 41.1 Commissioning a system network 5. The two buttons "Clear DHCP" and "Distribute TCU data" are only active when the DHCP server is active: – The "Clear DHCP" button is used to execute the "sc clear dhcp [-X120]" command. This clears the status of the DHCP server at the specified interface (default: system network). It is reset to its starting status. – The command "sc distribute tcudata" is executed using the "Distribute TCU data" button. This distributes TCU data to other machines in the system network. The IP address of the DHCP server which is currently active appears in the output field.


1017

Networking 41.2 Network configuration

41.2

Network configuration

41.2.1

Permissible network topologies This chapter provides an overview of the permissible network topologies.

Ethernet connection A SINUMERIK 840 D sl can only be operated as a network within which the individual components communicate with one another via Ethernet connections. This network must be set up. The individual components are factory-set so that the most frequently occurring standard configurations can be operated without changing the settings related to the network.

Division into system network and company network On the SINUMERIK solution line, the components are generally split into a company network on the one hand and a system network on the other. The connection to the company network provides access to the network drives, for example. On the system network, process data communication and image transmission runs from the components with operator software to the display units – the TCUs. This split is performed physically by means of the prescribed use of the Ethernet interfaces on the components: ● A TCU is connected exclusively to the system network. ● An NCU is always connected to the system network via X120. ● Ethernet interface Eth 2 of the PCU 50.3 is preconfigured for connection to the system network; while Ethernet interface Eth 1 is used for connection to the company network. ● An NCU is connected to the company network via X130. Meaning of the connections:

1018

○

Eth 1 as a DHCP client

●

Eth 2 as a DHCP server

■

Eth 2 with a fixed IP address

Green connection

Uncrossed Ethernet cable

Gray connection

Crossed Ethernet cable (crossover)



41.2.2

Networks without connection to the company network

41.2.2.1

Configuration 1: NCU and TCU

Description

6\VWHPQHWZRUN 7&8

;

1&8

&RPSDQ\QHWZRUN A direct Ethernet connection is used to connect a TCU to X120 of the NCU. NCU and TCU are suitably preconfigured with IP addresses. The IP addresses are not significant for further operation. The TCU is connected to the NCU via a crossed Ethernet cable. The direct connection of the NCU via X120 to the TCU automatically forms a simple system network consisting of two computer nodes.


1019


41.2.2.2

Configuration 2: NCU and PCU 50.3 with a direct OP

Description

6\VWHPQHWZRUN

(WK

;

1&8

3&8

&RPSDQ\QHWZRUN

The NCU and PCU are connected via a crossed Ethernet cable. The NCU is the DHCP server with the IP address 192.168.214.1. For this Eth 2 configuration, the PCU is assigned a fixed IP address in the range 192.168.214.241 – 192.168.214.249 with a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 .

1020



41.2.3

Networks with NCU connection to the company network

41.2.3.1

Configuration 3: NCU and TCU

Description 6\VWHPQHWZRUN

7&8

;

1&8

;

6ZLWFK &RPSDQ\QHWZRUN

The TCU is connected to the NCU (directly) using a crossed Ethernet cable. On X130, the NCU is connected to a switch to the company network with a straight cable. As in configuration 1, there is a direct Ethernet connection between a TCU and X120 of the NCU. NCU and TCU are suitably preconfigured with IP addresses. The IP addresses used here are not significant for further operation.

IP configuration: DHCP server on the company network On X130, the NCU is set to the address reference via DHCP. If the company network has a DHCP server that provides the NCU with an IP address (IP configuration), the NCU is integrated into the company network. Depending on the infrastructure available or the level of network administration of the company network, the following network parameters must be set for the NCU on X130: ● Computer name on the company network ● Address of a DNS server ● Address of a gateway (default router) The IP address of the NCU to this connection is also assigned via network administration.


1021

Networking 41.2 Network configuration If the company network offers a low level of administration (in the worst case scenario the network has only one DHCP server that assigns the addresses from a predefined address range) the NCU receives an IP address that is initially unknown.

41.2.3.2

Configuration 4: NCU and PCU 50.3 with a direct OP


(WK

;

3&8

1&8

(WK

;

6ZLWFK

&RPSDQ\QHWZRUN

The NCU and PCU are connected via a crossed Ethernet cable. On X120, the NCU occupies the fixed IP address 192.168.214.1 in its capacity as a DHCP server (not used in this configuration). For this Eth 2 configuration, the PCU is assigned a fixed IP address in the range 192.168.214.241 – 192.168.214.249 with a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 . The observations made for configuration 3 also apply here in relation to the connection to the company network. The connection to a switch on the company network is made via a noncrossed Ethernet cable.

1022



41.2.3.3

Configuration 5: PCU with TCU on NCU


7&8

6ZLWFK (WK

;

1&8

3&8

;

(WK

6ZLWFK

&RPSDQ\QHWZRUN

In this configuration, a switch is also required for the system network. All components are connected using straight Ethernet cables. In terms of address allocation and the settings that need to be made, this configuration is identical to that of configuration 4. However, in this case, the DHCP server of the NCU actually supplies the TCU with an IP address and serves as a boot server for the TCU. The observations made for configuration 3 also apply here in relation to the connection to the company network. The connection to a switch on the company network is made via a straight Ethernet cable. To connect one TCU to both HMI systems you must create an additional connection to the NCU for the TCU, as described in the following chapter:

See also How to configure a VNC connection (Page 1011)


1023


41.2.3.4

Connecting the programming device (PG) to the NCU


7&8

6ZLWFK

;

(WK

;

1&8

3*

3&8 ;

(WK

6ZLWFK

03,

&RPSDQ\QHWZRUN

A programming device is connected to the NCU on X127 as a standard DHCP client. An NCU is a standard DHCP server on X127. On X127, the NCU occupies the fixed IP address 192.168.215.1 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.224. The range 192.168.215.2 – 192.168.215.9 is reserved and can be used by network stations with a fixed IP address from this range. On X127, IP addresses in the range 192.168.215.10 – 192.168.215.30 are assigned via DHCP, for example to connect a programming device.

41.2.4

Application example

Application The configuration is suitable for the following application: Machine with concurrent operating option to two operator panels , a full-featured operating panel with PCU and an operator panel reduced to tool management. Parallel operation of HMI Advanced on PCU 50.3 and HMI sl on an OP 08T with SINUMERIC 840D sl: PCU 50.3 and OP 08T can be operated concurrently.

1024



3&8

237

237

237

6ZLWFK

6\VWHPQHWZRUN 6,180(5,.'VO Figure 41-8

Configuration example

Proceed as follows To configure the application example, proceed as follows: 1. PCU 50.3 with HMI Advanced Deactivate the DHCP server on the PCU: For this select the option "Boot support runtime and configuration only (TFTP/FTP)" on the "TCU support" tab of the "System Network Center" program. 2. SINUMERIK 840D sl system software version 2.4 and above The systemconfiguration.ini configuration file is included on the SINUMERIK 840D sl product DVD. 3. OP 08T operator panel Once the installation of the OP 08T operator panel with HMI sl is complete, copy the systemconfiguration.ini file from the /Siemens/sinumerik/hmi/appl/systemconfig/tm/ directory to the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg/ directory. After this, a system restart is necessary.


1025


NOTICE Configuration changes on the HMI sl Once the file has been copied, no further settings (e.g., changing language) can be implemented on the HMI sl. If you want or need to implement changes later, the systemconfiguration.ini file can be renamed (e.g., as systemconfiguration.save). After this, a system restart is necessary. Following the restart, the full functional scope of HMI sl is available once again.

1026


Networking 41.3 Service and diagnostics

41.3

Service and diagnostics

41.3.1

Booting of the TCU

41.3.1.1

Messages during booting

Messages when booting While the TCU is booting, progress is displayed after the BIOS has booted and before the operating system is loaded. In addition to messages, the current booting status is also indicated by a progress bar. While the IP address is being determined via DHCP and the TFTP is being downloaded (boot image), a progress bar indicates that booting of the TCU is not yet complete, or that a fault has occurred. The structure of these messages is shown below:

Siemens AG Thin Client Boot loader V 01.00.02.00 IP address

diagnosis window

You can see the current boot phase in the third line. Below that you are told whether you can call up information via if a fault occurs.

41.3.1.2

Diagnostics options during booting In the following cases, the diagnostics window is displayed and booting of the TCU is interrupted: ● When the function is selected during booting ● When a warning message is displayed ● When a fault occurs Note You can select the to functions shown below using the horizontal softkeys on the OP. For example, to select , press the horizontal softkey 7.


1027


Calling up the diagnostics window with Siemens AG Thin Client Boot Loader

V 01.00.02.00

Boot progress: BIOS V 00.00.03.00 MAC address IP address

06/08/2004 11:45:07 08:00:06:00:00:00 received 192.168.214.40 DHCP 192.168.214.1 TFTP 192.168.214.1

OS boot loader (nonfree/linx_tcu.bin)

done

details

boot menu

continue

reboot

Further functions: Function

Effect

F1

Display detailed information

F7

Continue booting of the TCU

F8

Restart the TCU

Press to continue If you select function in the diagnostics window, the following window opens:

1028



Detail messages: (level 3)

Siemens AG Thin Client Boot Loader

V 01.00.02.00

*** Siemens AG Thin Client Boot Loader Start (real to protected mode) [01.00.02.00] *** Bldr16-->32: V 00.00.03.00 06/08/2004 11.45.07 addresses 0xFFFFE34F 0xFFFFE2ED 0xFFFFE2E0 Bldr16-->32: bldr32 at address 0xFFFB0000 length 43008 Bldr16-->32: RLE header BLDR_TCU_RLE 69632 42640 0x3A61F8B3 ... ... PCI: found ethernet adapter (dp83815/16) [address 0000EF00, irq 00000009, type 00000005] ... ... DHCP: send DHCP_V_DISCOVER [server IP address 0x00000000 XID 0x6050004] ... DHCP: received DHCP_ACK [server IP address 0x01D6A8C0] ... DHCP: IP 192.168.214.40 ... ...

up down

page up page down

more details

home end

less details

recall


Effect

F1 to F6

Navigate within the window (alternatively, the relevant keys on the OP can be used).

F7

Display more information

F8

Display less information

F9

Return to diagnostics window

Press to continue If you select function in the diagnostics window, booting of the TCU continues: If booting is not yet complete, you can interrupt the boot procedure again with .


1029


The diagnostics window is displayed automatically in the event of a fault: Siemens AG Thin Client Boot Loader

V 01.00.02.00


06/08/2004 11:45:07 08:00:06:00:00:00 received 192.168.214.40 DHCP 192.168.214.1 TFTP 192.168.214.1

OS boot loader (nonfree/linx_tcu.bin) Linux image (free/linux.bin)

done

Error:

0

Network connection not established

details

reboot


Effect

F1


F8

Restart the TCU

If the diagnostics window is already active and a warning message appears, it is displayed inside the window.

1030



Siemens AG Thin Client Boot Loader

V 01.00.02.00


Warning:

06/08/2004 11:45:07 08:00:06:00:00:00

connection established - no DHCP server available

renewed break

Further functions:

41.3.2

Function

Effect

F1


How to calibrate a touch panel

HT 8: Calibrating the touch panel The calibration is automatically started after switching on HT 8. 1. Follow the instructions on the screen and press the three calibration points one after the other. This completes the calibration. 2. Press the corresponding horizontal softkey on the touch screen to close the command shell and to reestablish the connection to the desired PCU (see the illustration below).


1031


VNC Starter: Default HMI [PCU Name]

1

Calibrate Touch Panel Shift + F5 Scan for Servers Shift + F6

Default Service Shift + F8

Please select server 1|F1

Figure 41-9

Starting the calibration process

3. To perform another calibration during operation, press the keys + to start the command shell: 4. The vertical "Calibrate TouchPanel" softkey starts the calibration process. Note The calibration process on the HT 8 can alternatively be started with the following key combination. + and then the key

TCU: Recalibrating touch screen The key combination below can be used for further calibration during operation without a restart: + + Corresponds to the key combination + + on an OP. Note The "Touchware" program, which is available with Windows XP, is deactivated on the TCU.

1032



Obtaining user authorization On a TCU that has no user authorization, the first key that is pressed serves exclusively to request the user authorization, i.e., this key is not evaluated by HMI Advanced. The settings for the right to veto are stored in file tcu.ini and only take effect if HMI Advanced is installed on the PCU50.3. On the OP of the TCU, the HMI Advanced software can be operated in exactly the same way as an OP directly connected to the PCU. Note These operator input sequence steps must only be carried out by qualified personnel.

41.3.3

How to search for VNC servers

Searching for VNC servers on the TCU To search for VNC servers: 1. Press the keys + , to open the following window:

Figure 41-10 TCU settings

2. Select , to search for VNC servers, e.g.:


1033


Figure 41-11 display of the VNC servers

1034


ESD guidelines

A

ESD notices Electrostatically Sensitive Devices CAUTION Handling of modules containing devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge: When handling electrostatically sensitive devices, make sure that operator, workplace and packing material are properly grounded. Generally, electrostatic modules must not be touched unless work has to be carried out on them. When handling PC boards make absolutely sure that you do not touch component pins or printed conductors. Touch components only if - you are permanently grounded by means of an antistatic chain, - you are wearing ESD boots or ESD boots with grounding strips in conjunction with ESD flooring Modules may be placed only on electrically conductive surfaces (table with ESD top, conductive ESD foam plastic, ESD packing bags, ESD transport containers). Never place modules in the vicinity of display units, monitors, or television sets (minimum distance > 10 cm). Do not bring ESD-sensitive modules into contact with chargeable or highly-insulating materials, such as plastic, insulating table tops or clothing made of synthetic materials. Measurements on modules are allowed only if - the measuring instrument is properly grounded (e.g. equipment grounding conductor), or - before measuring with a potential-free measuring instrument, the probe is briefly discharged (e.g. touch the unpainted metal parts of the control housing).


1035

ESD guidelines

1036


B

Licenses B.1

Licensing provisions

Overview Licensing and warranty provisions for the "PCU Basesoftware Thin Client" software product. 1. Licensing provisions for free software components The free software listed below can be used with the "PCU Basesoftware Thin Client" product: Name

License

File name

Ultra@VNC

GPL

See gpl.txt

Winpcap

BSD style

See bsd-style.txt

DHCP-Svr Win

GPL

See gpl.txt

Tftp (Win)

BSD

See bsd.txt

Tftp (Linux)

BSD

See bsd.txt

Tsort (Linux)

BSD

See bsd.txt

libz

Zlib license

See zlib.txt

FTP (Win)

GPL

See gpl.txt

Linux-Kernel

GPL

See gpl.txt

Bootloader

GPL

See gpl.txt

libc

LGPL

See lgpl.txt

Busybox

GPL

See gpl.txt

lsh Library liboop

LGPL

See lgpl.txt

lsh library libgmp

LGPL

See lgpl.txt

SSh-Server

GPL

See gpl.txt

DHCP Client

GPL

See gpl.txt

NTP-Client

BSD style

See bsd-style.txt

svic_lib

LGPL

See lgpl.txt


1037

Licenses B.1 Licensing provisions

NOTICE These programs have been developed by third parties. If you wish to use free software as well as the program sequence provided by Siemens, please contact the originators or other copyright holders for this software in order to apply for usage rights (in observance of the appropriate licensing conditions). You can obtain the source text for the free software, along with the associated licensing texts and copyright endorsements, from your SIEMENS sales representative for up to three years after purchasing this product. 2. General conditions on the licensing of software products for control engineering This software is protected by national and international copyright laws and agreements. Unauthorized reproduction and distribution of this software or parts thereof is liable to prosecution. It will be prosecuted both according to criminal and civil law and may result in severe punishment or demands for compensation. Please read the licensing provisions for this software before installing or using it. If you received this software on a CD marked “Trial Version” or with software for which you have a license, the software may only be used for test and validation purposes, in accordance with the enclosed Trial License conditions. In this respect, programs, software libraries, etc., must be installed on your computer. We strongly recommend, therefore, that these programs are installed on a stand-alone computer or on a computer, which is not used in the production process or for storing important data, due to the risk of existing files being changed or overwritten. We can accept no responsibility for damage and/or loss of data resulting from the installation of this software, or from non-observance of this warning. All other use of this software is only permitted if you have purchased a valid license from Siemens. If you do not possess a valid license, which can be proved by presentation of the relevant Certificate of License/Software Product Certificate, please terminate this installation and contact Siemens immediately, in order to avoid any claims for compensation. 3. Warranty provisions for free software The free software contained in this product, which is not part of the program sequence provided by Siemens, is used at your own risk, i.e., no warranty claims may be made against Siemens. Siemens does not offer technical support for this product if you are using it in conjunction with modified software. The licensing conditions listed contain notes regarding the warranties offered by the originators or copyright holders of the free software. Siemens will also accept no warranty claims if a product defect is or could be the result of modifications made to the programs or their configurations by you.

1038


Licenses B.2 GNU (General Public License)

B.2

GNU (General Public License)

gpl.txt GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow:


1039

Licenses B.2 GNU (General Public License)

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

1040


Licenses B.2 GNU (General Public License) 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for non-commercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is


1041

Licenses B.2 GNU (General Public License) intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

1042


Licenses B.2 GNU (General Public License) If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does. Copyright (C) This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type 'show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type 'show c' for details. The hypothetical commands 'show w' and 'show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than 'show w' and 'show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items -- whatever suits your program. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program 'Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.


1043

Licenses B.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

B.3

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

lgpl.txt GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.

1044


Licenses B.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow: Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)


1045

Licenses B.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

1046


Licenses B.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: Operator Components and Networking Manual, 01/2008, 6FC5397-1AP10-2BA0

1047

Licenses B.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works.

1048


Licenses B.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY


1049

Licenses B.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

Manual Operator Components and Networking

Manual Operator Components and Networking

Suggest Documents

Networking Components and Devices

Operator and Installation Manual

Operator Manual

Operator Manual

OPERATOR MANUAL

Owner / Operator and Safety Manual

Operator and Installation Manual - Cummins

Operator's Manual

Operator Manual English

Operator's Manual

Operator's Manual

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Operator Manual English

MOTORCyCLE OPERATOR MANUAL

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Motorcycle Operator Manual

Virginia Motorcycle Operator Manual

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Operator's Manual

Operator Manual English

Operator Manual English

Operator Manual English

Operator Manual English

Operator's Manual